Home

RKC INSTRUMENT SR Mini HG SYSTEM H-PCP-G Specifications

1. L Ds 8 Hz 6 Hl 5 M al 4 d 3 3 2 F Ole 1 BH ON Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission 9600bps ON OFF ON Speed 19200bps ON ON Abit ON Stop bit 2bits OFF 7bits ON Data bit 8bits OFF Even ON Odd OFF Parity bit Done ON None OFF Initializing A method By switch ON 4 18 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial connection Connecting to NC1L RS4 1 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting switches start stop synchronization nonsequence format Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits or 7bits Even or Odd Parity bit Done None Stop bit ibit 2bits Initializing method By switch Station No 72 0 to 99 Terminating resistor ON or OFF 1 Adjust the settings with settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 3 ON the terminating switch of a general purpose interface module which will be a terminal 2 Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting Switch 2 RS 485 station No switches Character configuration
2. GOT side GOT side Terminal block YASKAWA PLC side Terminal block YASKAWA PLC side sD E RXD SD EL RXD RD 2 TXD RD 2 ER i 6 DSR ER 6 NC DR 9 DTR DR 9 NC SG 7 GND SG 7 GND RS 1 FG RS 1 FG cs 4 RTS cs lt 4 RTS NC 5 CTS NC i 5 CTS NC fe 1 EST NC 3 EST h RS 232 connection diagram 8 GOT side Terminal block YASKAWA PLC side SD RXD RD 1 TXD ER Clamped by hood 9 DR i m 12 RTS x SG 14 GND z RS 1 6 CTS 2 cs 2 1 1 2 gt NC i I ES EE t 2 E i RS 232 connection diagram 9 a GOT side z Terminal block YASKAWA PLC side 2 o SD o RD 2 TXD ER i i 6 DSR DR r 20 DTR SG 7 SG RS 1 FG cs 4 RS NC 5 CS NC 8 CD 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 11 6 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable c RS 422 connection diagram 3 a Cable length GOT side YASKAWA PLC side The ma
3. Property 1 Me 2 Transmission Speed BPS B Controller Setting CH1 MEI Nexgenie Manufacturer Mtsubishi Electric inda Controler Nexgenie Sears Timeout Time Sec Standard 1 F RS422 485 Delay Time ms Property Value 4 Item Description Range Es Set this item when change the 9600bps eer ien transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with the connected 38400bps p equipment 57600bps Default 9600bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data length used for communication with 7bit 8bit 4 the connected equipment qp Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1 bit 2bit l Default 1bit 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Specify Whether ormo to perfona Parit parity check and how it is performed Even a MENU during communication Odd z 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select th e Controller Setting window is displayed Select the 9 Set the number of retries to be e channel to be used from the list menu performed when a communication PM m timeout occurs D 3 Set the following items Default 3times E Manufacturer MITSUBISHI INDIA Set the time period for a Controller e exgenie Series imeout Time communication to time out to 30sec Contro
4. FUJI PLC 1 Communication settings Make the communication settings using settin For details of FUJI PLCs refer to the following 9 9 9 Switches manuals gt FUJI PLC user s Manual Item Set value MODE Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format Model name Refer to Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps aes NV1L RS2 interface card Data bit 8bits or 7bits NC1L RS2 5752 Even or Odd General purposeinterface Parity bit 1 NC1L RS4 n Done None module J FFU120B n Stop bit 1bit 2bits RS 232C 485 FFK120A C10 n Initializing method By switch gt interf 1 Adjust the settings with settings T O 2 Settings by switch E Make the communication settings using each setting z switch For the NV1L RS2 For the NC1L RS2 Character configuration 52 fe ue gt switches z Operation mode setting switch 2 Eu Front view Rear view Front view Rear view a Setting of the MODE Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch Switch position NV1L RS2 NC1L RS2 MODE Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 17 4 2 Serial connection b Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method For the NV1L RS2 For the NC1L RS2
5. MITSUBISHI INDIA MITSUBISHI INDIA CON side 20 pin PLC side PLC side LL SDAVTXD1 3 L T A R 1 1 3 1 Tx 5 RDA1 RXD1 3 ml Bee gt 10 E ET 9 9 R RDB1 RXD1 3 Rx Rx 12 GND 8 D 8 SG 2 5 5 NC 1 NC NC 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 RSA RTS 14 NC 15 RSB RTS 16 NC 17 CSA CTS 18 A NC 19 CSB CTS 20 1 Aterminating resistor is required Set the terminating resistor selector switch in the main unit to Disable and connect a terminating resistor 110 Q 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 For terminating resistors in PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA refer to the manual of PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA 3 Use a twisted pair cable for the SDA1 SDB1 2 RS 422 connection diagram 2 MITSUBISHI INDIA MITSUBISHI INDIA GOT side D sub 9 pin PLC side PLC side SDA TE PRENNE Tx mp 1 4 1 1 4 i 4 6 7 7 RDA 2 e 9 9 RDB 7k RS Rx 1 GND 8 i GND 1 D b leg rene E ELS RSA 3 8 i CSA 4 8686 1 1 CSB 5
6. Examples of 1 Direct specification The station number setting range of the temperature controller side differs from that of the GOT side Specify the station No of the temperature controller to be changed when setting devices referring the following ion number setting table Module address GOT side T emperature setting of station Remark controller temperature number controller side setting H PCP J H PCP A 0 to F 1016 The GOT Sdn saton H PCP B Hexadecimal Decimal number setting is the module Z TIO address setting value 1 Z COM The GOT sid ti 0toF dried ee Se RE On Z DIO Hexadecimal Decimal number setting is the module address setting value 17 The GOT sid ti 0toF 33to48 S 77 Sice stanon Z CT number setting is the module Hexadecimal Decimal address setting value 33 The GOT sid ti 1 to 99 X TIO number setting is the module Decimal Decimal address setting value 1 CB FB RB The GOT side station PF AG HA 1 to 99 1to99 number setting is the same MA RMC Decimal Decimal the module address THV SA SB1 setting value The GOT side station B400 1 to 99 1to99 number is the module Decimal Decimal address setting value 1 or 2 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify th
7. 1000000500000 D SWITCH 5 Transmission speed 19200 1 0 1 0 0 0 9600bps 1 Adjust with GOT settings 15 2 8 Precautions GOT alarm list system alarm function Error information cannot be monitored when the GOT is connected to a SIEMENS PLC The error information on the PLC CPU side can be monitored For details on the alarm list system alarm refer to the following manual 5 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 1 When powering ON the system Turn ON all PLC CPUs before turning ON the GOT If the GOT is turned ON before power up of the PLC CPUs restart the GOT 2 When powering OFF a PLC CPU at another station When a PLC CPU at another station the PLC CPU to which the HMI Adapter is not connected is turned OFF monitoring by the GOT is stopped To resume the monitoring restart the GOT Monitoring will not be resumed on GOT even if the PLC CPU is turned ON again 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 9 15 2 Serial Connection CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 3 Ethernet Connection 15 3 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 300 400 series Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE Communication driver Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Gateway Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Maximum Number
8. 3 8 3 6 inte etre ut ede uei 3 8 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 1 ie ine nee ee 4 2 4 2 ST Ds 4 3 4 2 1 Connecting to 55 4 3 4 2 2 Connecting to 0 24 00 0 000 e e 4 5 4 2 3 Connecting to MICREX F120S 140S 15 S eee 4 8 4 2 4 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX SX see 4 11 4 2 5 Conneccion DIagratm ii ioni itr itta e re n a Ec ees tete ate onte 4 12 4 2 0 GOT Side Settings uie ne a rex enero ee poeta Toe Ped idet eed teil le aed 4 15 42 PLC Side Setting nui ntes tea bets dete the 4 17 4 2 8 Station number Setting sees se leitete repe emi di lite on Ln De dt e d 4 22 4 3 Ethernet Connection 4 23 4 3 1 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX SX 4 23 4 3 2 GOW Side Settings n e e EC RE Ee oui ens 4 24 4 3 3 side setting MICREX SX 4 26 4 4 Device Range that Be 4 27
9. 0022 NL 2 Dest DW00025 STORE A Stores the processing results 02 NL 2 Source 0 00000 Dest DWO00026 H STORE Stores the status NEM Source DW00001 Dest DW00027 m STORE A Stores the number of station to which NS Source DW00002 the command is sent Dest DWO00028 STORE E Stores the FC 0025 Source DW00004 Dest DWO00029 Stored the data address H STORE A 0027 NL 2 Source DWO00005 Dest DW00030 H STORE A Stores the data size 0025 Source DW00006 Dest DWO00031 E H STORE A Stores the remote CPU 0029 Source DW00007 Dest DW00032 o lt 5 lt gt O E z E o 2 2 O o 0029 END IF 0030 NL 1 Eb NL 1 1 When connecting to multiple GOTs set connection numbers individually for each GOT 2 Set the offset for each device 3 Set the available write range for the holding registers 4 When connecting to multiple GOTs set channel numbers individually for each GOT 5 Set the Dev Typ of the message receive function lt MSG RCV gt to 00016 for the built in MP2300S Ethernet connection or the Ethernet port connection of 218IF 02 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 27 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 5 PLC side setting CP 9200SH series CP 312 CP 317 series YASKAWA PLC For details of YASKAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals
10. 5 3 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 7 5 4 Side 5 12 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 14 5 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 5 19 5 7 5 ET 5 20 uj O E z O 5 2 E gt 5 O E z E 2 2 O o 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Mx x Connectable model Refer to PXR3 FARA HAA 2 x 27 25 23 gt 824 Micro PXR9 Controller X PXGA PXG5 RS 485 PXG9 27 25 23 23 522 9 5 2 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 Connectable Model List 5 2 System Configuration 5 2 1 Connecting to PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 or PXR9 When connecting via the RS 232 communication Communication driver FUJI PXR PXG PXH aes Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperat ure Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 GOT Number of controller Tabi ol T Cabl zT c
11. Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT CET m n Number of connectable ommunic able mode ax i Series me Option device Model equipment ation Type Connection diagram number distance FA LTBGT2RACBLO5 0 5m FA LTBGT2RACBL 10 1m 23 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m RS 485 connection diagram 7 42090m 2 wire type Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 UT100 RS 485 55 485 connection diagram 10 2 wire type 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 8 2 System Configuration 4 l ra E z O o a 2 5 n E lt gt lt o x gt O z E o z z O o 8 2 3 Connecting to UT2000 Series When using the RS232C RS485 converter Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced T ti RS232C RS485 PE Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter 1 Number of connectable Cable model Max Model Commun Cabl
12. PLC The following shows the correspondence table Notation in GOT Notation in PLC DB1 DBWO bO DB1 DBX1 0 DB1 DBWO b1 DB1 DBX1 1 DB1 DBWO b7 DB1 DBX1 7 DB1 DBWO b8 DB1 DBX0 0 DB1 DBWO b15 DB1 DBX0 7 DB1 DBW2 b0 DB1 DBX3 0 DB1 DBW2 b7 DB1 DBX3 7 DB1 DBW2 b8 DB1 DBX2 0 DB1 DBW2 b15 DB1 DBX2 7 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 17 15 4 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC b S7 200 Series lt pit gt CH1 SIEMENS 57 200 Device Information v 00000 Kind 7 9j D E F BIT tzela Mele Bence 00000 51197 BEE o 4 Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Device settings of SIEMENS PLC S7 200 series 1 When setting bit devices except Timer and Counter Set the device using the byte address DEC and the bit address 0 to 7 Description Device y v 51197 amp Device name Bit address 0 to 7 Byte address DEC c SIEMENS OP Ethernet r Bit CH1 SIEMENS OP Ethernet Device Information v 00000 Kind Bale Cle at Range Gele Dee 000000 102397 o Ba Network OHost QG Other Network No 1 Station No 1 Cancel I
13. Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT OUT umber of connectable Model po mune Cbe model Mers Option device Model equipment name ation Type Connection diagram number distance aaao GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m UT321 Built into GOT 93 UT350 GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m UT351 GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m UT420 GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m 1200m UT450 d 5 07520 65 485 connection diagram 3 preparing GT15 RS4 9S UT550 4 wire type UT551 97750 RS 485 UP350 User RS 485 connection diagram 2 un FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m UP351 4 wire type UP550 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 955 5 485 connection diagram 6 FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m Up the UP750 2 wire type number of temperature 0 330 controllers for 1 UM331 92 55 485 connection diagram 4 pm GT16 GT15 31 0 350 4 wire type GT11 10 UM351 1200m GT15 RS4 TE US100 RS 485 connection diagram 8 2 wire type Use FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5 3 i i RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200 FA LTBGT2RACBL10 1m 3 2 wire type 3 ij FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m UP750 RS 485 UT750 552 85 485 connection diagram 10 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 2 wire type 1 Connect the connection cable to the standard RS 485 communication interface onnect the connection cable to the hi erformance RS communication interface 2 C h i bl he high perf RS 485 ication inter 3 Pr
14. 11 13 11 6 Device Range that Can Be 11 15 11 7 Preca tionis raf 11 15 11 1 zi O E z 9 E 2 2 O 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Series90 30 Model name IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 Clock Communication Type RS 232 RS 422 Connectable model GNE Ou n 25 23 Refer to C37 11 2 1 Series90 70 697 0731 697 772 697 782 697 928 IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 697 0788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPM790 RS 232 RS 422 GT GT n FA EE 371122 VersaMax Micro IC200UAA003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UARO28 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 20000 005 IC200UDRO06 20000 010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 IC200UARO14 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 IC200UDRO001 IC200UDR002 IC200UDR003 RS 232 RS 422 GT _ GT GT 251 23 371123 11 2 11 CON
15. Terminating resistor setting switch inside the cover Terminating resistor setting switch inside the cover 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection o D 2 gt z o X 2 a rd a 5 a t a 21 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch For GT2103 PMBD zum 0000000000000 00000006 2 Terminating resistor selector switch 1 24 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on Communication Settings of the Utility Channel number of communication interface communication drivers allocation status Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 57 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 1 powering up the GOT touch GOT basic set Controller from the Utility Utility mai n menu GOT basic set 7833 Maintenance Monitor Data coi Language Standard I F Setting IChannel Dr i ver assign 2 The Communication Settings appears x 3 Verify that the communication driver name to interface b
16. PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Model bl del Max 966 interface ication d li a Option device Model equipment name 4 Connection diagram number distance capsule Type GT GT Built into GOT GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m F55 FFK120A C10 RS 232 or 15m TSOT or 485 interface capsule 5 232 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 4 2 Serial connection When connecting to multiple PLCs Connection cable Communication driver FUJI MICREX F PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Model del Max ode interface ication Cable HESE Option device Model equipment name 4 Connection diagram number distance capsule Type OLI GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 500m 2 Built into GOT GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 1 GOT for up to 6 PLCs GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m RS 232C 485 interface 20 10 RS 485 GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m capsules ar G82 RS 485 connection diagram 1 500m GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd
17. RS 485 Pn F120S RS 232 F140S 85 485 4 23 F15 S SPH200 SPH300 RS 232 x 4 24 SPH2000 RS 485 4 gt SPH3000 MICREX SX SPH SPH200 SPH300 Ethernet 4 3 1 SPH2000 744 25 SPH3000 4 2 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 1 Connectable Model List 4 2 Serial connection 4 2 1 Connecting to MICREX F55 For details on the system configuration on the PLC side refer to the following section 57 4 5 Precautions When using the RS 232 interface card Communication driver TIT FUJI MICREX F Connection cable o a PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C Commun Number of connectable Model del Max oae interface ication s MS us Option device Model equipment O name 4 Connection diagram number distance LE card Type z o Built into 9 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m 2 1 for 1 RS 232C F55 NVIL RS2_ RS 232 or 15m 2 55 RS 232 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd When using the RS 232C 485 interface capsule Communication driver FUJI MICREX F Connection cable
18. 7 16 7 3 1 System configuration for connecting to 7 16 73 2 GOT Side Settings pede on dua 7 17 7 9 3 ree dte e heed o ed cen E DRE Redes 7 19 7 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module F3LE01 5T 11 0 1 7 19 7 3 5 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module 12 0 7 20 7 3 6 Connecting to F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP71 4N built in Ethernet interface 7 21 7 3 7 EN tiene eine candids Gave 7 21 TA Device Range that Can 1 1 40 4 4 4 182 0001 1 1 nnns tenere nnn 7 22 7 4 1 YOKOGAWA FA500 FA MS 5 7 23 7 4 2 YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA MS Series 7 23 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Gonnectable Model 8 2 8 2 System Configuration decederet pad xe EO 8 3 8 2 1 Connecting to GREEN Series tenent doe ttn ede a nana 8 3 8 2 2 Connecting to UT100 Series 8 5 8 2 3 Connecting to UT2000 Series
19. Abort DB000400 Complete 08000211 Dev Typ 00005 Error DB000212 Pro Typ 00001 Cir No 00001 Ch No 00001 Param 0 00000 Normal completion 5 000004 DB000400 Sends a Message Receive instruction Execute MSG RCV Message receive function MSG RCV Execute 5 000004 Busy DB000210 When the receive message command coil Execute turns on the executing coil Busy turns on The normal completion coil Complete or abnormal completion coil Error turns on at the completion of processing Receive message abort coil Communication device type Dev Typ 5 217IF Communication protocols Pro Typ 1 MEMOBUS Line number Cir No 1 For 2171F any of 1 to 16 set in 2 Transmission buffer channel number Ch No 1 Always 1 for 2171 IF 08000211 true Pans Checking the normal completion Does the normal completion coil turn on INC Dest DW00024 END IF Increments the normal pass counter by 1 NEAL NND Abnormal completion IF DB000212 true INC Checking the abnormal completion Does the abnormal completion coil turn on ee Dest DW00025 Increments the abnormal pass counter by 1 STORE Source DW00000 Dest DW00026 Stores the processing results STORE Source DW00001 Dest DW00027 END IF
20. Station Station Station Station Station No 3 No 7 No 1 No 15 No 6 GOT J 0 Examples of station number setting 1 Direct specification When setting the device specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed 3 station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target In the WORD BIT write in operation only the temperature controller whose station No is the same as host address is applicable gt 8 4 2 Communication detail settings n the read out operation only the temperature controller whose station No is the same as host address is applicable For details of host address setting refer to the following gt 8 4 2 Communication detail settings The all station specification can be set for the following temperature controllers only Specification 07420 UT450 UT520 0 550 T551 UT750 UP550 UP750 1 to 99 US1000 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT De
21. PLC side SD 2 RD 1 a TXD ER 1 CD DR 4 DTR SG 15 SG RS Ly 6 DSR cs 7 RTS 8 CTS Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 Connection Diagram 12 9 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC GOT side side terminal block 1 SDA 1 fn RDA SDB 6 RDB RDA 2 SDA RDB 7 k SDB SG 5 i SG RSA 3 i FG RSB 8 csa 4 le CSB 9 i 1 For the system terminal connect 1200 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively 2 5 422 connection diagram 2 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side terminal block 1 side terminal block 1 RDA a RDA RDB i RDB SDA SDA SDB SDB SG SG FG o 1 For the system terminal connect 1200 1 2W termi
22. Interface ER DTR 4 converter side GOT side RC 77 SG 5 CD la DR DSR 6 RD RXD 2 amp 2 RXD RS RTS 7 SD TXD __ a TXD CS CTS ER DTR 4 4 DTR NC 9 SG 5 5 SG FG DR DSR 6 r 6 DSR 4705 Precautions when preparing a cable CS CTS CTS EENE 4 Cable length NC 8 9 NC The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less US 5 GOT side connector 1 Use the interface converter in the DCE mode 2 RS 232 connection diagram 2 For the GOT side connector refer to the following 297 14 1 connector specifications 6 FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the FUJI Interface converter side GOT side SI 30A KS 485 temperature controller NC 1 i 1 FG RD RXD 2 amp RXD 1 1 SD TXD 3 2 TXD ER DTR 4 20 DTR SG 5 i 7 SG 1 1 DR DSR DSR 1 RS RTS 7 4 RTS CS CTS k 5 CTS NC 4 9 NC FG Other than above 1 Use the interface converter in the DCE mode 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 7 ow uj zi
23. Setting item Set value a 1218121619 e 1 to 199 Stop bit 1bit ON 216 to 255 Even OFF OFF POINT Pany bi 2 ON ORF Specifying a station No between 200 and 215 HRS OBS Example of specifying the station No 215 EET 1 Setthe station No to 200 or or 2 Input 215 to the internal device GD10 Echo back Without OFF 3 The station No 215 is specified For details refer to 2 Indirect specification shown below 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 200 to 215 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller pos BE 200 GD10 201 6011 202 6012 203 6013 204 6014 205 6015 206 6016 1 to 255 207 GD17 For the setting other than the above error 208 GD18 dedicated device is out of range will 209 GD19 210 GD20 211 GD21 212 GD22 213 GD23 214 GD24 215 GD25 5 18 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications
24. 1 Direct specification Specify the station No of the PLC to be changed when setting device Specification range 00 to 31 PLC Station No settings Make sure to set a 2 digit number for the station No of the PLC to be monitored by the GOT 11 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item F Y Bit CH1 GE Series 90 mx Device Information GB v 64 7 Kind alfa BIT Range sie Device 0 65535 213 o Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Informati Displays the device type and setting range which are on selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Network Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of the No specified station No 11 7 Precautions GOT clock contro
25. E 9 switches SDA d 508 J 4 Terminator switch eel e NT 55 MODE switch Front view Rear view a Setting of the MODE Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch MODE Switch position Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format b Setting of the station No Make the station No using RS 485 station No Connecting to FFU120B Switches LI di 1 Communication settings Station No Make the communication settings using setting Switches Set value ADDRESS MODE Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps c Connecting terminating resistors Data bit 8bits or 7bits Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS P Even or Odd 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch Parity pit Done None ON Stop bit 1bit 2bits Initializing method By switch Station 72 0 to 99 9 mE Terminating resistor 3 ON or OFF d Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit HEUTE eT just the settings wi settings Parity bit Initializing method 2 Avoid duplication of the
26. T 22 1 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2 2 Temperature controller side 1 1 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 6 RS 485 connection diagram 6 intartaco Terminating resistor 1000 1 2 2 asc oy Temperature ape dE controller side 7 i eo E 1 E E Mag 8 1 x ba go 3 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will b
27. 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd When using the RS 232C 485 interface capsule Communication driver ix FUJI MICREX F e Connection cable T link PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 pude Model Cable model Max UNIONE YER connectable name 4 Connection diagram number distance equipment capsule Type Built into GOT 23 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m es or 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C F140S FFK120A C10 RS 232 mE 15m 232 connection diagram 485 interface capsule F150S 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 4 8 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial connection When connecting to multiple PLCs using RS 232C 485 interface capsules Communication driver FUJI MICREX F T link T link PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 D 5 isl interface Pio Seg Mode Max Option device Model PUE gt name 4 Connection diagram number distance p equipment capsule Type O 2 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 500m Built into
28. l e E 2 O o Z 2 3 n gt E o Y c E Z E 2 2 O 9 5 16 Connecting to SB1 ols 2 SW1 Lower digit setting Communication settings Set value x1 Make the communication settings of SB1 using the 18 ORO switch key on the front surface swe Upper digit setting For the operation procedure refer to the SB1 manual Set value x10 Item Setting range Setting range Communication 0 RKC communication Unit address setting The communication address is the rotary protocol 2 1 MODBUS CH1 to CH4 switch setting value 1 Device address 173 tcd Unit address setting The communication address is the rotary Slave address CH5 to CH8 Switch setting value 2 0 2400bps 414 1 4800bps Communication speed 2 9600bps 3 19200bps Data bit configuration 9 0 to 5 Interval time 0 to 250ms 1 Adjust the settings with settings 2 Select 1 MODBUS When the setting value is 0 communication is not performed 4 communication speed cannot be set to 2400bps or 4800bps on the GOT side Select 2 or 3 5 For details on the data bit configuration refer to the following Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 0 8 None 1 1 8 None 2 2 8 Even 1 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 49 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 2 DIP switch setting SW3 S
29. J 7 5V FG 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual x GE PLC user s Manual Precautions when preparing a cable 3 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 4 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 4 connector specifications 5 GE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the GE PLC side module For details refer to the GE PLC user s manual 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 9 11 3 Connection Diagram zi O E z 9 E 2 2 O 11 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram 11 10 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1 Communication terminating resistor Communication GOT side Module 120072 Module fhe ri TERM S uy we or a i ha 24 3 24 SDA 1 RE 25 25 RD B SDB 6 RP 13 r 13 RD A RDA 2 21 SD B 7 SA 7 SD A SG 5 i 1 7 7 OV Rsa 3 LL i 9 RTS A CSA 4 STUDI 11 CTS A RSB STO 22 RTS B CSB 9 OTSE 23 23 CT
30. e END 14 5 14 5 1 Connecting to Flexi 22 1 1 1 00000 110000 1 nennen nnda 14 5 14 6 Device Range That Be 1 2 11 1 01 nnne tnt nnne 14 6 14 6 1 SICK Safety Controller SICK Flexi 14 7 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 1 Connectable Model EISt 5 2 teet EEE kept occi 15 2 15 2 Sena Connection oot tile ecce 15 3 15 2 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 15 3 15 2 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 15 5 15 2 3 Connection Diagram nahe aine anh io 15 6 15 2 4 GOT Sde Settings tp P REED eset dal 15 7 15 2 5 PLO Side Setting nte RO teen ebat etd 15 8 15 2 6 Connecting to HMI 15 8 15 2 7 Connecting to SIMATIC 857 200 15 9 15 2 61 Precautloris ede C Rte ce ERE Ub e D e t boe tel RR 15 9 15 3 Ethermet Connection et ttn de tete te dee nt tee eet Ede 15 10 15 3 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 series Ethernet conn
31. 9 48 9 5 16 Conriecting to SB HR ERRARE 9 49 9 5 17 Connecting to B4 00 adi eee c degit Pe iMt ME ge cias 9 49 9 5 18 Station number nnne nnne nnn nnnc enia nnne 9 50 Device Range that Can Be 9 52 96 11 RKE SP NT E reto dee Oe REG aah ae ec 9 53 iicet ge m 9 53 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 Connectable Model List eeeiessiissesiiisseeeee entente desees 10 2 10 2 Serial Connection edic date eri iie eet e eade e na E ene da E Eu a ae deua 10 4 10 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to SLC500 Series 10 4 10 2 2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series 10 6 10 2 3 System Configuration for connecting to Control Compact FlexLogix Series 10 8 19 24 lt Connection Diagrams i ete e ORE PEDE OD eae ded 10 9 10 2 5 Side Settings eie dedans ate dene Lr ae de e Lis 10 11 10 25 Slide Settirig s iioc ne cie p Pt e tee C P ta gh E grt eee boe ep ate 10 13 10 3 Ethernet Connection neimara iaaiiai 10 14 10 3 1 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix or CompactLogix Ethernet connection type Ether
32. Communication driver YASKAWA GL PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable MEMoBus Commun Cable model Max x ication Option device equipment name module Tee Connection diagram number distance Built into GOT GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m Differs JAMSC IF60 according to RS 232 or JAMSC IF61 3 Use PLC side 232 connection diagram 1 specifications GT15 RS2 9P GL60S GL60H dE MEMOBUS GL70H GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m Built into GOT GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m GT09 C200R40201 9P 20m same as JAMSC IF612 RS 422 Gr09 C300R40201 9P 30m Above or 62 RS 422 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS4 98 1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 6 4 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 3 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 930 CP 9300MS 9200 H or PROGIC 8 Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH YASKAWA CP9300MS MC compatible YASKAWA GL YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH For GT27 GT25 GT23 For GT21 GS Connection cable Connection cable GOT S Number of ommunica Communic Cable model connectable Model nam
33. 1756 155 12 1756 155 13 1756 L55M14 1756 L55M16 LS Industrial Systems MASTER K K7M DanoS DC K7M DoooU 075 4 15 1756 155 22 1756 155 23 1756 155 24 SICK Flexi Soft FX3 CPU000000 FX3 CPU130002 FX3 CPU320002 1769 L32E 1769 L35E SIEMENS S7 300 400 Series SIMATIC S7 300 SIMATIC S7 400 SIEMENS 57 200 SIMATIC S7 200 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface o D E 2 gt z LL o Y 2 a 3 t a 3 Setting I F The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used Set the I F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT 3rd stage Standard interface 4 Ethernet interface built in the GOT Standard interface 1 2nd stage RS 232 interface built in the GOT Standard interface 3 RS 422 485 interface built in the GOT lt Example In the case of the GT27 A Y f Y i Ux D 5 Standard interface 2 USB interface built in the GOT 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 1 2 I F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used
34. 9 31 9 89 3 RS9 485 cable ee dd edu dex e needed aka edd dd 9 33 GOT Side Settings eot i tuas 9 39 9 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 9 39 9 4 2 Communication detail 9 39 Temperature Controller Side Setting sess 9 41 9 521 Connecting to HPC PJ eti eme Rn e erras 9 41 9 5 2 Connecting to H PCP A 9 42 9 5 3 Connecting to Z TIO 2 2 0222 11 006000 000000000000 100 9 43 9 5 4 Connecting to 2 9 44 9 55 Connecting to CB Series iie cede a e dee e t eer ie geh ie auge 9 45 9 5 6 Connecting to FB Sere ede TES 9 45 9 57 Connecting to RB Series pecie o aac a RE CHE MAREM 9 46 9 5 8 Connecting to 900 900 9 46 9 5 9 Connecting to HA400 401 900 901 9 46 9 5 10 Connecting to AGIU e 9 47 Connecting to RMGBOO six ER 9 47 9 5 12 Connecting to MA900 901 9 47 9 5 13 Connecting to aici eee ai ea nea ae ee ee 9 47 9 5 14 Connecting to 5 100 5 200 9 48 9 5 15 Connecting to X TIO
35. E gt 5 E z E 2 2 O o The device setting of FUJI temperature controller Devices are set with the coil and register numbers of the temperature controller For parameters such as an address map of coil register number and a parameter corresponding to each number refer to the manual of the temperature controller to be used 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 19 5 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 5 6 1 FUJI PXR PXG PXH Device name Setting range Device No representation Bit data 0 00001 to 00001 8 Decimal Bit data 1 10001 to 10016 The bit specification of the word device Setting range of each word device 8 Word data 3 30001 to 31398 2 5 Decimal 9g Word data 4 40001 to 43776 1 Only reading is possible 5 7 Precautions Station number settings of temperature controller In the system configuration the temperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 237 5 4 2 Communication detail settings processing of temperature controller The temperature controller power must not be turned off during the FIX processing Otherwise data within the non volatile memory will corrupt and the temperature controller will be unavailable clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function th
36. Setting CH No Driver RS422 485 1 5 Detail setting V F 2 RS232 None x Detai Setting USB e I F4 Ethernet 0 None zj Detail Setting RS232 Setting 7 Enable the 5V power supply CH No Driver 15 0 None x Detail setting 2nd fo None x Detail Setting 3rd None seem Setting Wireless LAN 0 None x Detail Setting o z E z gt o x 2 a 2 6 5 lt a 1 Select Common Communication Setting from the menu 2 The I F Communication Setting dialog box appears Make the settings with reference to the following explanation 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 9 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Setting item 1 10 The following describes the setting items for the standard setting and extension setting When the GT21 series is selected in the GOT type setting GIO VF RS422 485 232 Side Seria MELSEC Detail Setting Y F 2 RS232 Back o gt None x Detail Setting USB 9 Host PC I F4 Ethernet lo z None x Detail Setting RS232 Setting Enable the 5V power supply Wireless LAN o gt None Detail Setting Item Descri
37. TXD RS 232 cable SD TXD 3 r 2 RXD 1 Connection diagram ER DTR 4 le 1444 RS232 connection diagram 1 SG 5 T 5 SG GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side DR DSR L 6 DSR CD 1 m 1 CD 1 RS RTS 7 i 7 RTS RD RXD 2 i 3 TXD i CS CTS i CTS SD TXD 3 2 RXD i 9 ER DTR 4 mee DSRS eee Worse i SG 5 5 SG 2 a DR DSR 4 RS232 connection diagram 5 gt 1 RS RTS 7 i 7 RTS GOT side l i terminal block ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side a CS CTS k 8 CTS 4 4 4 FG SD 2 RXD th ELM ME RD 4 TXD z 6 DSR RS232 connection diagram 2 lt DR 4 DTR GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side SG 5 SG CD 1 ae ee 1 FG RS 1 CD 5 RD RXD 2 2 TXD CS 7 RTS E SD TXD 3 i 3 RXD NC 8 CTS ER DTR 4 z i 2 SG 5 SG DR DSR 6 1 20 DTR RS RTS 7 4 RTS RS232 connection diagram 6 GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side CS CTS 8 1 5 CTS terminal block Dedicated cable 1761 CBL PM02 9 cue E SD gt 3 RD E 2 RXD RS232 connection diagram 3 ER 1 GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side DR i 4 CD 1
38. Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Odd Retry Times Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps transmission speed used for 19200bps communication with the connected 38400bps Spend equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 8bits Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default Odd None Even Odd Parity Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs Default Otime Retry 0 to 5times Set the time period for a communication to time out Default 3sec Timeout Time 1 to 30sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the 0 to 300m GOT Default 0 Delay Time 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When
39. Timeout Time Sec 3 Default Gateway eS s Tme me 0 Peripheral S W Communication Port No 5015 B Transparent Port No 5014 Host Net Station Unit Type IP Address Port Communication x 1 1 1 507 TCP E a OK Cancel Apply 2 Item Description Range It D ipti t val GOT Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to uu F IP Address Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Fost Ehe toe is _ gt Set the subnet mask for the sub indicated sstensk C 19 network Only for connection via Set the network No of the E Subnet router 0 0 0 0 to Net No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 m Mask If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 Default blank z default value is set Set the station No of the 2 Default 255 255 255 0 Station 2 connected Ethernet module 1 to 254 a Set the router address of the Default blank Default default gateway where the GOT is 0 0 0 0 to Type FUJI fixed FUJI fixed Gateway connected Only for connection via 255 265 Set the IP address of the Bride router address connected Ethernet module address Default 0 0 0 0 Default 192 168 0 1 1024 to 5010 Set the port No of the connected Peripheral S W Set the GOT port No for the S W 5014 to 65534 Port No Ethernet module 251 to 65531 Communication Ma Except for 5011 Default 507 commun
40. pude weble model Max Option device Model module Connection diagram number distance equipment Built into GOT GT09 C30R21301 9S 3m LQE560 E LQE060 RS 232 15m 5 232 connection diagram LQE160 GT15 RS2 9P 1 GOT for 1 S10mini communication ch module GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m m GTO09 C100R44301 9S 10m e Builtinto GOT GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m LQE565 RS 422 GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m 500m LQE165 or Gs RS 422 connection diagram 2 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by Hitachi Ltd For details of the product contact Hitachi Ltd 3 4 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 2 System Configuration 3 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 3 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 For the GT16 GT15 GOT side D sub 9 pin PLC side CD 1 a Le 7 RS RD RXD 2 k 1 80 SD TXD 3 LL 2 RD 1 1 ER DTR 4 6 DR 1 1 SG 5 5 SG DR DSR 6 4 ER RS RTS 7 i H 4 fcD 1 1 CS CTS 8 M 8 Ics de EE 9 9 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt
41. 4 12 SDA 1 2 RX i VCC SDB 6 gt 1 RX 9 TX RSA 3 3 1 RSB 8 1 6 TXR 4 Connect RXR with RX and TXR with TX 2171 01 CSA 4 4 RXR and insert the terminating resistor CSB 9 ji 1a SG SG 5 i FG H 4 MER peo det pn Ier Jy pet a d J 1 The terminating resistor 120 Q is valid by connecting pin 1 with pin 4 and pin 5 with pin 6 of the YASKAWA PLC side 6 12 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA 6 2 Serial Connection VMVMSVA OL NOILO3NNOO 1 1 a 1 Y o x x X ZX x x 1 1 y 9 o t vo rr o o 9 9 YASKAWA PLC side g RS 422 connection diagram 7 GOT side Terminal block YASKAWA PLC side e RS 422 connection diagram 5 GOT side Terminal block m m lt D nn wn WN nn mc cr o o ec Sc TA Pe 0 1 gt o r4 cc X oS x X z 5 9 5 5 ua SEQ o oS X X 0 2 x X OF x o F F E 9 gt x x 5 T ite
42. Address to To improve security the 2000 series supports the IP Filter Setting For details on the IP Filter Setting refer to the following manual 7 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 10 3 4 PLC side setting ALLEN BRADLEY PLC For details of ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs refer to the following manuals 237 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC user s Manual Parameter setting Setthe following parameters with the software package manufactured by the Allen Bradley Item Setting details Name Sets the name IP Address IP address of the connected module Slots No for installing the EtherNet IP communication lot Slo module 1 For the IP address make the same setting as that of each Ethernet module set on GT Designer3 Do not set the same IP Address as those of GOT and controller on the Ethernet network For the address setting on GT Designer3 refer to the following gt 10 3 3 Communication detail settings 10 3 5 Precautions 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the System The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting Station When connecting two
43. Communication 57600 mode 7 bps bits None 1bit Communication 115200 Bbits Even 1bit mode 8 bps Communication 115200 Bbits Nono 1bit mode 9 bps Set the following when using the CPU programming port as the PC link function Make the checksum setting according to the sum check setting on the GOT side For the sum check setting on the GOT side refer to the following CPU PC link 7 2 5 Setting communication interface function Communication settings settings Item Set value Use of PC link function Mark Use enabled Checksum Mark Do not mark OFF Protect function Do not mark OFF 1 The communication mode that can be selected differs according to the CPU 7 10 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 2N With right side cover removed 1 Transmission speed setting switch Set the same transmission speed of the GOT For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 5 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Setting Transmission speed 4 4800
44. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 2 14 3 Terminating resistors of GOT b YOKOGAWA PLC side When connecting a PLC link module to a GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the PC link module The following describes how to connect it on the PC link module F3LC11 2N Set the terminator switch TERMINATOR on the front panel of F3LC11 2N to the 4 WIRE side to enable the terminator LC02 0N Connect the terminating resistor provided with the LC02 ON across SDA and SDB and across RDA and RDB on the terminal block 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection o lt gt lt o x 5 O E Z E o z Z O o 7 2 5 GOT side settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment vokoGAWA Network Duplex Settir Routing Informatio 9 58 Gateway 3 Standard F RS422 485 Fp Communication i Gateway Serve 888 Gateway Clent Mail FTP Server File Transfer F Property 15 Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS AD Station No Switch AD Buffer Memory Unit Nc Stop Bit Party Sum Check Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms YOKOGAWA STARDOM FASO0 FA M3 3 210 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the
45. Standard yF RS422 485 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer FUJI Controller Type Set either of the following FUJI MICREX F Series FUJI MICREX SX SPH I F Interface to be used Driver Set either of the following FUJI MICREX F Series FUJI MICREX SX SPH 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment L gt m Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 12 communication setting Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment For FUJI MICREX F Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 9600 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even Retry Times 0 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address 0 Delay Time ms 5 Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for ps d 384006 Speed communication with the connected 57600bps equipment Default 9600bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data
46. ae 12 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication unicati i ing Make the settings according to the usage environment settings 2 9 9 Property Value Set the channel of the connected equipment Transmission Speed BPS Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Retry Times 3 Manufacturer LS Industrial Systems Timeout Time Sec 3 Controller Type LS Industrial Systems MASTER K lr 2 Host Address 0 Cree 1 Delay Time ms 0 EL Gateway Serve LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Gateway Clent mee Server Fie Transfer F Property Value M FE TransmssonSpeed BPS 38400 3 Item Description Range AD Buffer Memory Unit Nc ML Stop Bt ibt Ks Set this item when change the 9600bps Parity None 1 Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Uu ad 1 Speed communication with the connected 38400bps basis E equipment 57600bps Default 38400bps 115200bps o Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment o Default 8bits gt Specify the stop bit length for o Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits a Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a me None parity check and how it is performed o P
47. dh ca en 2 9 2 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 2 9 2 4 Communication detail 2 9 2 5 PEG Side Setting i reni eee teo e dde dt dec edlen 2 11 2 0 Device Range that Can Be 0 2 1 1 1 116 th ennt ete 2 12 ZET HITAGFIBIDIG H Series recette aec Eie ce dto etai ente eet e toilets 2 14 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC Connectable Model Llst ean eet iet sendet miam 3 2 3 2 System 2 3 3 3 21 Gonnecting to S10V eod erit t od t tpe ide 3 3 3 222 Connecting To STOMi pe te Et EET e SE tede 3 4 3 3 2 2 cerea dera aere deed 3 5 3237 RS 232 Cabl8 bo et lauda oct rtt 3 5 922 20 RS 422 cable ioo ede 3 5 3 4 GO T Side Settirigs oi e tede n fede et tate 3 6 3 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 3 6 3 4 2 Communication detail emnes 3 6 3 5 PEG iii aoa inet en aiia pec edant 3 7 3 5 1 Connecting to communication 3 7 3 6 Device Range that Can Be 2 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 12 4 4004 4 4 16
48. 07420 07450 07520 07550 07551 RS 232 GT GREEN UT750 RS 485 27 25 23 824 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 0 330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US1000 UT130 UT150 RS 232 GT GT UT100 UT152 RS 485 2 7 822 UT155 UP150 UT2400 RS 232 GT cT UT2000 UT2800 RS 485 277823 UT32A UT35A UT52A 9 55 RS 232 er cr UTAd d Mob UT75A RS 485 27 25 23 824 UP35A UP55A UM33A 8 2 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Connectable Model List 8 2 System Configuration 8 2 1 Connecting to GREEN Series When using the RS232C RS485 converter Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced ams Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 T t RS232C RS485 Connection cable 1 4 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter 807 umber Cable model Commu connectable Connection Max Model Cable model Max Option equipment Model name nication DRE 5 Model quip diagram distance name Connection diagram number distance device number Ue UT320 UT321 Built into UT350 GOT ps Use
49. 5 232 5 422 23 37724 FA500 500 5 232 5 422 77722 STARDOM NFCP100 NFJT100 RS 232 727723 FA M3 F3SP05 F3SP08 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 FA M3V F3SP71 4N F3SP76 7S F3SP71 4S Ethernet 37734 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 1 Connectable Model List 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 14 System configuration for connecting to FA M3 M3V When using the conversion cable Communication driver ir YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Connection cable 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable 3 SIO port adapter cable 4 Including the length of the CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable or the SIO port adapter cable Connection cable GOT Number of Model Conversion Prem Cable model Max viia connectable 5 ben 4 n cable po Connection diagram number distance ENE equipment F3SP05 GT GT F3SP08 F3SP21 Built into GOT F3SP22 0S F3SP25 GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m F3SP28 KM10 0C 2 RS 232 or 15 4 F3SP35 552 88 232 connection diagram 1 F3SP38 F3SP53 GT15 RS2 9P F3SP58 F3SP59 1
50. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 5 15 2 Serial Connection 15 2 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC RS 232 cable 1 Connection diagram a RS232 connection diagram 1 GOT side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 SIEMENS PLC side b RS232 connection diagram 2 GOT side SD RD ER DR SG RS CS NC NC CD TXD RXD DSR SG DTR CTS RTS FG SIEMENS PLC side 15 6 RXD TXD DSR DTR 5 CTS RTS CD FG 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 2 Serial Connection c RS232 connection diagram 3 GOT side SIEMENS PLC side SD RD ER DR 5 RS CS NC NC SD TXD 2 RD RXD 1 s 5 SG GND 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following L gt 1 4 1 connector specifications c SIEMENS PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the SIEMENS PLC side For details refer to the SIEMENS PLC user s manual 15 24 Side Settings ll Communication detail settings cu Make the settings according to the usage environment Setting communication interface Communicat
51. Do Transmission Speed BPS 9600 AD Buffer Memory Unt fic 4 Item Description Range Party None 9600b d D Set this item when change the transmission pass cad m Timeout Time Sec 3 Tme ms D Transmissio speed used for communication with the tne x n Speed connected equipment anata c Default 96006 Defan ps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used z Data Bit for with the connected 7bits 8bits equipment Default 85 oa Set this item when change the data length used gt Stop Bit for communication with the connected 4bit 2bits z equipment Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity Parit check and how it is performed during E 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the communication Odd menu Default No Set the number of retries to be performed when 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Retry a communication error occurs 0 to 5times channel to be used from the list menu Default Otime Set the time period for a communication to time ET Timeout 3 Setthe following items Time 3 to 30sec Manufacturer RKC xus et this item to adjust the transmission timing Controller Type RKC SR Mini HG Delay Time ofthe communication request from the GOT 0 to 300ms I F Interface to be used Default Oms Driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Select the communication form
52. TR T R B Ho 770 71 TRO T R B 5 E f 11 TRO TIR A TRA TIR A rt 42 56 SG i 1 8G SG 3 pog p M M 5 E m A 4 pog me 2 27 52 Xo et s ua Mcr ici 5 A a Combination module Combination module i z y jj pog 8 Terminating resistor 1200 1 2W 9 r1 More than 1000 in case of CB series 10 J ee 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM c Connecting terminating resistors 2 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 3 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 4 For the terminal number for connecting to FB series or RB series refer to the table below Terminal No Signal ks Z TIO 100 400 8700 100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 0 Z CT CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 5 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900
53. The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Specify the time period from the S channel to be used from the list menu startup until starts the Startup Time ae 3 to 255sec HF communication with the PLC CPU et the following items efault 3sec Set the foll t Default 3 Manufacturer YASKAWA Set the time period for a 2 Controller Type YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 90sec CP9200SH Default 3sec Set the delay time for reducing the I F Interface to be used Delay Time load of the network destination PLC 0 to 10000 10ms Driver Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway Default Oms The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 957 6 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 727 1 12 I F communication setting Port No module Default 5016 Communication settings Property Set the channel of the connected equipment GOT Net No GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5016 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Controller Type YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Tohenet seteno Timeout Time Sec 3 T jo M Standar
54. With CH3 Produc model with RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code With C4 Produci codem with the RS 485 communica h wire type specified in the E4 terminal ode ion port 4 wire type 2 area option Detailed Without LP Produci with two RS 485 communica ion ports 4 wire type and without the power supply of 24VDC sensor 1or2 With LP Produci with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and with the power supp for 24VDC sensor Produci with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model With C4 Produci codem with the RS 485 communica wire type specified in the E4 terminal odel ion port 4 wire type 2 area option Detailed With LP Produci 2 wire type and with the power supp 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type for 24VDC sensor 8 9 4 J E 2 o 2 3 gt E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 o When onnecting directly Communication driver
55. e 3 ma RSA 2 RSB k CSB _ 2 2 2 ES 43 The signals RSA RSB CSA and CSB are not provided for 2 Return connection is not required 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 9 13 3 Connection Diagram Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1200m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 27 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 3 Connectors on the MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side Use proper connectors on the MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side For the details refer to the User s Manual of the used MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 2 gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 Connectors on the MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side Use proper connectors on the MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side For the details refer to the User s Manual of the used PLC manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA 13 10 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 3 Connection Diagram 13 4 Side Settings 13 4 1 Setting communication interface d 13 4 2 Communication detail settings Communication settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Set the channel of the connected equipment
56. selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Host Select this item to monitor the controller specified Network as the host station in the GOT utility setup Select this item to monitor a controller other than Oth S the one specified as the host station 15 18 15 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 15 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Notation in GOT Notation in PLC DB1 DBWO bO DB1 DBX1 0 DB1 DBWO b1 DB1 DBX1 1 DB1 DBWO b7 DB1 DBX1 7 DB1 DBWO b8 DB1 DBX0 0 DB1 DBWO b15 DB1 DBX0 7 DB1 DBW2 b0 DB1 DBX3 0 DB1 DBW2 b7 DB1 DBX3 7 DB1 DBW2 b8 DB1 DBX2 0 DB1 DBW2 b15 DB1 DBX2 7 15 4 3 SIEMENS 57 Ethernet 15 4 1 SIEMENS S7 300 400 Series Device No Device name Setting range represen tation Input relay 1 10000 to 15117 Decimal Output relay Q Q0000 to Q5117 8 Bit memory M 00000 to M20477 5 The bit specification of the im word device except Input Setting range of each word relay Output relay Bit device memory Timer Counter nput relay to Output relay QW QWO to QW510 Bit memory MW MWO to MW2046 Timer Current value TO to T511 Counter Current value C0 to C511 C 8 DB1 DBWO to 2 9 DB1 DBW65534 Decimal DB2 DBWO to DB2 DBW65534 Data register DB DB4094 DBWO to DB4094 DBW65534 DB4095 DBWO to DB4095 DBW65534 1 Monitoring or writing is not
57. 0013 0013 NL 2 0014 0014 NL 1 0015 0015 NL 1 0016 0017 NL 1 0017 0018 NL 1 0018 0019 NL 2 0019 0020 NL 2 010740 0021 NL 1 STORE Source 0000065534 Dest DW00013 STORE Source 00000 AJ Dest DW00014 H STORE Source 00000 Dest DWO00024 STORE Source 00000 Dest DW00025 IF SB000004 DB000400 2 oat Execute SB000004 MSG RCV Busy 08000210 Abort 08000400 Complete 0 000211 Dev Typ 00006 5 Error DB000212 Pro Typ 00001 Cir No 00001 Ch No 00002 4 Param DA00000 DB000211 true INC A IF Dest DW00024 END IF IF DB000212 true 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection Write range HI B Clears the system registers Clears the normal pass counter Clears the error counter Parameter settings completed Sends a Message Receive instruction The executing coil turns ON when the CPU receives the command The normal or abnormal completion coil turns ON at the completion of processing Pro Type 1 for extended MEMOBUS or MELSEC 2 for non procedure The normal completion coil turns ON at normal completion Increments the normal pass counter The abnormal completion coil turns ON at abnormal completion Increments the abnormal pass counter
58. 14 5 14 6 Device Range That Be 14 6 ra al J O c E 2 gt LE lt m x o o E z E 2 2 o 4 14 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Clock Connectable model Refer to Series Model name FX3 CPU000000 Flexi Soft FX3 CPU130002 FX3 CPU320002 x RS 232 14 2 System Configuration 14 2 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft 27 25 23 37 14 2 1 Connection cable Communication driver SICK Flexi Soft Number of connectable equipment 1 PLC for 1 GOT PLC Connection cable GOT Communic Cable model Max i tion devi Model paries ation Type Connection diagram number distance Optiomdevice 25 Built into GOT 2 4 27 25 Part Number 6041195 am 3m GT15 RS2 9P Part Number 6036342 3m 1 Flexi Soft RS 232 Tear R4 R2 GT10 CO2H 6PT9P Part Number 6021195 2m Part Number 6036342 3m 21 ja 3 3m Built into GOT Gs RS 232 connection diagram 1 1 Product manufactured by SICK Inc For details of the product contact SICK Inc 2 When GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 14 2 14 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 1 Connectab
59. 4 RS 485 connection diagram 4 GOT side Temperature controller ij Temperature controller TEE 1 4 RDA1 3 f H SDB RDB1 4 6 SDA SDA1 1 T N RDB SDB1 2 RDA SG 9 rt SG SDA2 5 4 SDB2 6 RDA2 7 RDB2 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W FG 10 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series GREEN GREEN Signal name Series Series UT55A product condition B UT UP UM US UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A product condition A product condition B UT75A UP55A product condition A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 5 27 25 303 409 503 3 Forthe product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model ues Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor UT55A Pro
60. 4 With STARDOM FA M3 F3SP59 only if communications that include the maximum device number 32767 or 65535 occurs system alarm 322 Dedicated device is out of range Confirm device range may be detected If such system alarm is detected do not use the last 15 bits 5 With STARDOM do not use B32768 or later Otherwise normal monitoring is not performed 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 7 23 o 1 lt lt x gt E 2 E o 2 2 o 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Connectable Model 8 2 9 2 System 8 3 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 12 8 4 GOT Side 5 8 27 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 29 8 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 8 33 Precautions MPH 8 34 O a E z o 2 E lt lt x gt O z 9 E o 2 2 o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models mmunication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351
61. A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 3 18 for the GOTs and the controllers in the network When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 3 18 for the controllers except the GOT in the network Doing so can cause the IP address duplication The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address 192 168 3 18 The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
62. CEREREA i PLC Connection cable Connection cable GOT 11 8 PLC IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 20000 005 20000 006 20000 010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 Communication Type RS 422 Cable model Connection diagram number RS 422 connection diagram 3 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 2 System Configuration Max distance 1200m Option device Built into GOT Model GT15 RS4 0S 25 Communication driver ir GE SNP X Number of connectable equipment Up to 8 PLCs for 1GOT 11 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 11 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 GOT side Communication Modules CD 1 1 SHILD RD RXD 2 2 TD SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 4 l 4 RTS SG 5 7 SG DR DSR 5 CTS RS RTS 7 8 DCD CS CTS kJ 20 DTR FG 2 5 232 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC CD 1 uos RD RXD 2 k 4 TXD SD TXD 3 gt RXD ER DTR 4 1 RTS SG 5 8 GND DR DSR 6 r 2 CTs RS RTS 7 i 5 DCD CS CTS 8 DTR NC g
63. Item Transmission speed Baudrate 1 Set value 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data length DataBitLength 8bits 7bits Stop bit StopBitLength 1bit 2bits Parity bit Parity 1 none odd even Baudrate 1 DataBitLength 1 StopBitLength 1 Parity 1 FifoMode YES InitialDTRState ON SendFlowControlMode CTS ReceiveFlowControlMode DTR 1 Adjust the settings with GOT communication settings 7 2 5 Communication detail settings 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGA WA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection o 1 lt lt x gt E 2 E o 2 2 o 4 Select Reboot Online Mode on the Reboot screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the online mode Defining Logic POU Define Logic POU using Logic Designer peripheral software and download the project to STARDOM 1 Start Logic Designer and create a new project using a template Use STARDOM Serial Communication template 2 Insert FA M3 Emulator Firmware Library to the new project 1 Right click Library under the project tree in Logic Designer 2 Right click Insert and select Firmware Library 3 Double click the SD FCXPLCR LIB folder and double click SD FCXPLCR LIB fwl to select it 4 The library path inserted in the procedures above is as follows Install Folder LogicDesigner Mwt PIc Fw_lib SD FCXPLCR LIBISD FCXPLCR LIB fwl 3 Insert FA
64. Standard F Ethernet Muti Controler Type Ey SER Routing Informatio Bk Gateway Communication Ek Gateway Serve E Gateway Gent E Mai FTP Server Transfer F Sa Q Redundant ND Station No Switch D Buffer Memory Unit Nc Ethernet FUJD Gateway Standard Ethernet Setting Fiter Setting GOT Net No Y GOT Station 1 GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 4 GOT Communication Port No 5030 ir Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time s 0 Ethernet Setting gis 2 Net No Station Unt Type IP Address Port No Communication m 1 FUJI 19216801 507 TOP ewe 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer FUJI Controller Type FUJI MICREX SX SPH I F Interface to be used Driver Ethernet FUJI Gateway 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment gt m Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer
65. W BF 02 3000 3m GARS 485 connection 2 FA LTBGT2RACBL 10 1 diagram 3 5 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m W BF 01 0500 0 5m 374 W BF 01 1000 1m 34 27 25 BE 04 34 W BF 01 3000 3m GT15 RS4 TE 5 485 connection diagram 2 1 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 3 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 4 To use the dedicated cable conversion of the cable may be necessary 5 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 6 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 2 Connecting to H PCP A or H PCP B When connecting to one temperature controller Communication driver RKC nc SR Mini HG MODBUS aaa Connection cable Modular connector 1 5 o Temperature controller Connection cable NOR GOT Number of c Model Communication Cable model Max connector OU E I connectable name Type Connection diagram number distance P equipment E 1 W BF 28 0500 0 5m z Built into GOT gt W BF 28 1000 1m 4 W BF 28 3000 3m 45m or
66. for 1 PLC Oui lt 5 Built into amp GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m 2 F3SP66 ee 10 053 RS 232 OF 15 4 User RS 232 connection diagram 1 54 gt em GT15 RS2 9P HF 2 o Z Z O 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 7 2 Serial Connection When using the PC link module PLC Connection cable Connection cable GOT Communication driver ITI YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Number of Model name PC link module Commun ication Type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Option device connectable Model equipment F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F RS 232 5 76 75 5 71 45 F3LC12 1F GT09 C30R20302 9P 3m or G8 RS 232 connection diagram 2 15m Built into GOT GT15 RS2 9P 25 1 GOT for 1 PC link module 5 05 F3SP08 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 5 71 45 11 2 1 RS 422 GT09 C30R40301 6T 3m GT09 C100R40301 6T 10m GT09 C200R40301 6T 20m GT09 C300R40301 6T 30m or 95 98 422 connection diagram 1 1200m Built into GOT GT15 RS4 9S Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA
67. representation 8 The bit specification of the word device Setting range of each word device ih o g 5 S Data 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal 5 07 Precautions Station number setting of the temperature controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No 01 station clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help l 4 E 2 O 2 3 n gt E o Y 2 E 2 E Z Z O 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 53 9 7 Precautions 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 7 Precautions 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 Connectable Model 16 10 2 10 2 Serial 10 4 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 14 10 4 Device Range that Set 10 20 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY
68. 14 RS 485 connection diagram 14 GOT side Temperature controller 1 1 controller N RX SDA1 1 Li f fii s Li Li RX SDB1 2 J 5 e 5 RX RDAT 2 E m 4 H 4 TX RDB1 4 4 f 1 e EX z 6 TX nh H a H 2 36 SDA2 5 DE p SDB2 ed 3 I RDA2 7 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2Wy RDB2 FG 10 1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 3 7 m Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 15 RS 485 connection diagram 15 RS232C RS485 4 zi interface converter Temperature controller Temperature controller 11 RDAC ba ba ij SDA 1 r1 r1 RDA tit RDB bg Y SDB 2 T T T RDB T SDAQ T RDA 3 pu 1 f SDA 1 1 SDB 1 Li RDB 4 7 m DB SG E T 5 5 mn T mn 56 6 PE Renee q GND Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W 2 gt C 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller
69. 16 2 163 164 165 16 6 167 168 Fixedtoo vs va e om 14 6 1 SICK Safety Controller SICK 112 18 1 162 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 128 19 1 192 193 194 195 96 197 98 Flexi Soft 144 110 1 10 2 110 3 110 4 105 110 6 107 108 160 114 1 141 2 111 3 111 4 111 5 111 6 017 111 8 parce 176 112 1 12 2 12 3 1124 2 5 112 6 112 7 12 8 No 192 Device range error Daves Siting enge represent b Output Q EPET dM Input 1 11 1 to 112 8 Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80 15 a11 0912 13 015 016 018 SUE Decimal 16 a21 022 a23 a24 25 a2 6 a27 028 3 Logic result LQ LQ0 0 io 103 7 senis 32 931 2 5 7 8 Logic input LI 00 to LI3 7 448 04 1 042 043 044 045 046 047 Q48 The bit specification of Setting range of each word 64 951 952 05 3 954 ass 56 57 058 the word device device 80 064 06 2 Q63 06 4 06 5 066 06 7 Q68 Fixedtoo Data byte D DO to 099 Pu 96 07 1 07 2 07 3 07 4 07 5 07 6 07 7 07 8 Data word W WO to W49 112 08 1 08 2 08 4 5 08 6 087 088 Decima 128 99 1 99 2 a9 4 a9 5 aec 99 7 99 8 EFI input byte El 110 to E1233 Decimal 144 010 1 0102 010 3 0104 010 5
70. 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer FUJI Controller Type FUJI PXR PXG PXH I F Interface to be used Driver FUJI PXR PXG PXH 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 5 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting can be 5 12 5 4 GOT Side Settings 5 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Item Transmission Speed Property _ Transmission Speed BPS 9600 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Odd Retry Times 0 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address 1 Delay Time ms 1 Format 1 Description Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 9600bps Range 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 8bits Tbits 8bits Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit 2bits Parity Speci
71. 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 Connectable Model List eet UE sae Shee eet tede a e Eee Ds 9 2 System Configuration ce dec Amd ev sae ded uv tene ded de ded 9 4 9 21 Connecting to HPC Hd cree a Deae ree Gode 9 4 9 2 2 Connecting to H PCP A or 9 7 9 2 3 Gonnectingito SRE necaeeeno bise eto etie T ete rue dede 9 9 9 2 4 Connecting to CB Series CB100 400 CB500 CB700 9 9 12 9 2 5 Connecting to FB series FB100 400 or 9 9 14 9 2 6 Connecting to RB Series RB100 RB400 RB500 RB700 9 9 18 9 2 7 Connection to PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 RMC500 MA900 901 AG500 JUS 9 20 920 Connection to A 9 23 9 2 9 Connection to SRX i id du o quiu 9 26 9 210 Connecting to SB1 tette dcn eese rra 9 27 9 2 11 400 eade do edad EEA d 9 29 ocn oet ien itt PC cxi a Ra cH E RP TAX RR 9 30 9 31 232 tert 9 30 9 3 2 R9 422 cable eet da sed RF n MER ERA
72. Berent No i Network Hos Other Network 1 Station No 1 Switch to the tag list dialog Item Description Set the device name file number element number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Device Informa Displays the device type and setting range which are selected tion in Device Set the station number of the PLC connected to the specified device Host Select this item when monitoring the host PLC Network Select this when monitoring the other PLCs After selecting set the station number of the Other PLC to be monitored NWNo Set the network No Station No Set the station No Switch Select this button to importing the tag file created by to the RSLogix5000 and set devices while checking the tag names tag list For how to import tag files refer to the following dialog lt gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 10 20 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set POINT 07 Device settings of ALLEN BRADLEY PLC The ALLEN BRADLEY PLC device addressing consists of a file and element Make setting as follows using GT Designer3 1 AB SLC500 AB Micro Logix a When setting a bit address as a bit device B3 64 Z 15 File type Bit No File No Bit delimiter Element delimiter Element No Setting by GT Designer3 Devic
73. Connection DIAAN accede don d qa de Ro MR RE ERR RR AERA 13 5 13 3 JRS 292 Cabl8ii et toro EUR Emend 13 5 13 9 2 RS 422 cable doi e EH men p 13 6 19 9 9 55 485 cable dee RU Red EE ED 13 8 134 GOT Side SNJ Seere etat cuarta penat p qae i 13 11 13 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 13 11 13 4 2 Communication detail 13 11 13 5 PLC Side Settirigs niii dte ne icd ee da dd D Led dv e 13 12 13 6 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE 6 13 13 14 CONNECTION SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 1 Gonnectable Model ERE AER UAE 14 2 14 2 System Gonfig ratiorni adde rae 14 2 14 2 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft 14 2 14 9 gt Connection Diagram sees seth etek ane Cro ome A DER RERO EUR RR HE 14 3 14 82 IRS 232 cable edi een betont ete ute et edo une 14 3 14 4 Side Settings 2 diee decet ende ee vv o secu Hidde ep desire dud v ue A dudo nes 14 4 14 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 14 4 14 4 2 Communication detail nme 14 4 14 5 PEG Side Setting
74. Data bit configuration 2 Refer to the data bit configuration Interval time 0 to 250 1 Items and setting range are common to communication 1 and communication 2 12 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 3 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Data bit configuration Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 8n1 8 None 1 8n2 8 None 2 8E1 8 Even 1 8E2 8 Even 2 801 8 Odd 1 802 8 Odd 2 3 Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the FB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following gt FB series Communication Instruction Manual 9 45 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting l e E 2 O o Z 2 a E o Y 14 E 2 E Z Z O 9 5 7 Connecting to RB Series 1 Communication settings Item Setting range Communication protocol 1 MODBUS 9 5 9 Connecting to HA400 401 HA900 901 Device address 4 1 to 99 Slave address 4 2 9600bps ommunication spee 3 19200bps Data bit configuration 2 Refer to the data bit configuration Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Communication 1 Item Setting range Communication speed 11 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Interval time 1 2 0 to
75. E o Y 2 E 2 E 2 2 O o 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 13 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 5 Connecting to FB series 100 FB400 or FB900 When connecting to one temperature controller Connection cable Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of Model Communication Cable model Max DIE ms connectable name Type Connection diagram number distance p equipment Built into GOT FB400 Up to 1 temperature 1 U x FB900 RS 232 GRS 232 connection diagram 4 15m controller for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 Use communication 1 for the communication format 9 14 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter COM A Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 3 Qc Qc 2 o LLI 2 LE Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 E Con
76. PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI Hitachi Ltd FUJI FUJI ELECTRIC CO LTD YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC ALLEN BRADLEY Allen Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc GE GE Intelligent Platforms Inc HMS HMS Industrial Networks LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt Ltd ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA SICK SICK AG SIEMENS Siemens AG PLC Programmable controller manufactured by each corporation Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by each corporation Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by each corporation Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by each corporation Controller Controller manufactured by each corporation PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING o 2 z z o Y 2 a o a gt 3 a t a 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 3 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the 1 12 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 14 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 20 1
77. PXG9 PXH9 H 4010 H 300 H 700 H 2000 H 200 H 250 YASKAWA GL PROGIC8 PROGIC 8 GL 120 GL130 GL60S GL60H GL70H H 252 H 252B H 252C H 20DR YASKAWA CP 9200SH MP 900 Series MP920 MP930 MP940 CP 9200SH H 28DR YASKAWA CP 9200 H CP 9200 H H 40DR YASKAWA CP 9300MS MC compatible CP 9300MS H 64DR H 20DT H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR EH CPU104 YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Series MP2200 MP2300 MP920 MP930 MP940 CP 9200SH CP 312 CP 317 EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH CPU316 HITACHI S10mini S10V LQP510 LQP520 LQP800 LQP000 LQP010 LQP011 LQP120 FUJI MICREX F Series F55 F70 F120S F140S F150S FUJI MICREX SX SPH SPH200 SPH300 SPH2000 SPH3000 FUJI PXR PXG PXH PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 YOKOGAWA FAS500 FA MS3 Series FA500 F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP76 7S 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface o 2 z z o X
78. Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Informati on Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Network Set the monitor target of the set device Monitors the PLC of the specified station No 0 to 31 To monitor the PLC of the specified Station station No No 100 to 115 To specify the station No of the PLC to be monitored by the value of GOT data register 1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the PLC and the GOT data register tati i 0 data register Setting range 100 GD10 0031 101 6011 If setting a value outside the range above a device 114 GD24 range error 115 GD25 occurs 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Be Set Device settings of LS IS PLC 1 When setting bit device except timer and counter Set the bit device using the decimal number three digits and the hexadecimal number Device PF Device number Device name HEX DEC 12 6 1 LS Industrial Systems Device No Device name Setting range represent ation relay P P0000 to PO63F Auxiliary relay M 0000 to M191F Decimal o Keep relay K K0000 to K031F Hexadeci 2 Link relay L 10000 to LO63F mal amp Special relay F F0000
79. Stores the status END 1 Set 0 to the PARAMOS to 11 of the 5 input relay input register coil holding register offset Do not make the offset settings When the offset is needed set Option Offset to each object or make a setting added the offset value to the device 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 19 6 2 Serial Connection o lt 5 lt gt O E z E o 2 2 O o 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 1 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 or MP2200 or MP2300 or 23005 or 92005 or CP 312 or CP 317 Communication driver TIT Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT 2 Number of connectable ommunication Cable model segment Option device Model equipment name module 2 length MP 920 218 When PLC module GOT is N 1 MP2200 100BASE TX The following shows the number MP2300 218IF 01 Shielded twisted pair cable STP or of PLCs for 1 GOT 23005 218IF 02 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP TCP 128 or less of category 5 or higher 400m Built into GOT UDP 128 or less 23005 10BASE T CP 9200SH Shielded twisted pair cable STP or When PLC module GOT is 1 N CP 312 CP 218IF unshielded twisted pair cable UTP The following shows the number of category 3 or higher of GOTs for 1 PLC module CP 31
80. Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at our discretion In some of three cases however Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required MELDAS MELSEC iQ Platform MELSOFT GOT CC Link CC Link LT and CC Link IE are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and other countries Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows S
81. To communicate the MP2000 series or MP920 series with the GOT1000 series the ladder program to receive massages is required When connecting the MP2000 series or MP920 series with multiple GOTs ladder programs to receive messages for each GOT are required ladder program to receive massages r IF A Sets parameters in the first scan after startup NL 1 SB000001 true Low speed scan DWGL SB000003 High speed scan DWGH SB000001 FOR A Wu Variable Clears DW register to zero Init 00000 Max 00031 Step 00001 STORE 0002 Source 00000 Dest DWO0000i END FOR END FOR 0003 NL 2 4 lt STORE Sets the connection number z 0004 Source 00001 2 Dest DW00002 77 lt STORE Sets the coil offset 2 LE 005 Source 00000 NL 2 2 Dest 0 00008 m 2 STORE Sets the input relay offset z 0006 Source 00000 5 NL 2 Dest DW00009 r rH STORE 1 5 the input register offset 0007 Source 00000 Dest DW00010 LH STORE the holding register offset 2 0008 Source 00000 Dest DW00011 0009 STORE Write range LO 0009 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00012 Continued to next page 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 25 6 3 Ethernet Connection 0010 0010 NL 2 0011 0011 NL 2 0012 0012 NL 2
82. Z Z O 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 9 1 Connectable Model List 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 1 Connecting to H PCP J When connecting to one temperature controller Connection cable 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration Communication driver Cem RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Conversion Temperature controller Connection cable tor GOT Number of connector TRIS connectable Model Communication Cable model Mes Model Option device Model equipment name Type Connection diagram number distance name W BF 28 0500 0 5m Built into GOT fad W BF 28 1000 1m W BF 28 3000 3m 7 l 15m RS 232 connection E GT15 RS2 9P zZ diagram 1 o RS 232 27 25 5 Built into GOT 93 E W BF 02 0500 0 5m g W BF 02 1000 1m 15m FAX067 A W BF 02 3000 3m 3 z GT15 RS2 9P O x a O T Built into z o RS 422 RS 422 connection 1200m _ a to 1 m T diagram 1 IcT emperature PI controller for 1 gt GT15 RS4 9S GOT z O Built into RS 485 connection 1200m _ diagram 1 GT 27 25 GT15 RS4 9S Boars FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m 3 ser m i gt 5 485 connection 1200 FA LTBGT2RACBL10 1m 3 diagram 3 3 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m W BF 01 0500 0 5m 72 W BF 01 1
83. es RS 485 1200m Built into connection diagram 5 FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 2 T Use RS 485 Z TIO Up to 16 pa 1200m FA LTBGT2RACBL 10 1m Z CT Up to 16 connection diagram SRZ RS 485 9 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 2 Z DIO Up to 16 Total of Z TIO Z CT and Z DIO Up to 31 for 1 GOT Bo tes 1200m GT15 RS4 TE connection diagram 7 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 9 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to communication extension module Z COM with a converter Communication driver Cie RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 pieni EE terminating resistor Connection cable 1 Z COM Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT Number of Model Terminating cable mod el Max Model Communic Gable mod id Max Option connectable uM Connection diagram Connection diagram equipment name resistor distance name ation Type distance device quip number number Up to 16 Z Bui COMs W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 28 0500 0 5m
84. i Model name Connection Option device Model equipment diagram distance name Type distance 4 diagram number number Built into GOT Up to 31 Us RS 485 RS 232 t 7 RS 232 15m e SB1 connection 1200m CD485 V connection controllers for 1 diagram 8 diagram 3 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 11 Connecting to B400 Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS c l O 2 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 D emperature Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller Ma Number of Commun Cable model Cable model connectable Model KS distance 5 name ication Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model equipment number number Built into GOT B400 x RS 422 RSA RS 422 Use RS 422 Up to 31 temperature x specificati connection diagram 3 connection diagram 4 controllers for 1 GOT ons 27 25 GT15 RS4 98 z m 2 6322 8 485 connection diagram 5 1200m Built into GOT 93 5 E FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m TET 4 p to 31 temperature specificati RS 485 485
85. snas b14 b15 Timer output T512 to T999 Decimal 0 15 T Counter output C C000 to C511 Specified bit of the following 4 4 2 FUJI MICREX SX Series gt word devices Word device bit Direct access user file OVI Device No relay WB WBOO0 to WB511 Sues nete Setlingirange Auxiliary relay WM WM000 to 511 g Specified bit of the following gt gt word devices Keep relay WK WKO00 to WK063 i 1 2 Decimal Word device bit Direct access 2 Special relay WF WFO000 to WF125 m User file A iat Non retai nnunciator relay WA000 to WA045 on retain m WA o memory M 23 o Differential relay 3 Retain memor WD un LO to L2097151 Decimal o Link memory WL WLOOO to WL511 Decimal z System memory 23 SMO to 5 511 Direct access SM 97 W24 0000 to W24 0255 0 24 1 bit specification of a word device is performed after the 67 GOT reads the value do not change the value in the User file W30 sequence program during this period User file W31 467 W30 0000 to W30 4095 2 Whenitis used with bit specification bit specification of word device the offset function cannot be used 2 2 aqnas 3 When bit specification bit specification of word device is User file performed the uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is W108 4 67 W108 0000 to W108 4095 b15 User file W109 0000 to W109 4095 Higher Lower g 4 6 7 W109 bO bi ds b14 b15 D
86. 010 6 010 7 010 8 5 Decimal E 160 0112 0113 011 4 011 5 011 6 Q117 Q11 8 5 EFI output byte EQ Decima 11 176 012 1 012 2 123 012 4 012 5 012 6 012 7 0128 Decimal 192 Device range error Logic input byte LD LDO to LD3 Decima Logic result LQ Logic input word LW LWO to LW1 Decima Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 190 0 190 1 1002 100 3 190 4 190 5 100 6 190 7 gt 8 LQ1 0 191 1 191 2 19133 101 4 1015 191 6 191 7 POI T z m 16 10220 19241 1022 1023 1024 1025 102 6 Lo27 H 24 La3 1 1032 1033 1 5 103 6 1037 Device of SICK Flexi Soft lt Only reading is possible for all devices d Logic input LI o Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 o 0 102 110 3 105 106 8 uto 14 2 44 3 ut4 urs ute utz z 16 uzo u21 u22 uz3 124 125 126 127 24 130 2 uas 137 32 Device range error Ni EFI input El 2 Offset 0 1 2 3 8 to 15 0 EM10 EM11 EM12 E1113 16 EM20 EM21 EM22 E123 32 EM30 E134 EM32 E133 48 Fixed to 0 S Fixed to 0 240 256 E1210 E1211 E1242 1213 272 E1220 1221 E1222 1223 288 E1230 E1231 E1232 E1233 Device range error 302 Device range error 14 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 7 14 6 Devi
87. 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 3 6 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit For the installation method of each unit refer to the User s Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are using For the method for installing a unit on another unit refer to the following gt User s Manual of GOT used When using a bus connection unit The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used 1 Wide bus units GT15 75QBUS 2 L GT15 75ABUS 2 L GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extension interface If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above the unit cannot be used Example Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units Serial communication unit Bus connection unit Serial communication unit 2 Standard size bus connection unit GT15 QBUS and GT15 ABUS A bus connection unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Example Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units Serial communication unit 1 16 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit or CC Link communicati
88. 2 a o 5 52 a Type Model name Type Model name NFCP100 UT35A NFJT100 UT52A F3SP05 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 F3SP08 UTAdvanced Series UP35A F3SP10 UP55A F3SP20 UM33A F3SP30 H PCP J F3FP36 H PCP A F3SP21 H PCP B YOKOGAWA STARDOWM FA MG Series F3SP25 2 0 F3SP35 Z DIO F3SP28 Z CT F3SP38 CB100 F3SP53 CB400 F3SP58 CB500 F3SP59 CB700 F3SP66 CB900 F3SP67 FB100 F3SP76 7S FB400 UT320 FB900 UT321 RB100 UT350 RKC SR Mini HG RB400 UT351 RB500 UT420 RB700 UT450 RB900 UT520 PF900 UT550 PF901 UT551 HA400 401 UT750 HA900 901 UP350 RMC500 UP351 MA900 UP550 MA901 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Series ue Aone UM330 THV A1 UM331 SA100 UM350 SA200 0 351 051000 SLC500 20 UT130 SLC500 30 UT150 SLC500 40 UT152 SLC5 01 AB SLC500 UT155 SLC5 02 UP150 SLC5 03 UT2400 SLC5 04 UT2800 SLC5 05 UT32A 1 6 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Type AB MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 Series Model name 1761 L10BWA 1761 L10BWB Type AB Control CompactLogix Tag Model name 1794 L33 1794 L34 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L
89. 8 19 12 RS 485 connection diagram 12 RS232C RS485 interface converter MEHR Temperature controller _ Temperature controller RDA La L 6 TX RDB 4 4 TX SDB 2 f E RX SDA 1 5 RX SG 5 2 SG T GND Wi rerum Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W sa Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 13 RS 485 connection diagram 13 GOT side Temperature controller i Temperature controller SDA 1 f Hs RX SDB e 5 T 5 RX tt Fog ti Tf r1 RDB 7 1 1 6 E B 6 TX se s H 2 se RSA 3 j o 5 RSB Terminating resistor css o k FG 1 Terminating resistor having 100 1 2W should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 37 m Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram
90. A series Bus connection 1ch unit standard mode GT15 ABUS2 For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection unit Bus connection 2ch unit standard mode GT15 75QBUSL For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series Bus connection 1ch unit slim mode GT15 75QBUS2L For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series Bus connection 2ch unit slim mode GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit slim mode For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit slim mode Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P RS 232 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin male GT15 RS4 9S RS 422 485 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin female GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 485 serial communication unit terminal block MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 Optical loop unit GT15 J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 Optical loop unit MELSECNET H communication unit used in the MNET 10 mode GT15 J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit MELSECNET H communication unit used in the MNET 10 mode CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX Optical loop unit CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link IE Field Network 1000BASE T unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Intelligent device
91. Built into GOT Gs RS232 connection diagram 3 D dom RS232 connection diagram 6 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 ForMicroLogix1000 Digital CPU it is supported in the series D and later 3 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 10 6 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver ir AB MicroLogix DH485 network Connection cable A L T es H Adapter PLC Connection cable GOT Number of _ 49 Communic Calle mogel Max connectable Series Adapter ation Type Connection diagram CI eO Option device Model equipment number ia o Built into GOT gt GT GT i 2592 RS232 connection 45m GT15 RS2 9P 5 diagram 2 9 MicroLogix1000 1770 RS 232 1 GOT for 1 adapter z 1200 1400 1500 mE J GT10 C02H m ePT9P lt O IGTosP z i 8 65232 connection 5 Built into T diagram 5 g 2 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 5 2
92. CD FG RS RTS 7 m 4 RTS i RD RXD 2 W 2 TXD CS CTS k 5 CTS i SD TXD 3 3 RXD 9 8 EST ER DTR 4 6 DSR SG 5 m 7 SG b RS 232 connection diagram 2 BRIDE DTR 4 side YASKAWA PLC side DSR 6 LLL RS RTS 7 H iJ 4 RS CD 1 oH 1 FG E CS CTS 5 CS RD RXD 2 2 TXD 9 8 CD SD TXD 3 3 RXD 4 ER DTR 4 L4 DSR f RS 232 connection diagram SG s H GND f RS 23 connection diagram 6 side YASKAWA PLC side DR DSR 6 lt 9 DIR pm 1 41 FG RS RTS 7 LJ 4 RTS RD RXD 2 M 2 TXD CS CTS ku 5 CTS SD TXD 3 1 3 RXD 9 1 8 NC i a ER DTR 4 6 NC se s 7 RS 232 connection diagram 3 DROSR NG GOT side YASKAWA PLC side pcd amp 11 RS RTS 7 4 RTS CD 1 1 FG i a CS CTS jeu 5 CTS RD RXD 2 2 TXD i 9 8 EST SD TXD 3 gt 3 RXD ER DTR 4 H 141 RTS se s H 7 GND DR DSR i 6 DSR RS RTS 7 LL 5 OP CTS CS CTS k i 8 PWR 9 9 DTR 6 10 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection g RS 232 connection diagram 7 j RS 232 connection diagram 10
93. CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan April 2015
94. Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 2 Communication mode settings Make this setting by operating the communication mode select DIP SW Switch position Communication mode ON T Item Set value ON PC link communication mode l OFF Transmission speed 9600bps Data bit 7bits 8bits Parily bii Even odd none 3 A setting of the station No Make this setting by operating the station No select Stop bit 1bit 2bits Rotary switch Address 1 to 99 Switch position Station No uu 0 PC link communication without sum check 1 PC link communication with sum check 0 1 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 1 2 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units 2 3 3 4 8 5 3 Connecting to UT2000 Series 4 5 5 6 Communication settings 6 7 Make the communication settings using setting 7 8 switches 8 9 9 10 Item Set value A 11 Transmission speed 9600bps B 12 Data bit 8bits fixed P 15 Parity bit Even odd none D 14 Stop bit 1bit fixed E 15 Station No 72 1to 16 F 16 Communication mode PC link communication mode 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units Settings by switch Communication mode select DIP SW Communication setting Rotary switch Station No s
95. Decimal Coil MB 000000 to MB65534F Ke Hexadecimal 8 Input relay IB 1 1B00000 to Hexadecimal gt The bit specification of Setting range of each bit the word devices a device 2 Input register 4 0000 to IW7FFF Hexadecimal IW 8 gt Holdi ist 3 M MWO to MW65534 Decimal 2 Th d i ia Setting range of each word specification of the bit device A Only reading is possible 2 For CP 317 the bit access of word device MW is enabled for reading only 6 34 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 YOKOGAWA PLC Connectable Model List 7 2 Serial 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 16 Device Range that Be Set 7 22 T o l lt x gt E Z o E 2 Z O o 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Connectable model Refer to FA M3 FA M3V F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 5 22 05 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP76 7S 5 71 45
96. ForMicroLogix1000 Digital CPU it is supported in the series and later o 8 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 7 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 3 System Configuration for connecting to Control Compact FlexLogix Series Connection cable Communication driver AB Control CompactLogix PLC Connection cable GOT Tm T Number of connectable Series Communic cab moce ees Option device Model equipment ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT GT Built into GOT 1747 CP3 1756 CP3 RS 232 15m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FlexLogix or S 5588232 connection diagram 4 27125 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 10 8 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 4 Connection Diagram RS232 connection diagram 4 GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC CD 1 CD RD RXD 2 k
97. J 2 gt O E z 9 E o 2 2 O o 3 Decimal points are not displayed 4 4 1 FUJI M CREX F Series 4 To read write data from to a user file set SI data for the data format of the PLC CPU and 16 bits for data length on GT Designer3 With any setting other than the above the PLC does not operate normally Device No Device name Setting range representation Data format of the PLC 5 CPU GT Designer3 setting relay B B0000 to B511F Auxiliary relay M M0000 to M511F SI Binary 16 bit length Device data bit 16 bits Keep relay K K0000 to K063F DI Binary 32 bit length Cannot be used BD 8 digit BCD Cannot be used Special relay F 1 F0000 to F125F Decimal Hexadecimal 5 bit specification of a word device is performed after the Annunciator relay A0000 to 045 GOT reads the value do not change the value in the A sequence program during this period 6 When itis used with bit specification bit specification of word Differential relay D D0000 to DO63F device the offset function cannot be used 8 7 When bit specification bit specification of word device is 2 Link memory L L0000 to L511F performed the uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is 2 ai e b15 m Timer outpu 0 01s T 000 to T511 Higher Lower j bO b1
98. J O 2 E z O 5 2 E gt 5 O E z E 2 2 O o 5 3 2 RS 485 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 485 connection diagram 1 Interface Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W 2 converter Wm Sui Temperature Temperature RC 77 4 controller side controller side 1 TXD gt TXD A RXD RXD 1 1 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Terminating resistor should be provided outside for a interface converter which will be a terminal with the terminating switch turned OFF 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 RS 485 connection diagram 2 Interface Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2 2 convener Temperature Temperature SI 30A 2 controller side controller side it 1 SD RD i 7 1 1 SD RD H n m it GND e P 3 2 ML E E 3 5VIN 4
99. M x o e SN crede eg erem 3 ade Ma ucc EE qucm i 1 1 1 i 1 D 1 1 1 5 1 1 D i 1 c 1 1 t 1 1 o 1 1 1 1 c 1 1 1 c 1 1 1 1 i 1 N 1 1 1 e 1 i Pepe m m a y v 0 9 Y v Xa N ommo 4 69 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB 5 6 13 6 2 Serial Connection 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of RS 422 cable 2 must be 300m or less The maximum length of RS 422 cable 1 differs according to the specifications of the YASKAWA PLC side For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s manual b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications c YASKAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YASKAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s manual 3 Connecting terminating resistors a GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT For GT27 GT25 GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For GT21 Set the terminating resistor selector to 3300 For the procedure to set t
100. MC 6 33 6 4 5 YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP92008H 5 6 34 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 751 5 E fena caede era etc Ec a Rte ERE ELT 7 2 12 x cit Ad te iati date 7 3 7 2 1 System configuration for connecting to 7 3 7 2 2 System configuration for connecting to 00 7 5 7 2 3 System configuration for connecting to 7 5 7 2 4 Connection diagram eii nen ele ddr na enda eh cov eee eee a eu dade cc Dd 7 6 1 2 57 GOP SIDS SOUINGS x extet timer de date Tee Ra eue chacun kr ea niea dno Es 7 8 7 22 o PLO Sde Son pud e i 7 9 7 2 7 Connecting to CPU port D sub 9 pin conversion cable SIO port adapter cable 7 10 7 2 8 Connecting PC link module F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N 11 2 7 10 7 2 9 Connecting PC link module F3LC11 1F 12 1 7 11 7 2 10 Connecting PC link module LCO1 ON 02 0 7 12 7 2 41 Connecting to STARDOM sani ose at a ase et ao dds head a dua 7 13 7 2 12 Precautioris iila e Hg teca Ieri tib un ee Piece 7 15 753 Ethemet Connections iiie i E ou ot itd
101. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT2000 series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 For GT Works3 Version1 gt NEES Z IL LN A 0 EEE EEE mHITACHI IES PLC mGE PLC mHITACHI PLC 5 INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC mFUJI PLC 5 SAFETY CONTROLLER mFUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER mSIEMENS PLC gYASKAWA PLC mYOKOGAWA PLC mYOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER mALLEN BRADLEY PLC Q SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 6 Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions WARNING resulting in death or severe injury j Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the N caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward i
102. Network Select this for monitoring other controllers After selecting set the station number of the Other controller to be monitored NW No Set the network No Station No Set the station No 1 Setting of the CPU No Network CPU No 0 2 6 Other Network No 1 Station No 1 When monitoring single CPU system Set to 0 When monitoring a multiple CPU system Set the CPU No 0 to 4 When CPU No is set to O the monitoring target is CPU No 1 7 4 4 YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 Series Device No Device name Setting range representa tion Input relay X X00201 to X71664 Output relay Y Y00201 to Y71664 Internal relay 1 11 to 165536 Link relay L L1 to L71024 5 Common relay E E1 to E4096 E Special relay M M1 to M9984 Decimal amp Timer TU TU1 to TU3072 Counter CU CU1 to CU3072 Specified bit of the following word devices Except Timer TP TS Counter CP CS Timer TP TP1 to TP3072 Timer TS TS1 to TS3072 Counter CP CP1 to CP3072 Counter CS CS1 to CS3072 File register B B1 to B262144 8 Data register D D1 to D8192 8 Common register R R1 to R4096 Decimal E Index register V V1 to V256 Link register W W1 to W71024 Special register Z Z1 to 2512 Converting bit devices into PURO Except M Counter CU Writing Is not possib e 2 Writing to con inuous devices is not po
103. RS 485 GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m 07420 connection 4200m 12 RS 232 15m UT450 diagram 1 568 232 connection GT UT520 4 wire type diagram 1 27 25 UT550 GT15 RS2 9P UT551 c 0175072 UP350 UP351 Built into UP550 GOT 23 Gee GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Up to 31 UPTS0 t Ns erature z UM330 connection 1200m ML2 RS 232 15m E UM331 diagram 5 Us RS 232 connection controllers for 1 UM350 2 wire type diagram 1 Hp GOT GT15 RS2 9P 0 351 5 US1000 lt Built into GT GOT 23 User GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Use RS 485 UP750 connection 1200m 12 RS 232 15 UT750 3 diagram 9 GADRS 232 connection z 2 wire type diagram 1 27 25 lt GT15 RS2 9P o O x 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation gt 2 Connect the connection cable 1 to the standard RS 485 communication interface 3 Connect the connection cable 1 to the high performance RS 485 communication interface 2 9 um o 2 2 O o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 8 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Communication driver oj YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced
104. TIT RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 1 Temperature Connection cable 1 GOT controller Me Number of connectable Model Communi Cable model distance n cation Option device Model equipment name Connection diagram number Type Gs RS 485 connection diagram 5 1200m Built into GOT FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m SB1 RS 485 5 485 connection diagram 6 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT l 4 E 2 O o 2 3 a E o Y 2 E Z E Z Z O 65 RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200 GT15 RS4 TE 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 27 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485V Communication driver Cem SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature Connection cable 1 Converter 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cabe mode Cable model connectable mo Connection Max Model Communication 5 5 E Max
105. TRA x Connecting terminating resistors RDA1 3 i l 4 NC 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following i manual RDB1 4 i 5 NC gt Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller 1 SDA2 5 3 SG 1 1 SDB2 6 4 56 SG 4 RS 485 connection diagram 4 RDA2 7 GOT side RKC temperature controller side terminal block Modular connector RDB2 8 Bae 5 SDA1 1 f 2 SG 9 i i i SDB1 2 1 T R A FG 10 1 1 RDA1 3 3 SG 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 RDB1 4 4 N C Connecting terminating resistors SDA2 5 5 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following f manual SDB2 6 6 SG C 3 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller RDA2 7 RDB2 SG 9 1 FG 10 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the unit to 100 OHM e Connecting terminating resistors 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 5 Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 33 9 3 Connection Diagram 5 RS 485 connection diagram 5 GOT side SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature controller contr
106. The sound output unit or external I O unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Example When installing a sound output unit Communication Sound output unit Communication unit Sound output unit 1 18 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit Only either one of the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit can be installed to the GOT Install the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit at the 1st stage of the extension interface These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage When any of these units is used the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the extension interface Model Communication unit Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 CC Link IE controller network pM GT15 J71GP23 SX communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Example When installing a video input unit and a MELSECNET H communication unit MELSECNET H communication unit sx Video RGB Ss ES gt input unit Video RGB MELSECNETIH EON lt input unit 4 S communicat
107. UTAdvanced Series UT35A Signal name iti o UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A product condition EN E UT75A UP55A product condition b Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No o SDB 301 407 501 1 2 SDA 302 408 502 2 RDB 304 410 504 4 5 RDA 305 411 505 5 5 303 409 503 3 Forthe product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix cod uffix code Model Produet Optional suffix code Remark E condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS LLI A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire n e UT55A type Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24 sensor Product without the additional contact z output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 o wire type 2 wire type Standard code model x Product with the RS 485 communication O Mic port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in x With CH3 the terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication z 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication 5 With ICA port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code 2 model 2 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller
108. Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller Precautions when preparing a cable 10 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1200m or less 11 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following K 1 4 1 connector specifications 12 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor by operating the terminating resistor setting switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 57 14 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 9 38 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 4 Side Settings 9 4 1 Setting communication 9 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication ng settings Property Value Set the channel of the connected equipment Transmission Speed BPS 9600 2 Data Bit 8 bit LE 2 Stop Bit 1 bit Controller Setting Parity None QD CHI RKC SR Mini HG Manufacturer Retry Times 0 c Q o Controller Type RKC SR Mini HG 5 ip se 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 ir Delay Time ms 0 a 5 ray Format 1
109. When Net No 1 and Station No 2 are set for an Communication fixed TCP fixed object the GOT monitors the CPU whose slot No is Bonae Connection setup UCMM 1 Default UCMM Class3 Set the slot No of the PLC to which Slot No the Ethernet module is connected 01020 Default blank 1 Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers W Communication detail settings 10 18 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 3 Ethernet Connection 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 3 Setting IP address and port No The same IP address cannot be set for the same port No The same IP address can be set for the different port No IP Filter Setting V Reflect IP filter setting in the GOT This setting is shared by GOT standard Ethernet setting and GOT wireless LAN I F setting Use IP filter Access from IP address below Penetrate E2E3 Range Start IP Address 1 End IP Address
110. gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual Parameter settings Make the parameter settings with a peripheral tool 1 Settings for CP 218IF Settings by DIP switch 1 Settings for 218TXB Set the DIP switch SW2 as follows ON Setting Item N O 10 100 F H INIT TEST OFF Set value Setting range ON Extended mode 13 channels up to 1024 words Item Set value Module Type CP 218 CPU Number 01 Circuit Number 01 Hot Swapping O Item CNO 03 CNO 04 CNO 05 Local Port 10500 10501 10030 Node IP 192 168 001 018 192 168 001 020 192 168 001 073 Address Node 1 05016 05017 21001 Port Connection TCP TCP UDP Type Protocol Extended Extended Extended Type MEMOBUS MEMOBUS MEMOBUS Code BIN BIN BIN 1 Be sure to set the values above for the address so that the GOT communicates with the programmable controller correctly For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the following 6 3 2 m Ethernet setting 2 Settings for CP 218IF Item Set value IP Address IP address for 218TXB Transmission Response Time Not required parameter Count of Retry setting Not ired Number of Retries Connection Number 1 Local Port 10500 Node IP Address Local IP address of GOT Connection Node Port Local port No of GOT parameter setting Connection Type UDP Protocol Type Extended MEMOBUS Code BIN
111. instance 2 Define the program instance name and select Emulator for the program type 7 2 12 Precautions 6 Defining Target Setting Define the IP address or host name of STARDOM for which the communication settings are made Device range Double click Physical hardware When performing monitoring with the GOT connected Configuration IPC_33 FCX01 FCX Target Setting to a YOKOGAWA PLC and setting devices for objects and input the IP address or the host name use devices within the device range of the YOKOGAWA PLC Downloading the project When a device outside the range is set on an object an 1 Execute Build Make indefinite value is displayed on the object Same as when pressing the function key F9 No error is displayed in the system alarm For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs 2 Download after confirming that the compile error refer to the following manual does not occur Select Download in the project control dialog displayed when Online Project 2 gt 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set control is selected Connecting to STARDOM 3 When the download is completed select Cold and start STARDOM 1 Redundant system When STARDOM is configured with a redundant system the connection is not supported 2 System alarm The PLC error does not appear in the system alarm 3 GOT clock control Since the STARDOM does not have a clock function the settings of t
112. lt gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 15 3 4 PLC side setting SIEMENS PLC For details of SIEMENS PLCs refer to the following manuals 72 SIEMENS PLC user s Manual Parameter settings Set the following parameters with the SIEMENS software package 1 Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE 2 Ethernet connection type OP communication a S7 200 Set the following parameters Item Module Position Setting details Value in Position of the Ethernet module IP Address side IP address Module Address Subnet PLC side subnet mask mask Number of connections to configure for this module Set 1 as the number of connected GOT This is a Server connection Servers respond to connection request from remote Mark the check box clients a Settings of IP address and subnet mask Local Properties Select Accept all connection requests Server 3 Item Setting details IP Address PLC side IP address Parameters Subnet E PLC side subnet mask mask Remote Properties Set 10 00 in TSAP Client in TSAP Enable the Keep Alive function for this Unmark the check box connection b Fetch port setting b 57 300 400 Set the following parameters Item Setting details Options Select Fetch passive When using the Ethernet module Local PLC side IP address IP dec Remote D
113. 1 for 1 GOT W BF 02 1000 1m W BF 28 1000 1m GOT Z TIO Up to 16 BF 02 1 BF 28 Z CT Up to 16 Z COM W BW 02 TU 1200m COM A RS 232 300031 15m pid Z DIO Up to 16 Use RS 422 83 232 GT45 e tion di 2 tion diagram 2 connection diagram 2 connection diagram 2 RS2 9P DIO Up to 31 for Z COM 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 10 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting directly to communication extension module Z COM Communication driver Ce RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS c 55 ei B B E 2 terminating O resistor Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 2 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT c MOX Number of 2 Model Communic Terminating Calle nox 51 E Connection diagram Connectiondiagram distance Option device Model name ation Type resistor equipment number number W BF 02 Up to 16 Z COMs MES GT 0500 0 5m Built into GOT 23 for 1 GOT 1 Z TIO Up to 16 W BF 02 1000 1m 575 422 T 2 hj CT Up to 16 RS 422 W BW 02 W BF 02 3000 3m connection diagram c 2 7 00 Up to 16 or 1 PE Total of Z TIO Z
114. 1 Tx SDB1 2 i f RDA1 3 9 qi 8 Rx 1 1 Rx 1 4 GND GND 5 5 SDA2 5 5 SDB2 6 RDA2 7 2 8 SG 9 10 ral Set the terminating resistor to Enable when arranging the GOT in the end position of the system configuration Set the terminating resistor to Disable when arranging the GOT in any position other than the end position of the system configuration m 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 For terminating resistors in PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA refer to the manual of PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA 4 RS 485 connection diagram 4 1 Set the terminating resistor to Enable when arranging the GOT in the end position of the system configuration Set the terminating resistor to Disable when arranging the GOT in any position other than the end position of the system configuration 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 For terminating resistors in PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA refer to the manual of PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA MITSUBISHI INDIA MITSUBISHI INDIA GOT side terminal block PLC side PLC side SDA 1 E te 9 1 i i 1 i Tx 1 i Tx SDB 7 1 7 lt Rx Rx RDA 9 9 i 1 8 Rx i Rx 8 z ROB GND GND 5 5 SG 1
115. 1 24V SG 5 SG RD RXD 2 7 TXD RS i RTS SD TXD r cs CTS ER DTR 4 5 N 1 SG 5 2 SG NC 9 1 le Besse ASSUME MER J DR DSR 6 SG RS RTS 7 6 CTS CS CTS k RTS e bs ee 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 9 10 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 297 1 4 1 connector specifications c ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side module For details refer to the ALLEN BRADLEY PLC user s manual 10 10 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 5 Side Settings Communication detail settings Setting communication interface 1 AB SLC500 AB 1 Ns Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Transmission Speed BPS 19200 2 Data Bit 8 bit a Stop Bit 1 bit crees an 3 sum Check Done ee Sando Sum Check Type BCC Bi Seer cox mm Adapter Address 0 Fire tense 1 Ea Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS AD Station No Switch amp D Buffer Memory Unit s
116. 1 GOT for 1 PLC Z 2 27 25 Built into GOT 9 2 GT09 C30R40202 14P 3m 5 GT09 C100R40202 14P 10m GT09 C200R40202 14P 20m GT09 C300R40202 14P 30m 300m GT15 RS4 98 or RS 422 Uss RS 422 connection diagram 3 pear R4 GT10 C02H 9SC Differs 21 according to HE m 85 422 connection diagram 6 2 Built into GOT specifications 1 When a GT10 C02H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 7 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 5 System configuration for connecting to CP 9200SH 317 Connection cable Communication driver Cem YASKAWA CP9200MS H Communication driver Cem YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH For GT27 GT25 GT23 For GT21 GS Model name CP 9200SH CP 317 PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Communication Cable model A connectable a ication distance Option device Model module Connection diagram number equipment Built into GOT GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m Differs according or to PLC side GT15 RS2 9P RS 232 connection diagram 6 specifications CN1 RS 232 1 EE EE connection GT10 C02H 6 2 Shean Stose MEE d R2 1 GOT for 1 E eee sega same as above Built into GOT communication 10 modu
117. 15P 3m o J 0 I lt I O E z E 2 2 O o Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 1 Specified transmission speed 19200bps GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 2 Transmission speed other than the Built into GOT 252 12 RS 232 15m above GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m GT15 RS2 9P 232 connection diagram 1 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 2 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m GT 232 connection diagram 1 Built into GOT GT Specified transmission speed 19200bps EH CPU104 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m EH CPU208 232 connection diagram 2 E 3 Specified transmission speed EH 2 RS 232 Jim EH CPU316 EH CPUB16 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 5 ion di EH CPU548 3 232 connection diagram 2 Transmission speed other than the GT15 RS2 9P above GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 1 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m or Gss RS 232 connection diagram 2 1 To connect to H 200 to 252 series connect to the peripheral port of the CPU module 2 Toconnect to serial port 2 of H 252C CPU22 02HC 22 02 the round connector 8 pins D sub connector 15 pins conversion cable CNCOM 05 made by HITACHI Industrial Equipment System
118. 2 System Configuration 2 3 Connection Diagram 2 7 Side 5 2 9 PLC Side Setting xz a eda coo o e Ere ados 2 11 Device Range that Be Set 2 12 2 J N I lt O E z E 2 2 O o 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock E Connectable model H 302 H 702 H 1002 2002 RS 232 cr H 4010 RS 422 n 251 23 300 Large sized Series H 700 x H 2000 Refer to 537224 H 200 H 250 H 200 to 252 culi enn Series are ROSE 27 25 23 H 252B H 252C 37222 H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR i H 20DT H Series GT_ycT Lou H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR 37222 EH CPU104 x EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH 150 series RS 232 97 pr 93 EH CPU316 EH CPU516 EH CPU548 2 2 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 1 Connectable Model List 37222 2 2 System Configuration 2 2 1 Connection to large sized series Communication driver m HITACHI HIDIC HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 Connection cable To use transmission control p
119. 2 5 System configuration for connecting to 92005 CP 317 6 8 6 2 6 System configuration for connecting to MP2200 2300 or 23005 6 9 6 2 7 Connection Diagram e Ee ee 6 10 6 2 8 GOT Side Settings dtes dd eder edad a d aded 6 15 6 2 9 PLO SHE Stings CE 6 17 6 37 Ethernet Connection utet irt le iretur Pla ance Eia pte Ca RA C Rab creto dad 6 20 6 3 1 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 or MP2200 or MP2300 or 23005 or CP 9200SH or CP 312 or ee nennen ener rnnt nennen nnns 6 20 6 3 2 GOT SIDS Stns ir de Fee du 6 21 6 3 3 GOT Ethernet 2 2 00000000 esee entend dentes dan nnne dd 6 22 6 3 4 side setting MP2000 series MP920 6 23 6 3 5 PLC side setting CP 9200SH series CP 312 317 6 28 6 3 67 Lire ERE 6 31 6 4 Device Range that Can Be 5 6 32 GET YASKAWA GL PROGIGO iret rte ee teca tpe a dee aed eas e b ena 6 32 6 4 YASKAWA 92005 900 6 33 6 42 9200 6 33 6 4 4 YASKAWA CP9300MS
120. 24 22 302 408 502 2 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 5 27 25 303 409 503 3 Forthe product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type UT55A Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24 sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication DW port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in RIGAS the E3 terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication 2 With IC4 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor having 220 1 4W should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram
121. 250 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Data bit configuration BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit 801 8bit Odd bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration 11 Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 1 1 to 99 4 Slave address 1 Interval 3 0 to 250 ms Communication 2 Item Setting range Communication speed 271 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 0 8 None 1 1 8 None 2 2 8 Even 1 3 8 Even 2 4 8 Odd 1 5 8 Odd 2 3 Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the RB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following RB series Communication Instruction Manual 9 5 8 Connecting to PF900 900 BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit 801 8bit Odd bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration 27 Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 22 1 to 994 Slave address 2 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps Communication protocol 1 MO
122. 3 12 2 2 Connecting to K2008S idisse idee diii didi ree dida redd i ee dd td inn da 12 5 12 2 9 Connecting to KS00S 12 7 12 3 Connection Diag aM e adicto aliti e 12 9 12 3 1 65 232 o tH e I HI UE erepti e dete s 12 9 12 32 RS 422 cable odii iiie tei di Eon ee dere cete dd oL eee dde ree dea LL ce oid 12 10 12 4 GOT Mee 12 11 12 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 12 11 12 4 2 Communication detail 12 11 129 PEG Side Settilig one EE et vtm Tt de 12 12 12 52 Connecting to PLG GPU eei eet 12 12 12 5 2 Connecting to Cnet I F module rererere enaa EREEREER ENARA 12 12 12 6 Device Range that Be 12 13 12 6 1 15 Industrial Systems nennen nnne nnns 12 13 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 1 Connectable Model 5 eT 13 2 1322 System Configuration otv ntn era ea a tede to Tp c dea itte te gra dus 13 3 13 2 1 Connecting to Nexgenie 1000 PLC Nexgenie 2000 PLUS 13 3 13 3
123. 3m RS 232 GT15 RS2 9P connection diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 21 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485 V Communication driver SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 _J Connection cable 1 Temperature 5 uberi Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 GOT zi Max Number of connectable Model Cable model distance Model Commun Cable model Max equipment Connection diagram ication Connection diagram dista Option device Model name name number Type number nce PF900 PF901 Built into HA400 GOT 23 dp 8 485 5 RS 232 Up to 31 temperature HA900 1200 CD485 V RS 232 pum 15m 901 connection diagram 8 connection diagram 3 controllers for 1 GOT 27 25 RMC500 SA100 GT15 RS2 9P SA200 4 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 22 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 8 Connection to THV A1 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Communication driver Cem v RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS c
124. 4 0 1 8 6 8 2 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced 5 8 8 8 3 Connection Diagram dace dete tiere eie e ed e edd nn de a nn eta daa 8 12 8 31 232 te Dalee er eh 8 12 8 3 2 55485 m eR MIU 8 13 9 4 Settings eraot ite anna aia ies 8 27 8 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 8 27 8 4 Communication detail 8 27 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting enne 8 29 8 5 1 Connecting to GREEN 5 8 29 8 5 2 Connecting to UT100 5 8 30 8 5 8 Connecting to UT2000 Series 000000 00 eene tete tenen nee 8 30 8 5 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced 5 8 30 8 5 5 Connecting to RS232C RS485 converter 2 8 31 8 6 8 7 98 5 6 Station number setting ace ER RE CORRER IAE TRI RE 8 32 Device Range that Can Be 8 33 8 6 1 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced em 8 33 e 8 34 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 9 2
125. 4 1 connector 1 20 1 4 2 Coaxial cableconnector connection nenne 1 22 1 4 8 Terminating resistors Of 1 23 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected 1 25 1 6 Checking for Normal nennen 1 27 1 6 1 Check on the uai emeret t dme prs 1 27 1 6 2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side For Ethernet connection 1 30 1 6 3 Confirming the communication state to each station Station monitoring function 1 32 CONNECTIONS TO NON MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 27 Connectable Model List eod e d asciende 2 2 2 2 System AE e OB dee eT ERU 2 3 2 2 1 Connection to large sized 2 3 2 2 2 Connecting to 200 to 252 series H series board type or EH 150 2 5 2 3 Connectioni DIagralm enc die a piece E E ED e d E e t REL 2 7 23 1 5232 edt 2 7 23 22 RS9 422 cable eL ed eri e P eee eed e ovd c eet 2 7 2A GOTT Side Settings EID ERR oh
126. 4 4 1 FUJI MICREX F Serie eda i 4 28 4 4 2 MICREX SX 4 28 AS 4 29 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 Connectable Model Listene airin denn AEE AAA edat dde edd dns 5 2 5 2 System Configuration niini ani eee idee odo ted edad tte thi dd edd ted edd d ed ded dd i dde 5 3 5 2 1 Connecting to PXR3 4 PXR5 or 9 5 3 5 2 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 or 9 5 4 5 3 Gonnectlon Diagram aias ecce 5 7 5 921 5 232 Ee 5 7 5 3 2 2 5 485 tete eic RR ee aes 5 8 5 4 Side Settings si cite eder eed Ee d Rede Fon t b d RU 5 12 5 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 5 12 5 4 2 Communication detail 05 5 12 5 5 Temperature Controller Side 0 5 14 5 5 1 Connecting to 4 5 9 eene denen nennen sete da esed
127. 5 232 connection 25 c diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P o 2 RS 232 5 Built into GOT LLI T W BF 02 0500 0 5m RAM 1 emperature W BF 02 1000 1m 15m FAX067 p len controller W BF 02 3000 3m PAN for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P Built into GOT RS 422 Uss RS 422 connection 1200m _ diagram 1 GT 27 25 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 7 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Modular connector 1 Connection cable 2 Modular connector 1 Modular connector 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Cable model Cable model Max M a Model Communication 3 sue di connectable Connection diagram Connection diagram istance Option device Model equipment number number Built into GOT W BF 02 0500 0 5m 5 2 to a E RS 422 W BF 02 1000 1m te RS 422 1200m dri H PCP B connection diagram 1 controllers W BF 02 3000 3m for 1 GOT GT15 RS4 9S 4 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product c
128. 797924 SR Mini HG RS 485 H PCP A RS 232 GT cr e RA H PCP B x RS 422 7 922 m 32 SRZ Z DIO x RS 422 737923 Ze RS 485 CB100 400 RS 232 500 REGE 3 924 CB700 CB900 FB100 x RS 485 400 RS 232 FB 9 2 5 x RS 422 25 23 900 EGGS RB100 RB400 RB RB500 x RS 485 737 9 26 RB700 RB900 PF900 96 x RS 422 RS 485 HA400 401 RS 232 900 901 RS 422 Eom RMC RMC500 x RS 485 25 23 927 mm RS 232 MA oe x RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 AG 500 RS 422 THV 1 RS 485 7 928 SA100 RS 232 5 200 5 RS 485 27 927 Continued to next page 9 2 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 Connectable Model List Communicatio Series Model name Clock Dn Connectable model Refer to RS 232 er cr RS 485 5 929 RS 232 SB1 SB1 x 37 9 2 10 RS 232 B400 B400 x RS 485 3792 1 d From the models of temperature controller select the detailed model name which supports each communication type and communication protocol MODBUS For details of RKC temperature controller detailed model names refer to the following catalog 7 Catalog of RKC temperature controllers l 4 E 2 O o Z 2 3 a E o Y D E Z E
129. Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 3 ON the terminating switch of a general purpose interface module which will be a terminal 4 Set as necessary 2 Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting switch Character configuration switches Baudrate setting switch gt MODE switch RS 485 terminating resistor T link channel switch ON OFF switch T link terminating resistor ON OFF switch RS 485 station No switches a Setting of the MODE e Transmission speed settings Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch Make the settings using the baudrate setting Switches MODE Switch position Command setting type start stop CH 8 synchronization nonsequence 4 format cos RS 232C 1 1 4 Command setting type start stop 3 synchronization nonsequence format 2 ON RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N s Switch No etting item et value Command setting type start stop 9 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 synchronization nonsequence format 3 Transmission 9600bps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF RS 485 1 N speed 19200bps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF b Setting of the station
130. C 8 3 2 RS 485 cable Settings by switch RINY a 3201s T 2 2 2400ips a 4800 gt Timer change over time Uca Rotary switch EB pacana RE x Communication setting DIP SW 1 Settings of the setting 2 wire 4 wire the RS 485 driver active control the terminating resistor the echo back Make those settings by operating the communication setting DIP SW Set Switch position Setting item value 4 2 3 415 6 4 WIS OFF OFF type Setting 2 wire 4 wire 2 wire ON type RS 485 driver active control AUTO OFF cn with ON Terminating resistor without OFF Echo back OFF OFF 2 A setting of the transmission speed Make this setting by operating the timer change over time Rotary switch Switch position Transmission speed 2 Soke ees 5 9600bps 4 6 192006 f 5925 7 38400bps 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 31 a 2 E 2 o 2 3 gt E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 o 8 5 6 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive
131. CP 9300MS MP 920 MP 930 Set the coil device MB as follows 1 When setting as a bit device Set the device using the format of word address DEC bit number HEX Device MB 04059 Device No Bit position HEX Word address DEC Device name 6 32 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Constant register 9 K1 to K4096 Device No Device name Setting range representation Coil O O1 to O63424 Input relay 1 97 I1 to 163424 9 D1 to D2048 acima gt 3 Link coil D D10001 to D12048 aa D20001 to D22048 The bit e Setting range of each word specification of d vic the word device register Z Z1 to Z31840 Holding register W1 to W28291 w SW1 to SW28291 R1 to R2048 R10001 to R12048 Decimal Link register R20001 to R22048 9 A 5 R SR SR1 to SR2048 79 SR10001 to SR12048 SR20001 to SR22048 The word specification of the bit device except Coil Input relay Setting range of each bit devices 1 Change the input register 30001 to 30512 to Z1 to 2512 for setting When set in default 2 Change the holding register 40001 to 49999 to W1 to W9999 for setting When set in default 3 Change the constant register 31001 to 35096 to K1 to K4096 for setting When set in default Continued to next page 4 SRand SW indicate registers virtual regi
132. Checking for Normal Monitoring 2 Faulty station information The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set 0 Normal 1 Abnormal The bit is reset after the fault is recovered a Forthe Ethernet connection except for the Ethernet multiple connection Ethernet Setting Qo Z si B YX Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address Port No Communication O GS231 bit0 a 1 2 71 71 071 71 192 168 3 39 5001 UDP GS231 bit 1 1 3 QJ71E71 L71E71 192 168 3 40 5001 UDP z 65231 bit2 1 4 710 71 192 168 3 41 5001 UDP o 231 bit 3 1 5 71 71 192 168 3 42 5006 UDP ra o Qc 2 Ethernet setting No a Device b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 65231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 n GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 gt 69234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 5235 80 79 78 7T 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 E GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 69237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 lt 65238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 b Forthe Ethernet multiple connection or the temperature controller connection The station number to which each device corresponds changes accor
133. Connecting to interface resistor selection converter SI 30A Setting item Set value DCE DTE Communication settings DCE DTE DCE Foo M nee Make the communication settings using setting RS 422 485 RS 485 pum Switches Terminating resistor TERMINATOR Item Set value OFF ON OFF ERES selection Transmission speed 9600bps MANUAL AUTO AUTO DCE DTE switching DCE Terminating resistor M ON OFF selection 1 Set as necessary Settings by switch UNEEYE e RS 232C RS 485 CONVERTER POWER 5304 DCE DTE switch RS 232C DTE mo DCE SWA 0090909999090 RSS 7 SW 7 DRIVER Communication ar an setting switch B F gt F 80 SISSIES 1 Settings of transmission speed MANUAL AUTO and terminating resistor selection Switch No of DIP SWB Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 Transmission o600bps ON ON OFF speed MANUAL AUTO AUTO ON Terminating Enable ON resistor Disable OFF selection 1 Set as necessary 2 Setting of DCE DTE switching Setting item Set value DCE DTE DCE DTE mr DCE SWA 5 16 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 5 6 Connecting to interface 5 5 7
134. Connection cable o PLC Connection cable GOT Number of c 4 Communic Man ee Max ee P connectable eries Cnet I F module gion Type onnection diagram WIEN ption device odel equipment number GT OLI Built into GOT 27 25 o H RS 232 connection 15m GT15 RS2 9P diagram 2 g K300S G4L CUEA RS 232 1 PLC for 1 GOT gt eg GT10 C02H a 6PT9P 2 a E o Eurum 2 USSRS 232 ti connection 15m Built into GOT z diagram 4 o O E Z E Z Z O 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 7 12 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple PLCs o i E Connection cable Connection cable 1 Connection cable Connection cable 2 Communication driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K PLC Cnet I F module GOT 1 2 Number of tabl Cable model Cnet I F Commu Cable model able Series Connection Connection Option device Model equipment diagram number meeue Type diagram number Built into GOT RS 422 connection 500 3 GT15 RS4 9S Gars 422 diagram 1 K300S connection G4L CUEA RS 422 31 PLCs for 1 GOT diagram 2 oT 2 GT10 C02H 9SC Eye Ey RS 422 nz ES nor AE 500m Builtinto GOT diagram 3 1 Product manufactured b
135. Connection diagram number distance equipment Built into GOT 23 GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m RS 232 or 15m 6 9 232 connection diagram 1 GT 15 RS2 9P 1GOT for 1 intelligent serial port module GT09 C30R40401 7T 3m Built into GOT GT09 C100R40401 7T 10m GT09 C200R40401 7T 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40401 7T 30m 200m i RS 422 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS4 9S Product manufactured by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd For details of this product contact HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd Connect to the peripheral port of the CPU module Can be specified with the CPU software of revision J or later 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 2 System Configuration 2 2 2 Connecting to H 200 to 252 series series board type or EH 150 series Communication driver Ce HITACHI HIDIC H HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 Connection cable To use transmission control procedure 2 as a protocol select HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 as a communication driver PLC Connection cable GOT Commun Cabl T x Number of connectable able mode ax 3 Model name ication z Option device Model equipment Toss Connection diagram number distance 200 1 2507 H 252 1 H 252B H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR RS 232 15 H 20DT H 28DT 3 RS 232 connection diagram 1 5 H 40DT H 64DT GT15 RS2 9P HL 40DR HL 64DR Built into GOT GT09 C30R20401
136. Decimal Counter C CO to C255 Decimal trol relay S S0 to S317 sequence control relay S Octal variable memory VW VWO to VW5118 Input relay IW IWO to IW6 Output relay QW to QW6 analog input AIW AIWO to AIW30 analog output 3 AQWO to AQW30 i Bit memory MW MWO to MW30 Decimal special memory SMW SMWO to SMW192 2 Timer T TO to T255 Counter C 4 CO to C255 sequence control relay SWO to SW30 SW 7 HCO to Double word device High speed counter HC 2 HC2 DB2 DBW65534 Data register DB DB4094 DBWO to DB4094 DBW65534 DB4095 DBWO to DB4095 DBW65534 Device No Device name Setting range represen tation variable memory V VO to V102397 Input relay 1 10 to 1655357 Decimal Output relay 9 00 to 0655357 Octal 9 Bit memory M MO to M655357 5 The bit specification of the im word device except variable memory Input Setting range OF Decimal device relay Output relay Bit memory Timer Counter variable memory VW VWO to VW10238 Input relay IW IWO to IW65534 Output relay QW QWO to QW65534 Bit memory MW MWO to MW65534 Timer T 124 TO to T65535 5 Counter c 174 to C65535 5 DB1 DBWO to Backs T DB1 DBW65534 DB2 DBWO to 4 Data format to input into Timer T Counter C varies according to a type of the PLC 57 300 400 BCD 57 200 BIN code 2 5 1200 does not support Timer T Cou
137. Description Range 5 menu Set this item when change the 4800bps agi S transmission speed used for 9600bps 2 bs 4 22 1 is displayed Select the communication with the connected 19200bps 2 channel to be used from the list menu p quipment 38400bps 5 3 Setthe following items Default 19200bps 57600bps Manufacturer YASKAWA Set this item when change the data Lr Controller Type Set either of the following Data Bit lengih used Tor communication with ie den 5 the connected equipment lt lt For GT27 GT25 GT23 gt Default 8bit T YASKAWA GL PROGIC8 Specify the stop bit length for YASKAWA CP9200 H Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Z H 2 YASKAWA CP9300MS MC compatible YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH series 2 For GT21 GS gt Parity parity check and how it is performed Even fixed during communication YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH series Default Even I F Interface to be used Set the number of retries to be Driver Set either of the following Ret performed when a communication to 5times For GT27 GT25 GT23 Y error occurs YASKAWA GL Default Otime Specify the time period from the YASKAWA CP9200 H Startup Ti startup until GOT starts the 3 to 30 YASKAWA CP9300MS MC compatible communication with the PLC CPU cid YASKAWA 2000 900 92005 Default 3sec For GT21 GS gt Set the time period for a YASKAWA MP2000
138. E 2 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 2 Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT E Number of bl del Max 5 MISI enge Cable Aa T Cal mx Tue MATE odai connectable ul PE icati Connection diagram onnection diagra pilonigevice 9 equipment number number gt H Built into GOT Up to 31 RS 422 connection temperature E RS 422 W BF 02 1000 1m IN 1000m controllers for 1 02 3000 3 diagram 1 E z GT15 RS4 9S E 2 E e RS 485 connection Built into GOT 33 THV A1 diagram 1 o E FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m 2 ieee ser E i P t W BF 02 0500 0 5m es RS 485 FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 23 dni RS 485 W BF 02 1000 1 diagram 3 1200 2 oe BF 02 1000 1m m FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m controllers for 1 W BF 02 3000 3m Gor W BF 01 0500 0 5m W BF 01 1000 1m W BF 01 3000 3m GT15 RS4 TE or RS 485 connection diagram 4 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 23 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter COM A Communication driver
139. Flash Memory What is package data Package data are project data that work in GOT and system applications data required for GOT operation Communication Configuration Communication Path PC USB GOT Close 1 Select Communication Write to GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 The GOT Write tab appears on the Communicate with GOT dialog box Select the Project data OS radio button of the Write Data 4 Check mark a desired standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS and Communication Settings and click the GOT Write button 1 12 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 2 2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT Confirm if the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3 For reading from the GOT refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help r n Communicate with GOT El cot write 214171 cor Read of verification L1 GOT GOT Information Get GOT Information Read Data E GOT Type Source Drive C Buit in Fash Memory GOT Name Free Space
140. For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 4 4 4 CONNECTION TO PLC 4 2 Serial connection 4 2 2 Connecting to MICREX F70 For details on the system configuration on the PLC side refer to the following 4 5 Precautions When using general purpose interface modules Connection cable Communication driver FUJI MICREX F PLC Connection cable GOT General purpose Commun interface ication Coble model Max Option device Model name 1 Connection diagram number distance module Type Built into GOT GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or F70 NC1L RS2 RS 232 15m 1 55 8 232 connection diagram 1 Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 general GT15 RS2 9P purpose interface module Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd When using the RS 232C 485 interface capsule Connection cable Communication driver m MICREX F PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Model j Commun Cable model Max ication i Option device Model name 4 Connection diagram number distance capsule Type GT lt Built into GOT GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or F70 FFK120A C10 RS 23
141. GOT 93 GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 1 GOT for up to 6 5 pu GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m PLCs RS 232C ui 140 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GTO9 C300R41001 6T 30m 485 interface 2 15 18 2 27 25 capsules 7 85 485 connection diagram 1 500m GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 9 4 2 Serial connection When connecting to multiple PLCs using general purpose interface modules Communication driver ir FUJI MICREX F PLC Connection cable GOT Mn Commun Number of connectable Mogel RURE ication cable model Max Option device Model equipment name interface Type Connection diagram number distance p module 3 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 500m Built into GOT F1208 GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m 1 GOT for 1405 FFU120B RS 485 GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m up 15118 general purpose 15 485 c interface modules E on diagram GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 4 10 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial connection 4 2 4 System Configuratio
142. HA400 401 400 PF901 HA900 901 LEES RMC500 X TIO SA100 SA200 SB1 RS 485 AG500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications 5 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3 6 T R A 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1 5 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2 4 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 8 RS 485 connection diagram 8 Terminating resistor 1200 1 2W More than 1000 in case of CB series 3 3 3 Interface converter Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature side CD 485V controller controller controller controller m nile a TRB TRB WIT I TRE TRB 0 2 Li Li B B Li Li B B a a TRA TIRA x TRA TRA E 1m ii pi E i La 1102 86 SG La 11 SG 56 FG 4 rt ret Le CREE Ve CE FEN NU ERR Combination module Combination module 1 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 3 For the terminal
143. No 9 Make the station No using RS 485 station No switches 9 Connecting to NP1L RS1 NP1L RS2 mr NP1L RS3 NP1L RS4 NP1L RS5 5 Station No u 1 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting 5 switches 0 to 99 ADDRESS MODE switch ME D RS485 station c Connecting terminating resistors No switch 5 Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS qs P P x 95 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch 8 RS485 BS E ON terminator switch oe 0 d Setting of Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method Make the settings using the character configuration Switch Item Set value switches MODE switch MODE 1103 cos 5188 station No Station No b 7 Switch 6 5485 terminator LI 5 Terminator 3 4 Switch 3 Set the MODE switch so that the communication port of the 152 general communication module to be connected to the N 1 operates as a loader 2 switch is not used for connection with the GOT 543 Turn ON the terminating switch of the general Setingitem Set value Switch No communication module which will be a terminal disable OFF OFF OFF 1bit ON Stop bit 2bits OFF 7bits ON Data bit 8bits OFF Even ON Odd OFF Parity bit Done ON None OFF Initializing method By switch ON 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 21 4 2 Serial connection 4 2 8 Station numbe
144. O o Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 42 5 6 7 8 Front of K3SC 10 body Inside of K3SC 10 body T When removing the front cover ransmission 9600bps ON OFF ON speed 1 Transmission speed settings Terminating Enable ON ON resistor Transmission speed Switch No selection Disable OFF bps 1 2 3 1 Set as necessary i Set these gt 2 Disabled 9600 OFF OFF OFF 3611656 19200 ON OFF ON 38400 OFF ON ON 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 17 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 2 Settings of data length parity bit stop bit master slave device and echoback EEEEEEE 11 1 2 4 5 6 if 8 9 9 Set these switches 5 5 8 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station Station No 3 No 7 No 1 No 15 No 6 Examples of station number setting 1 Direct specification When setting the device specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed
145. PLC 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Communication Series Model name Clock us Connectable model Refer to SLC500 20 SLC500 30 SLC500 40 x RS 232 SLC5 01 SLC5 02 BM SLC5 03 SLC5 04 RS 232 SLC5 05 1761 L10BWA 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 L16BWB 1 1761 116 RS 232 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA 1761 L20AWA 5A 2 1761 L20BWA 5A x RS 232 1761 L20BWB 5A MicroLogix1200 1762 L24BWA x RS 232 MicroLogix1400 1766 L32AWA x RS 232 MicroLogix1500 1764 LSP x RS 232 10 2 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 Connectable Model List 10 1 Connectable Model List Series Model name Clock pde Connectable model Refer to 1756 L 1756 L1M1 1756 L1M2 1756 L1M3 1756 L61 1756 L62 1756 L63 x RS 232 08 21 1756 L55M12 Ethernet 27 25 23 pl 10 3 1 ControlLogix IBE T553 10 3 2 1756 L55M14 1756 L55M16 1756 L55M22 1756 L55M23 1756 L55M24 1756 1725 x Ethernet a med 1769 1317 1769 L32E 10 2 3 CompactLogix 1769 L32C x 37 10 3 1 Ethernet 1769 L35E 371032 1769 L35CR 1794 33 RS 232 10 2 3 FlexLogix ee x Ethernet ics 1 1769 L31 1769 L32C and 1769 L35CR do not Ether
146. PLC Side Setting SIEMENS PLC For details of SIEMENS PLCs refer to the following manuals gt SIEMENS PLC user s Manual Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps Model name Refer to Transmission Vans speed used for 19200bps PLC CPU 57 200 1527 Speed communication with the connected 38400bps p equipment 57600bps HMI Adapter 6ES7 972 0 11 0 0 15 2 6 Default 19200bps 115200bps PC PPI cable 6 57 901 3 20 0 0 1527 Set this item when change the data 6 57 901 3 30 0 0 E Data Bit With Default 8bits 15 2 6 Connecting to HMI Adapter Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Ns Communication settings Default 1bit Specify whether or not to performa The following communication settings are made at the Bari parity check and how it is performed E communication detail settings of the GOT side during communication Odd For details refer to the following Default Even qm gt 15 24 BMCommunication detail settings Specify the adapter address station No of the adapter to which the GOT Setting item PLC side setting Adapter Address connected in the connected 0 to 31 network Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Default 0 Data bit 8bits fixed Specify the host address station No bit Odd fixed Host Address i the PLC that the GOT will monit
147. RS 422 GT15 RS4 9S CT and Z DIO Up connection diagram 2 to 31 for Z COM 5 OLI RS 485 CE 1200m 3j z Z COM connection diagram Built into GOT 23 z W BF 02 1 Up to 16 Z COMs 2 0500 0 5m for 1 GOT 1 4 Z TIO Up to 16 W BF 02 1000 1 m RS 485 des FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m Perlis oie RS 485 W BW 01 W BF 02 3000 3m connection diagram iia oM d Z DIO Up to 16 or 3 FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m Total of Z TIO Z RS 485 CT and Z DIO Up connection diagram 9 er to 31 for Z COM 03 85 485 preparing 1200m connection diagram 2 GT15 RS4 TE 4 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 4 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 11 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 4 Connecting to CB Series CB100 400 CB500 CB700 900 When using the converter Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 998 Connection cable 1 Temperature P Connec
148. RS 485 connection diagram 8 d Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W 2 GOT side Temperature controller Temperature controller ry MEER gt spai 1 2 i e XL SDB o 981 2 BEN SDA RDA1 3 E E RDB E RDB 4 II RDAQ RDA 5 SG o sc lt SDA2 5 4 pe b SDB2 E 4 m RDA2 7 RDB2 8 FG 10 5 ral Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series Siqnal GREEN Series GREEN Series UT35A x UT UP UM US UT32A UP35A UT55A product condition ces E a UT75A UP55A product condition A comelitem LE Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 2 SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 5 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 26 24 305 411 505 5 2 2 56 27 25 303 409 503 3 o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 17 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 18 2 3 4 Forthe product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Model UT55A Product Suffix code Optional suffix code condition A Function Open network Remark Product with the open network port of RS485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type B 1or2 Without LP Produc
149. Routing Informatio bk Gateway yr Standard 1 F RS422 485 z p Communication F Gateway Serve Driver 6 5 z Gateway Client EA Mail xis FTP Server Fig File Transfer Property Value Sh Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS 19200 AD Station No Switch pas abit XD Buffer Memory Unit Nc gt Stop Bit ibi Parity Odd Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address 00 Time ms 5 Cancel 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer GE Controller Type GE Series 90 I F Interface to be used Driver GE SNP X 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 2 11 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 227 1 1 2 I F communication setting 11 12 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 4 GOT Side Settings 11 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 GE SNP X Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parit
150. Stop Bt Parity p Sum Check Item Description Range Sum Check Type Mcd Set this item when change the Host Address a 2 transmission speed used for 4800bps Transmission gt 4 Spoed communication with the connected 9600bps p equipment 19200bps Default 19200bps a Specify the adapter address station 4 4 No of the PLC that the GOT will 0 to 31 co Adapter Address monitor in the connected network za Default 0 Default 0 J Specify the host address station No of the adapter to which the is 11031 lt Host Address connected in the connected network 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Default 1 z menu 54 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and host address 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the 2 AB MicroLogix m channel to be used from the list menu 2 Property 2 3 Setthe following items Transmission Speed BPS 19200 e Manufacturer AB Data Bit 8 bit Controller Type Set either of the followings Stop Bit 1 bit AB SLC500 S E 2 MicroLogix can teak Ties Bcc AB Control CompactLogix Adapter Address 0 I F Interface to be used Host Address 1 Driver Set either of the followings AB SLC500 AB 1 N 5 tem escription ange AB MicroLogix E 2 et this item when change the AB Control Com
151. Time Sec 3 Adapter Address 0 Host Address 0 Dely Time ms 0 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps transmission speed used for 19200bps Transmission i need communication with the connected 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with Tbits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed Parity pd Even during communication Odd Default None Specify the format in which the sum check is performed during BCC Sum Check Type communication when performing sum CRC16 check Default BCC Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to Stimes error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the adapter address station No of the PLC that the GOT will Adapter Address 9 li nb 0 to 254 monitor in the connected network Default 0 Specify the host address station No Host Address of the adapter to which the GOT is 0 to 254 connected in the connected network Default 0 Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms GOT Default 10 12 10 CO
152. Transparent transparent function Except for 5011 Port No Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 Ethernet setting 1 Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE This section describes the Ethernet setting for the communication driver SIEMENS 7 Ethernet 18 Controller Setting Controler Setting CH1 SIEMENS S7 Ethe 3 Manufacturer SIEMENS Controler Type SIEMENS 7 Ethemet lio ed iw Standard V F Ethernet Muti 7 a saa san Driver Ethemet SIEMENS 57 Gateway x a Een Setting GOT Standard Ethernet Setting Fiter Setting FTP Server File Transfer F Property Value 4 Lc XD Buffer Memory Unit Nc GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5023 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Ethernet Setting ESNE Host Net No Station Unit IP Address FETCH Port No WF 1 1 1 SIEMENS 57 1111 EN _ 2000 eme w Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the Net No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the connected Station 1 Ethernet module 1to 64 Def
153. and internal Internal conductor conductor with the dimensions as shown below z Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same L dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed down to the clamp B Clamp and external conductor Cable in use 3C 2V 6 mm 3 mm 5C 2V 5C 2V CCY 7 mm 5 mm Solder here 4 Solder the contact to the internal conductor 5 Insert the connector assembly shown in 4 into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed 1 22 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type refer to the following RS 422 485 communication unit Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch 25 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch Terminating Switch No Terminating Switch No OR Merton 4 2 re
154. bit data designation mode 3 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode 10 22 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 10 4 3 AB MicroLogix Series Device extended For details of this communication driver please contact our company 10 4 4 AB Control CompactLogix Device Device name Setting range represen tation 8 BOOL BOOLO 0 to BOOL999 31999 Decimal a 5 E INT INTO O to INT999 999 8 pint DINTO 0 to DINT999 999 Decimal gt 8 2 E REAL REALO 0 to REAL999 999 E o a Only 32 bit 2 word designation is allowed 10 4 5 AB Control CompactLogix Tag Select this button to importing the tag file created by RSLogix5000 and set devices while checking the tag names For how to import tag files refer to the following gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 10 23 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 24 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO GEPLC 11 1 Connectable Model 1 11 2 11 2 System 11 3 11 8 Connection Diagram 11 9 11 4 GOT Side 11 12 11 5 PLC Side 5
155. cable 2 GOT controller Number of Sable mogel Max Model Communication Gabe modal Max Pus Model name Connection iod Connection Nb Option device Model equipment distance name Type distance diagram number diagram number GT RB100 Built into GOT p to RB400 Use RS 485 RS 232 temperature RB500 connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m controllers for 4 RB700 diagram 8 diagram 3 27 25 RB900 E gor GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd 9 18 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Temperature controller Communication Type RB100 RB400 RB500 RS 485 RB700 RB900 Connection cable Connection cable GOT Cable model Max tion devi Model Connection diagram number distance Optionidevice RE GT T ser H fundos connection 1200m Built into GOT diagram 5 GT GT J FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m ser 1 RS SS connection 1200m FA LTBGT2RACBL10 1m diagram 6 1 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m _ RS 485 connection 1200m GT15 RS4 TE diagram 7 Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Number of connectable equipment Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product
156. charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced Replacing consumable parts such as the battery backlight and fuses Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts i
157. communi communi 9 6 87 1 Station No 0 0 STATIONNO D H 10 s digit 1 4 2 Station No 4 2 ET 1 s digit 7 2 11 Connecting to STARDOM Make the communication settings as shown below For details of the communication settings refer to the following manual Peripheral Software Manual for YOKOGAWA PLC Connection between STARDOM and the PC for communication settings For the communication settings of STARDOM STARDOM and the PC for communication settings must be connected to Ethernet using the Resource Configurator peripheral software COM port setting Make the settings on the FCX Maintenance Page for STARDOM 1 Select Reboot Maintenance Mode on the Reboot screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the maintenance mode 2 Setthe COM1 port driver to be used Execute JEROS Basic Setting File from the Edit System Setting File screen on the FCX Mainten ance Page Confirm that the line of Com1SioDriver is as follows Com1SioDriver DUONUS_SIO 3 Set the COMI port to be used Execute COM1 Port Setting File from the Edit System Setting Files screen on the FCX Maintenance Page Make the settings as follows according to the communication specifications on the setting screen Leave the settings as default if not listed on the communication setting items Communication setting items in the table shows the names on the FCX Maintenance Page
158. communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Ethernet setting GOT Ethernet Setting s vii This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings GOT IP Address 192 168 Subnet Mask 255 255 Default Gateway 0 0 Peripheral S W Communication Port 5015 Transparent Port No 5014 Item GOT IP Address Description Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 0 18 Range 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 1024 to 5010 Periphral S W Set the port No for the S W 5014 to 65534 Communication communication Except for 5011 Port No Default 5015 5012 5013 and 49153 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534
159. connection diagram 6 1200m FA LTBGT2RACBL10 dud controllers for 1 GOT ons FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 2 27 25 RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 29 9 2 System Configuration 9 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the temperature controller 9 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular connector 1 CD 1 GONG 1 NC RD RXD 2 k 2 SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 4 i 5 NC SG 5 SG 1 DR DSR e 6 SG 1 RS RTS 7 i CS CTS 9 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 2 RS 232 connection diagram 2 RKC temperature controller side RS RTS 7 CS CTS GOT side Modular connector 1 1 1 NC RD RXD 2 2 SD SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 4 i 5 NC SG 5 SG DR DSR CS l i 1 1 9 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the follo
160. contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 19 9 2 System Configuration l 4 E 2 O 2 3 a E o Y D E 2 E 2 2 O o 9 2 7 Connection to PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 RMC500 MA900 901 500 SA100 200 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Communication driver Cem RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 tempe ature Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller Ma Number of X Commun Cable model Cable model connectable Model AA 3 distance y name ication Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model equipment Type number number PF900 PF901 Built into GOT HA400 HA401 RS 232 Ass RS 232 45m Up to 1 temperature HA900 connection diagram 4 controller for 1 GOT HA901 MA900 GT15 RS2 9P MA901 PF900 FIT Built into GOT HA400 401 Up to 31 temperature HA900 RS 422 nists RS 422 nists RS 422 1000m controllers for 1 connection diagram 3 connection diagram 4 3 HA901 MA900 MA901 GT15 RS4 9S AG500 E 485 connection diagram 5 1200m Built into GOT 23 HA400 HA401 FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m Tm 5 pto emperature
161. cover GT25 UCOV GT25 05UCOV Stand GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND GT15 60STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 Attachment 6 87 GT15 60ATT 77 B5 Software 1 Software related to GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 SW1DND GTWK3 J SW1DND GTWK3 E SW1DND GTWK3 C GT Designer3 Version1 Screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT2000 GOT1000 series GT Designer3 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Screen drawing software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3 GT Designer3 GOT1000 Screen drawing software for GOT 1000 series included in GT Works3 GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000 GOT 1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT2000 Monitoring software GT SoftGOT2000 series GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series DU WIN Screen drawing software FX PCS DU WIN for GOT F900 series 2 Software related to iQ Works Abbreviations and generic terms Description iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible en
162. device Model Modus Type number IC697CPX772 IC697CPX782 697 928 Built into IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 ss IC697CPU788 697 711 RS 232 pcs a 15m IC697CPU789 lagram 697 0731 IC697CGR772 GT15 RS2 9P IC697CGR935 IC697CPM790 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation For the RS 422 connection Communication driver GE SNP X Number of connectable equipment 1 PLC for 1 GOT Communication driver ir TIT GE SNP X Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT mm umber o PLC Ec eee am Option devic Model 4 i i jagr i vice Modules Type SUIS distance quip IC697CPX772 GT IGT 1C697CPX782 IC697CPX928 Built into GOT IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 f IC697CPU788 IC697CMM711 422 885 422 connection 4200m 2 IC697CPU789 diagram 1 IC697CPU731 IC697CGR772 GT15 RS4 95 IC697CGR935 697 790 54 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 GT155 11 6 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 2 System Configuration 11 2 3 Connecting to VersaMax Micro Only the models that are
163. device address without overlapping with that of other units 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 5 Setthe maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary Device address 2 1 to 99 Slave address Interval time 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings of the GOT side with the temperature controller settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 53 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 47 l e E 2 O o Z 2 n gt E o Y 14 E 2 E o 2 2 O 9 5 14 Connecting to SA100 SA200 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 2 Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol Dip switch Item Communication speed Setting
164. device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Device Information 000000 5 lale Jets e ee MB v Kind 5 DEH Device 000000 65534F Network Host 9 Other 1 Station 1 Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Device 2 When setting as a word device Set the device using the format of word address DEC Device Device name v 4059 Device No Word address DEC Displays the device type and setting range which are Information selected in Device Set the station number of the controller to be monitored Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller Select this for monitoring other controllers After selecting set the station number of the controller to be monitored NW No Set the network No Station No Set the station No Network Other Device settings of YASKAWA PLC when using CP 9200SH
165. following can be 57 1 1 2 I F communication setting 10 16 10 3 Ethernet Connection ll Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property _ GOT Net 1 GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5026 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Item Description Range Set th twork No of the GOT GOT Net No of tne 1 to 239 Default 1 Set the station No of the GOT GOT Station 1 to 64 Default 1 Set the GOT IP address subnet GOT Ethernet mask default gateway peripheral S gt 6 Setting W communication port No transparent port No Ethernet setting 1024 to 5010 GOT Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 Communication connection with the Ethernet module Except for 5011 Port No Default 5026 2 5012 5013 44818 49153 Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs Retry When receiving no response after Bisous retries the communication times out Default 3times Specify the time period from the GOT startup until starts the Startup IRR NE E with the PLC CPU Default 3sec Set the time period for Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 90sec Default 3sec 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing
166. i Max distan tion device Model is ation Type Connection diagram number eE equipment module OLI Built into GOT GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m Differs according to or GT15 RS2 9P ose PLC side us Gss RS 232 connection diagram 1 specifications MP 930 Eje m dE GT10 C02H ePT9P 1 GOT for 1 IGTo4R STos PLC R2 same as m RS 232 connection diagram 7 above Built into GOT 2725 Built into GOT CP 9200 H GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m T PROGIC 8 RS 232 or above connecting to port1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 5 6 2 Serial Connection o lt 5 lt gt O E z E o z z O o PLC Connection cable GOT C Number of ommunica Communic Cable model connectable Model nam i Max dista Option devi Model A ES non ation Type Connection diagram number equipment module Built into GOT 23 GT09 C30R20202 15P 3m Differs PROGIC 8 RS 232 or to connecting to port2 PLC side 232 connection diagram 2 specifications GT15 RS2 9P 1 GOT for 1 PLC Built into CP 9300MS GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m CP 9300MC RS 232 or same as compatible non above User 2 i Uss RS 232 connection diagram 3 HHA GT15 RS2 9P Built into GOT GT09 C30R20
167. is detected the function assigns the information of the faulty station to the GOT special register GS 1 No of faulty stations a Forthe Ethernet connection except for the Ethernet multiple connection Total No of the faulty CPU are stored Device b15 to b8 b7 to bO GS230 00H fixed No of faulty stations b For Ethernet multiple connection The total No of the faulty devices is stored Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to bO Ch1 GS280 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch2 GS300 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch3 GS320 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch4 GS340 00H fixed No of faulty stations When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display check mask processing with data operation tab as the following For the data operation refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help QG Numerical Display Data Operation tab Numerical Display Advanced Settings Device Extended Trigger M Only the setting of selected Operation Type is valid Operation Type None Data Operation 2 Script V Bit Mask Mask Type Mask Pattern 00 Shift Left Right Data Operation None Data Expression Set mask processing to the upper eight bits b8 to b15 of GS230 on Numerical Display Name Gea 1 32 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6
168. is displayed The host is os EN A indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the Net No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the Station 3 connected Ethernet module 1 to 64 Default blank YOKOGAWA Type YOKOGAWA fixed fixed Set the IP address of the PLC side IP side IP address 1 connected Ethernet module address Default blank Port No 2 Set the port No of the connected Ethernet module Default 12289 12289 12291 Item Description Range GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to Address Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via Subnet router 0 0 0 0 to Mask If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is Default Gateway connected Only for connection via 255 255 255 255 Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Periphral S W Set the GOT port for the S W 5014 to 65534 Communication communication Except for 5011 Port No Default 5015 5012 5013 and 49153 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 Transparent Port transparent function Except for 5011 No Default 5014 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 Ethernet Connection 5012 5013 and 49153 Communication format Select a communi
169. magoo 5 485 ss RS 485 connection diagram 6 1200m FA LTBGT2RACBL10 tm controllers for 1 901 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2 500 RMC500 SA100 SA200 G8 RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 20 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter COM A Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Qc Qc Connection cable 3 o LLI 2 LE Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 lt m ti Interface one Connection cable 1 5 Connection cable 3 GOT converter r E Number of Pl etos connectable XE Cable model ES ua Xii Commu Cable model Max equipment x eme Connection diagram pose en name nication Connection dista Option device Model number eae Type diagram number nce number W BF 28 0500 5 1 0 5 a GT W BF 01 0500 W BF 28 1000 Built into GOT 0 5 1 Up to 31 z U E PF900 es RS 422 W BF 01 1000 Jooo LEOA W BF 28 3000 P temperature 2 PF901 connection diagram 1m 3m Ej e controllers e 3 W BF 01 3000 or Pl for 1 GOT
170. number of the temperature controller refer to the following table l 4 E 2 O o Z 2 a E o Y 14 E 2 E Z Z O Terminal No Signal name ZTIO CB100 CB400 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 Z CT CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 5 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 name PF901 HA900 901 MA900 MA901 RMC500 THV A1 X TIO SA100 SA200 500 Communication 1 Communication 2 5 25 13 25 44 13 3 17 1 10 T R A 26 14 26 45 14 1 16 2 11 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 2 15 3 12 4 following shows the pin assignment of the modular connector ae Modular connector pin No 9518858 6006 vgs Xu 9 zx zr E 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 37 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 RS 485 connection diagram 9 RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side Modular connector Modular connector TRB 2 a _ i 2 TIR B TR 1 1 TIRA 1 ji SG 3 T 3 SG 1 4 4 5 5 SG 6 6 SG d For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 3
171. possible in the continuous device designation mode 15 4 2 SIEMENS 57 200 Series 15 4 4 SIEMENS OP Ethernet Data register DB DB254 DBWO to DB254 DBW2046 DB255 DBWO to DB255 DBW2046 Device Setting range represen tation Input relay 1 10000 to 11277 Decimal Output relay Q Q0000 to Q1277 Octal 8 Bit memory M M0000 to M2557 5 The bit specification of the im device except Input Setting range of each word a relay Output relay Bit device memory Timer Counter nput relay to Output relay QW QWO to QW126 Bit memory MW MWO to MW254 Timer Current value T TO to T255 Counter Current value C to C255 DB1 DBWO to DB1 DBW2046 S DB2 DBWO to Decimal 5 DB2 DBW2046 1 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode 1 Only reading is possible 2 Onlyreading 32 bit two word data designation is allowed 3 Writing is possible only while the PLC is running 4 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed Device No Device name Setting range represen tation variable memory V VO to V51197 Input relay 1 10 to 177 Decimal 3 0 to Q77 Output relay Q Q0 to Q Octal amp Bit memory M MO to M317 5 special memory SM SMO to SM1947 ii Timer T TO to T255
172. setting Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data interval Communication protocol MODBUS extension 0 to 99ms ON ON Data bit 8bit Parity None time Data bit 8bit Parity Even Data bit configuration Data bit 8bit Parity Odd Stop bit 1bit fixed Module address 2 1 to 99 When combining the module turn ON the internal data bus terminating resistor at both ends of the module Internal data bus terminating resistor Data interval extension 0 to 99ms time 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 48 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 3 Module address settings Set the unit address using the rotary switch address setting switch Rotary switch Address setting switch Coy 23 AY Lower digit setting Ss Set value x1 8L Upper digit setting Set value x10 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 5 94 78 8 Eve 2 i A3 4 8 Odd 1 5 8 Odd 2 The rotary switch address setting switch is also used for the data interval extension time setting 6 Setthe maximum time from when the last character stop bit is sent from the GOT side until the transmission cable The setting method is the same as that of the module becomes ready to receive address Fo
173. setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 11 5 PLC Side Setting GE PLC For details of GE PLCs refer to the following manuals gt GE PLC user s Manual 11 5 2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro Communication settings Make the communication settings engineering tool using the Setting item PLC side setting Model name Refer to 9600bps 19200b Data Rate di as Series 90 30 11 5 1 38400bps PLC CPU VersaMaxMicro 11 5 2 Bits Character 6 Tbits 8bits Communication IC693CMM311 11 5 3 Parity EVEN ODD NONE Modules 697 711 11 5 4 Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Port Mode SNP Port Type 2 Slave 11 5 1 Connecting to Series 90 30 Flow Control NONE Timeout Long Communication settings Turn Around Delay 4 0 Make the communication settings using the SNP ID 00 to 31 engineering tool When making the settings set Configuration Mode on 4 Set to the SNP protocol 2 Set to Slave 3 Set to Long the Setting tab of the engineering tool to SNP only Setto Q0 5 Setwithin the range of 00 to 31 Se
174. setting range which are selected in Device Device 2 12 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set Device settings of HITACHI IES PLC 1 When specifying an external I O device a When setting a bit device Set the device using the format of module No slot No module bit No Device 084 5495 Device number Module internal bit No 00 95 DEC Device name Slot No 0 A HEX Module No 0 5 DEC b When setting a word device Set the device using the format of module No slot No module bit No For the device name setting enter w before the bit device name Device WX 0 000 Device number Module internal bit No 0 7 DEC Device name Slot No 0 A HEX Module No 0 5 DEC 2 When specifying a remote external I O device a When setting a bit device Set the device using the format of remote master station remote slave station slot No module bit No lt O E z E 2 2 O Device X 45 9995 Device number Module bit No 00 95 DEC Slot No 0 9 DEC Remote slave station 0 9 DEC Remote master station 1 4 DEC Device name b When setting a word device Set the device using the format of remote master station remote slave station slot No module bit No For the device name setting enter w before the bit device nam
175. settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 3 5 PLC Side Setting 3 5 1 Connecting to communication POINT module HITACHI PLC For details of HITACHI PLCs refer to the following Communication settings manuals Make the communication settings of the gt HITACHI PLC user s Manual Communication mod le 1 The ranges of available channel No differ depending on the model of communication module 2 Avoid duplication of the channel No Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting Model name Refer to Item Set value LQE560 Channel No setting 0 to 3 LQE060 Protocol setting H 7338 protocol I Communication module 1 0 160 3 5 1 Transmission speed 19200bps fixed LQE565 Data bit 8bits fixed LQE165 Parity bit Odd fixed 5 Start bit 1 bit fixed E Stop bit 1 bit fixed 2 o 2 2 O o Switch Setting switches for the channel No Ec the protocol CN1 MODU CN2 CN2 1 Settings of the channel No and the protocol TRE 2380 CN1 eer MODU 9 1 H4388 A 2 a 9 CN2 3 3 1 MODU 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 7 3 5 PLC Side Setting 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that c
176. station No with any of the other LL Make the settings using the character configuration units switches 3 the terminating switch of a general purpose interface module which will be a terminal z A 2 Settings by switch 2 H Tle Make the communication settings using each setting z switch Z m 2 MODE switch E RS 485 stati o Bh station No a We Switches BENI 0 gt Switch No etting item et value Terminator switch 1 2 4 5 7 3 6 8 Transmission 9600bps ON OFF ON Character configuration speed 19200bps OFF ON ON lt switches 1bit ON Mund Stop bit 2bits OFF Front view Rear view 7bits ON a Setting of the MODE em the MODE settings using the MODE switch Even ON MODE Switch position Parity bit Odd OFF Command setting type start stop Done ON synchronization nonsequence 4 None OFF format Initializi RS 232C 1 1 nitializing method By switch ON Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format 2 RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence 3 format RS 485 1 N 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 19 4 2 Serial connection b Setting of the station No Make the station No using RS 485 station No Switches Station No 0 to 99 ADDRESS c Connecting terminating resistors Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS 485 term
177. station unit CC LINK Ver 2 compatible Ethernet communication unit Built into GOT Ethernet 100Base TX IEEE802 11b g n compliant built in antenna station client connection to personal computer Wireless LAN communication unit GT25 WLAN Compliance with Japan Radio Law R amp TTE 1 The product with hardware version A manufactured in December 2013 complies with the regulation The product with hardware version A can be used only in Japan 2 The product with hardware version B manufactured in October 2014 complies with the regulation The product with hardware version B or later can be used in Japan the United States the EU member states Switzerland Norway Iceland and Liechtenstein 1 14 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 3 2 Option unit Product name Model Specifications Multimedia unit GT27 MMR Z For video input signal NTSC PAL 1 ch playing movie Video input unit GT27 V4 Z For video input signal NTSC PAL 4 ch GT27 R2 RGB input unit GT27 R2Z For analog RGB input signal 2 ch Video RGB input unit GT27 V4R1 Z For video input signal NTSC PAL 4 ch for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch GT27 ROUT RGB output unit GT27 ROUT Z For analog RGB output signal 1 ch Sound output unit GT15 SOUT For sound output GT15 DIOR For the connection to external I O device or operation panel Negative Common Input
178. the load of the network destination PLC Default Oms 0 to 10000 ms 1 Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting di fferent station numbers c W Ethernet setting 2 A default is 5028 when communication drivers are EtherNet IP AB Tag Gateway and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to Ethernet setting GOT Ethernet Setting Subnet Mask GOT IP Address Default Gateway Peripheral S W Communication Port No Transparent Port No g This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings 192 168 255 255 0 0 5015 5014 ons x Item GOT IP Address Description Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 0 18 Range 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 1024 to 5010 Peripheral S W Set the GOT port No for the S W 5014 to 65534 Communication communication Except for 5011 Port No Default 5015 5012 5013 and 49153 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 Transparent Port tr
179. the device 6 30 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 6 Precautions When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting Station When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each Station to the GOT 97 6 3 2 m Ethernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 3 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the System The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT o a lt 5 lt gt o E 2 E 2 2 o o 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 31 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The
180. the tag list dialog OK Item Description Set the GOT internal device name and device number Device Click Switch to the tag list dialog to display the tag list screen and then set devices in the PLC Informa Displays the device type and setting range which are selected tion in Device Switch Select this button to importing the tag file created by to the RSLogix5000 and set devices while checking the tag names tag list For how to import tag files refer to the following dialog gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 10 21 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 1 AB SLC500 10 4 2 AB MicroLogix Series Device No Device Device name Setting range No represen Device name Setting range tation represen tation Bit B PS 0010 P9299119 Bit B B3 0 0 to B255 255 15 B10 0 0 to B255 255 15 Timer Timing Timer Timing 4 0 14 to T4 255 14 TT bit y T3 0 14 TT to T255 255 14 TT bit T T10 0 14 TT to 255 255 14 Timer Timer Timing T4 0 13 DN to T4 255 13 DN Completion bit T3 0 13 DN to T255 255 13 DN bit T T10 0 13 DN to T255 255 13 DN T 1 2 Counter U 8 Counter Up C5 0 15 CU to C5 255 15 CU Soun er 3 0 15 0 to C255 255 15 CU Decimal 2 counter C C10 0 15 CU to C255 255 15 CU Decimal counter a amp Counter ee
181. which will be a terminal e 3 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 21 8 3 Connection Diagram 16 RS 485 connection diagram 16 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W RS232C RS485 a e interface converter Temperature controller i Temperature controller n T ar E RDA 3 s O UH RDA r1 1 RDB E E RDB 4 L M PE i SDA 1 i 1 SDA 1 m H ie i SDA 1 SDB bol SDB 2 rg 5 SDB SG 5 1 1 gr SG lo ul b GND 6 9 4 4 4 I 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series i UT35A Signal name iti 2 UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A product condition A E D UT75A UP55A product condition A Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 301 407 501 1 SDA 302 408 502 2 RDB 304 410 504 4 RDA 305 411 505 5 5 303 409 503 3 Forthe product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Fuel Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open netwo
182. 00 401 B400 name PF901 HA900 901 MA900 MA901 RMC500 X TIO SA100 SA200 SB1 RS 485 500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3 6 T R A 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1 5 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2 4 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 NC SG NC NC SDA2 TXD2 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 RDA1 RXD1 RDB2 RXD2 RDB1 RXD1 N RSA RTS N RSB RTS N CSA CTS NC CSB CTS O O O 1 12 3 4 on amp 20 6 RS 485 connection diagram 6 Temperature Temperature controller controller T R B TIR A SG Temperature Temperature controller controller TIR B TIR B TIR A SG TIR A Combination module e M L3 Combination module 4 2 Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2 3 More than 1000 in case of CB series Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM m Connecting terminating resistors When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a termina
183. 000 1m 172 BE 01 7 01 9000 1200 GT15 RS4 TE or RS 485 connection diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 Touse the dedicated cable conversion of the cable may be necessary 3 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers ESI trey rel 81 I i COM PORT1 e T SE SIL COM PORT1 COM PORT2 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT UNDC umber o bl le model Max Model Communication Ga e mode cable d di connectable Connection diagram Connection diagram istance Option device Model 4 name Type equipment number number Built into GOT W BF 02 0500 0 5m 3 ser i RS 422 W BF 02 1000 1m 2 es RS 22 Connection zomi 3 diagram 1 W BF 02 3000 3m GT15 RS4 9S Built into 5 485 connection 4200m Up to 16 diagram 1 GT IGT temperature H PCP J controllers GT15 RS4 9S for 1 GOT W BF 02 0500 0 5m 3 ag W BF 02 1000 1m FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m 9 3 i
184. 0805 1920055 gt 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 19200bps 2 4 ee 2 Set the Error Detection according to the sum check format 5 ps ps setting on the GOT side a Parity EVEN NONE NONE For the sum check format setting on the GOT side refer to I the following 2 Control Line NO HANDSHAKING T 10 2 5 Communication detail settings Communication DF4 HALF DUPLEX SLAVE 3 For the Maximum Node Address set the same address as a Driver the Maximum Node Address on the DH 485 network Duplicate Packet 4 Set the DH 485 Node Address according to the Host 2 bs e DISABLE Address on the GOT side Detection Set a unique DH 485 Node Address so that it does not z Station Address 0 conflict with the Node Address of the PLC CPU on the DH 485 network Error Detection BCC BCC CRC 2 BCC CRC For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the O following ui 1 Set the Baud Rate according to the transmission speed DT setting on the side 27 10 2 5 Communication detail settings z For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 2 Setthe Error Detection according to the sum check format setting on the GOT side For the sum check format setting on the GOT side refer to the following 3 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 13 10 2 Serial Connection 10 3 Ethe
185. 1 6 L g 2 TRB 1 RS 485 connection diagram 1 e SDB1 TXD1 8 T gt 1 T R A RKC temperature controller side 1 fad GOT side Modular connector 2 NC 1 4 NC 1 ae n AP AES 1 SDA 1 1 TR B 6 2 3 SG o 1 1 1 SDB 3 2 TIR A NC 3 amp 1 1 1 RDA 2 i a S6 NC i i el SG S 1 1 1 1 1 i 7 4 NC SDA2 TXD2 5 1 1 1 SG 5 5 NC SDB2 TXD2 7 4 i 1 1 1 Rsa H sc RDAXRXD29 9 1 1 1 RSB 8 RDA1 RXD1 10 2 1 1 1 i csa 4 RDB2 RXD2 2 1 1 1 csp 9 RDB1 RXD1 12 Wee 1 E KS NC 13 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the main x unit to 100 OHM RSA RTS 14 t Connecting terminating resistors 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following NC 13 1 manual RSB RTS 16 gt gt Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller NC 17 E mM CSA CTS 18 fe 2 RS 485 connection diagram 2 NC 19 i gt side RKC temperature controller side i terminal block Modular 2 CSB CTS 20 E RUP LAN SDA1 1 2 T R B 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM SDB1 2
186. 1 N 100BASE TX Ed Shielded twisted pair cable STP The following shows the numberof SPH2000 Category 5 and 5e ditm Built into GOT GOTs for 1 PLC 128 or less SPH3000 23 When PLC GOT is 1 N z o 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 23 4 3 Ethernet Connection 4 3 2 Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Manufacturer run FUJI MICREX Sx SPH To Ethernet Setting 2
187. 1 i RDA 1 1 SDB2 TXD2 7 71 71 71 T SG 1 1 1 1 RDA1 RXD1 10 TM x M DE i RDB1 RXD1 12 T I RSA RTS 14 at i RSB RTS 16 4 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 4 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series Signal name Series iti g UT UP ine UT32A UP35A UT55A product condition A ieee ee Hid d UT75A UM UP55A product condition A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 5 27 25 303 409 503 3 Forthe product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Produet Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type UT55A Product with two 5 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24 sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication 5 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in Win ICH the E3 terminal area option Det
188. 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 4 HITACHI PLC side connector Use the connector supporting the HITACHI PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI PLC user s manual 3 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 422 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC side SDA 1 ooo gt 2 RD H RDA 2 3 SD H RSA 3 6 CSA 4 lt i 7 ATT H 36 5 5 SG SDB 6 gt 1 RD L RDB 7 4 SDL RSB 8 8 55 5052 CSB 9 9 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 500m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 57 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 4 HITACHI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following s 1 4 3Terminating resistors of 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 5 3 3 Connection Diagram lt E O E z E 2 2 O o 3 4 Side Settings 3 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 4 C
189. 1044 2 0009 FEND DW 002 2 0010 00003 DWO00002 002 DW 008 2 0012 00000 0100008 003 lt DW 009 2 0014 0100009 22004 1 2 77 DW 010 2 0015 0100010 005 O E DW 011 z 2 0016 16500 DWO00011 006 E DW 012 a 2 0018 16500 gt Dwo00012 007 z z DW 013 2 0020 18499 gt Dw00013 008 1 0022 IEND Continued to next page 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 29 6 3 Ethernet Connection 0023 MSG RCV RECEIVE MESSAGE function standard system functions ONCOIL EXECUTE BUSY DB 210 0024 SB000004 FOUT 08000210 009 ONCOIL ABORT COMPLETE DB 211 0026 SB000004 FOUT 08000211 010 4 1039 DEV TYP ERROR DB 212 0028 00006 F FOUT DB000212 011 4 1041 0029 00001 Fl CIR NO 0030 00001 lt CH NO 0031 00003 lt F PARAM 0032 DA00000 DB 211 0039 08000211 4 1036 DW 024 0040 INC 0 00024 DB 212 0041 08000212 a i 4 1038 0042 DW 025 2 0043 INC DWO0025 DW 000 DW 026 2 0044 DWO00000 DWO0026 014 4 1008 DW 001 DW 027 2 0046 DW00001 gt Dw00027 016 1 0048 IEND 0 0049 DEND 1 Set0 to PARAMOSG to 11 of 6 input relay input register coil holding register offset Do not make the offset settings When the offset is needed set Option Offset to each object or make a setting added the offset value to
190. 12 13 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Communication Series Model name Clock Tee Connectable model Refer to diia K7W DLILIDISUbO RS 232 er er Fas K120S K7M DOIOOu RS 422 271 251 21 RS 232 GT uli Sul 5 K200S RS 232 cus 519 ou K300S K4P 12 2 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 Connectable Model List 12 2 System Configuration 12 2 1 Connecting to 805 or 1205 When connecting to one PLC Communication driver Connection cable C LS Industrial Systems MASTER K PLC Connection cable GOT Communi Cable model Number of connectable Series Cnet I F module cation Connection diagram EMEN Option device Model equipment Type number Built into GOT o 0 U gt s RS 232 connection 15m GT15 RS2 9P diagram 1 lt RS 232 a pem rm 12 0 GT10 C02H 2 6PT9P a 2 Ey ST User i same as o Use RS 232 connection Built into GOT diagram 3 above 2 805 1 PLC for 1 GOT 1205 Built into z 2 E 27 25 65 232 15m GT15 RS2 9P diagram 2 G7L CUEB RS 232 ES Em
191. 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 2 System Configuration 12 2 2 Connecting to 2005 When connecting to one PLC Communication driver TIT LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Connection cable 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector Connection cable GOT Number of 7 4 Communic Canle mode Max connectable Series Cnet I F module Bon Ives Connection diagram asane Option device Model equipment number Built into GOT o 25 i Us 1 RS 232 connection 45m GT15 RS2 9P diagram 2 LE 2 K200S G6L CUEB RS 232 1 PLC for 1 GOT 5 oM A GT10 C02H 6 2 a o 2 IGT IGT mm a User RS 232 ti 3 z 15 Built into GOT diagram 4 g M 2 LE 2 Z O o 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 5 12 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver UIT LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Connectio
192. 13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Wireless LAN communication unit GT25 WLAN Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M Connection conversion adapter GT10 9PT5S Field network adapter unit GT25 FNADP Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Printer unit Description GT15 PRN Video input unit GT27 V4 Z A set of GT16M V4 Z and GT27 IF1000 RGB input unit Video RGB unit GT27 R2 GT27 R2 Z A set of GT16M R2 Z and GT27 IF1000 Video RGB input unit GT27 V4R1 Z A set of GT16M V4R1 Z and GT27 IF1000 RGB output unit GT27 ROUT GT27 ROUT Z A set of GT16M ROUT Z and GT27 IF1000 Multimedia unit GT27 MMR Z A set of GT16M MMR Z and GT27 IF1000 Video signal conversion unit GT27 IF1000 External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Sound output unit GT15 SOUT B4 Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description SD card NZ1MEM 2GBSD NZ1MEM 4GBSD NZ1MEM 8GBSD NZ1MEM 16GBSD L1MEM 2GBSD L1MEM 4GBSD Battery GT11 50BAT Protective sheet GT27 15PSGC GT25 12PSGC GT25 10PSGC GT25 08PSGC GT25 05PSGC GT21 04RPSGC UC GT21 03PSGC UC GT27 15PSCC GT25 12PSCC GT25 10PSCC GT25 08PSCC GT25 12PSCC UC GT25 10PSCC UC GT25 08PSCC UC GT25 05PSCC GT21 04RPSCC UC GT21 03PSCC UC Protective cover for oil GT20 15PCO GT20 12PCO GT20 10PCO GT20 08PCO GT25 05PCO GT10 20PCO USB environmental protection
193. 15 RSB RTS 16 NC 17 CSA CTS 18 NC 19 CSB CTS 20 1 Aterminating resistor is required Set the terminating resistor selector switch in the main unit to Disable and connect a terminating resistor 110 Q 55 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 For terminating resistors in PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA refer to the manual of PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA 2 RS 485 connection diagram 2 MITSUBISHI INDIA MITSUBISHI INDIA GOT side D sub 9 1 PLC side PLC side SDA 1 4 E IMBRE SDB HE RDA 9 LEER o RDB 8 R IR g GND GND 5 5 SG RSA RSB CSA CSB A o x NY 1 Set the terminating resistor to 110 O when arranging the GOT in the end position of the system configuration Set the terminating resistor to OPEN when arranging the GOT in any position other than the end position of the system configuration 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 Forterminating resistors in PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA refer to the manual of PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA 13 8 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 3 Connection Diagram 3 RS 485 connection diagram 3 MITSUBISHI INDIA MITSUBISHI INDIA GOT side terminal block PLC side PLC side 2 SDA1 1 SS Tx
194. 2 destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 3 A length between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 connectable EtherNet IP communication module differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 1756 ENET 10Mbps 1756 ENBT 10 100Mbps ControlLogix5570 1756 EN2TR 10 100Mbps 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 15 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 3 3 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Manufacturer as Controler Type Control Compactt Ethernet Setting Standard V F Ethernet Mui Eherhet IP AB Gatew fj Routing Informatio EB Gat
195. 2 5013 and 49153 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection a Controller Setting CH1 YASKAWA MP20C GENER Manufacturer 5 o CH4 None Controller Type vaskawA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH gt Network Duplex Settir f amp Routing Informatio Jo Ehemot Setting 5 56 Gateway yr Standard y F Ethernet Muti Communication Eh Gateway Serve Driver Ethemet YASKAWA Gateway A Gert petat settng Standard Ethernet Setting Fiter Setting FTP Server Fig File Transfer F Property Value 4 1 amp D Buffer Memory Unit Nc GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port 5016 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Ethernet Setting Fa B __ Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address Port No Communicati a 3 1 YASKAWA 1 1 1 1 10500 UDP Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is os od indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the Net No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the Station 2 connected Ethernet module 1 to 64 Default blank Type YASKAWA fixed YASKAWA fixed Set the IP address of the PLC side IP IP address connected Ethernet module address Default blank Set the port No of the connected Port No Ethernet module 256 to 65534 Def
196. 2 15m 1 3 232 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C 485 interface capsule Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 4 CONNECTION TO PLC 4 2 Serial connection CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC When connecting to multiple PLCs using RS 232C 485 interface capsules Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Made interface ication cable moga Max Option device Model equipment name Connection diagram number distance capsule Type GT OIN GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 2 2 GT GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 900m Built into GOT GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m 1 GOT for up to 6 PLCs F70 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m RS 232C 485 interface or 8 65 485 connection diagram 1 500 GT15 RS4 9S 4 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 4 6 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial connection When connecting to multiple PLCs using general purpose interface modules PEG Connection cabl
197. 201 9P 3m or Sameas GT15 RS2 9P 65 232 connection diagram 1 RS 232 E ES GT10 C02H 6 ST IGTosr same as TE User RS 232 connection diagram 7 above Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 MP 920 2171 communicati connecting to 2171F on module Built into GOT same as 85 422 connection diagram 2 above 15 54 95 5 422 ST EM 5 0 GT10 C02H 9SC ST ST z ET R4 same as o IGTose 65 422 connection diagram 5 above Built into GOT 1 When a GT10 C02H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 6 6 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 4 System configuration for connecting to MP 940 Communication driver dun YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Communi Number of connectable Model bl del Max m cation s gt M Option device Model equipment name Connection diagram number distance Type Built into GOT GT09 C30R20204 14P 3m Differs or according to GT15 RS2 9P ose PLC side Gss RS 232 connection diagram 4 specifications RS 232 9 B Es GT10 CO2H 6PT9P 5 zu E R2 gt same as erts 8 5 RS 232 connection diagram 8 above Built into GOT E MP 940
198. 2H 6PT9P 2 Ey ES 21 21 88 232 connection 5 Built into GOT diagram 2 FA LTBGT2RACBLO5 0 5m 27 25 ser ji 5 85 422 4200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m diagram 1 1 FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m GT GT 27 25 Built into GOT 25 0 1 Up to 31 PLC RS 422 8 5 422 connection 4200m GT15 RS4 9S is diagram 2 for 1 GOT IST oan IST osP 21 121 R4 GT10 C02H 9SC ST oar ES aii 7 _ CRS 422 connection 1200m Built into GOT Ero diagram 3 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 3 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC nen Connection cable GOT Number of er Communication Communication unit TES Cable model Connection Max E uem connectable diagram number distance P equipment FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m GSH RS 485 connection 4200m FALTBGT2RACBL10 1m diagram 1 1 FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m Built into GOT RS 422 connection diagram 1 RS 485 1200m m rim connection diagram 2 2r pr Nexgenie 1000 PLC Up to 31 PLC Nexgenie 2000 PLUS PLC Festus ene for 1 GOT RS 485 connection 1200m GT15 RS4 TE diagram 3 ES ser 9 28 5 485 connection 4200m Built into 1 2 3 13 4 diagram 4 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED Do not ground the case of the 9 pin D Sub conn
199. 3 displays the device that cannot be converted no corresponding device type or excessive setting ranges as In this case set the device again 2 When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network The network will be set to the host station z a O o X a O a 2 lt a 3 When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to None The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No as In this case set the device again Since the channel No is retained the objects can be reused in other channel No in a batch by using the Device Bach Edit CH No Batch Edit or Device List 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 11 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT Write the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS project data and communication settings onto the GOT For details on writing to GOT refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 1 2 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT r Communicate with GOT write Read verication GOT Information Get GOT Information Wie pata Wie Qpton GOT Type zx GOT Name Data Size ROM 1354 KB RAM 2977 Free Space Capacity 1 KB KB oO GOT Destination Drive C Built in
200. 32 GT IGT resi Nexgenie 2000 PLUS PLC o RS 422 37 4324 Nexgenie2213A RS 485 Nexgenie2214 1 Use the PLC versions listed below Applicable Library Applicable Target Model Library name Version Target name Version NG16DL NG16ADL NG14RL Gay GOT2000 1000 lib Installable Target T2 7 UL NG16DN later later NG16ADN NG14RN Nexgenie2210 V 1 0 Vi 1 8 GOT2000 P2210 lib RAON Installable_Target_Nexgenie2210_T1 8 Nexgenie2211 later later n Ver 1 5 Nexgenie2213A GOT2000 P2213A lib m Installable Target Nexgenie2213A T1 5 x ul Ver 1 0 Ver 1 5 Nexgenie2214 GOT2000 P2214 lib pe ud Installable Target Nexgenie2214 T1 5 pes ui 13 2 13 1 Connectable Model List 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 2 System Configuration 13 2 1 Connecting to Nexgenie 1000 PLC Nexgenie 2000 PLUS PLC Communication unit Nexgenie 1000 PLC Nexgenie 2000 PLUS PLC Communication driver 13 2 System Configuration MEI Nexgenie Connection cable T Connection cable GOT Number of Communication SET ae 7 T connectable Type model Connection ax ti devi Model diagram number distance Sponsores vee equipment Built into GOT 2 27 25 ser i 5 232 connection 15m GT15 RS2 9P diagram 1 1 PLC for 1 RS 232 Emm GOT 21 21 R4 R2 GT10 C0
201. 32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA 1761 L20AWA 5A 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A 1762 L24BWA 1764 LSP AB Control CompactLogix 1756 L 1756 L1M1 1756 L1M2 1756 L1M3 1756 L61 1756 L62 1756 L63 1756 L55M12 1756 L55M13 1756 L55M14 1756 L55M16 1756 L55M22 1756 L55M23 1756 L55M24 1769 L31 1769 L32E 1769 L32C 1769 L35E 1769 L35CR 1794 L33 1794 L34 AB Control CompactLogix Tag 1756 L 1756 L1M1 1756 L1M2 1756 L1M3 1756 L61 1756 L62 1756 L63 GE Series 90 IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 IC697CPU731 697 772 697 782 697 928 697 935 IC697CPU780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 697 0788 IC697CPU789 697 790 IC200UAA003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 2000 007 2000 028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD 120 IC200UDD212 20000 005 20000 006 20000 010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 2000 014 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 IC200UDR001 IC200UDRO002 20000 003
202. 5 9 SG DR DSR 6 5 cs RS RTS 7 6 RV1 ER CS CTS 4 RS 9 r8 PHL Lu m MEME XE FG FG 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 NC GT12 NC GT11 NC Precautions when preparing a cable 3 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 4 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 737 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 5 HITACHI IES PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user s manual 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 7 2 3 Connection Diagram Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 200m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 27 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 4 HITACHI IES PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 297 1 4 3Terminating resistors of GOT 2 HITACHI IES PLC side When connecting an intelligent serial port module to a GOT a terminating resistor has to be connected to the intelligent serial port module HITACHI IES PLC user s Man
203. 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 25 1 6 Checking for Normal 0 1 27 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No to be used and perform the communication setting Writing the project data and OS Write the standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS project data and communication settings onto the GOT 5 371 18etting the Communication Interface Each chapter GOT Side Settings 3 1 2 1Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT V Verifying the project data and OS Verify the standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT 71 2 2 the project data and OS writing on GOT V Attaching the communication unit and 371 30ption Devices for the Respective Connection con necting the cable lt gt 71 Cables for the Respective Connection Mount the optional equipment and prepare connect the Each chapter System Configuration connection cable according to the connection type 2 7 Each chapter Connection Diagram V Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recog
204. 6 0 red 1 Aterminating resistor is required In the GT27 set the terminating resistor selector switch in the main unit to Disable and connect a terminating resistor 330 Q 9 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 For terminating resistors in PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA refer to the manual of PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA 13 6 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 3 Connection Diagram 3 RS 422 connection diagram 3 1 MITSUBISHI INDIA MITSUBISHI INDIA GOT side terminal block PLC side 2 PLC side SDA SDB 1 Ty 7 7 RDA j i Rx Rx RDB 14 8 i 8 i GND GND SG 1 i 5 1 5 RSA RSB CSA CSB q Set the terminating resistor to Enable when arranging the GOT in the end position of the system configuration Set the terminating resistor to Disable when arranging the GOT in any position other than the end position of the system configuration c 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 For terminating resistors in PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA refer to the manual of PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA ES 3 The signals RSA RSB CSA and CSB are not provided for 21 Return connection is not required Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 1200m or
205. 7 218TXB TCP UDP 10 or less 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 6 20 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 2 GOT Side Settings Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Setting communication interface 5 timeout occurs 2 gt i Ret 0 to 5ti Select Common Controller Setting from the etry 5times gt menu retries the communication times out Default 3times
206. 9 E 8 CTS B L4 1 SHLD 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC which will be a terminal Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 1200m or less 2 side connector zl For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications S 3 GE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the GE PLC side 2 module For details refer to the GE PLC user s manual z Connecting terminating resistors z 1 GOT side o Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 1 43 Terminating resistors of 2 GE PLC side When connecting a GE PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected gt GE PLC user s Manual 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 11 11 3 Connection Diagram 11 4 Side Settings 11 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment 2 18 Controller Setting Ess Controller Settin 1 Series 90 CH2 None Manufacturer GE CH3 None l j Controller Type GE Series 90 Egi Network Duplex Settir 2 amp
207. Capacity 1 KB ia PC Destination GT Designer3 4 GOT Read Communication Configuration Communication Path PC USB GOT Close 1 Select Communication Read from GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 The GOT Read tab appears on the Communicate with GOT dialog box Select the Drive information radio button of the Read Data 4 Click the Info Reception button 5 Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 13 9 72 2 gt x O LL o 7 2 a ir amp lt 7 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type For the specifications usage and connecting procedure on option devices refer to the respective device manual 1 3 1 Communication module Product name Model Specifications GT15 QBUS For QCPU Q mode moton controller CPU Q series Bus connection 1ch unit standard mode GT15 QBUS2 For QCPU Q mode moton controller CPU Q series Bus connection 2ch unit standard mode GT15 ABUS For FABACPU motion controller CPU
208. Com YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable Te t NI Connection cable GOT Number of connectable Commun Cable model Max equipment Series ication Option device Model Connection diagram number distance Type GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m Built into GOT 23 GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m 1200m or 25 5 485 connection diagram 3 GT15 RS4 98 4 wire type FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m 7 i UT32A GRS 485 connection diagram 17 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 7 4 wire type ype FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m UT55A RS 485 Up to 31 temperature controllers 0 75 for 1 UP35A 25 55 GaR RS 485 connection diagram 4 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 4 wire type a FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m 7 ser i i GRS 2 diagram 18 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 7 93 wire type FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2 7 5 52 5 485 connection diagram 8 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 2 wire type GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m Built into GOT GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m 1200m or UM33A RS 485 ss RS 485 connection diagram 3 GT15 RS4 98 Up to 31 temperature controllers 4 wire type for 1 GOT 2 27 25 5 52 5 485 connection diagram 4 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 4 wire type 8 10 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 Sys
209. Connecting to interface converter KS 485 converter K3SC 10 Communication settings ll Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting Make the communication settings by operating the DIP Switches Switch of the temperature controller Item Set value Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Terminati ist i i ermina mg resistor ON OFF Data bit 8bits selection Parity bit Odd even none 1 Set as necessary Stop bit 1bit Settings by switch Communication Type RS 232C RS 485 Echo back Without RS 485 1 Make the same setting as that of side Settings by DIP switch _ Communication A setting switch SG RDA SDA 7 8 9 Terminal block o oo for RS 422 485 communication RDB 08 E E PWR RD SD OOOO 29 switch omron K3SC 10 M n INTERFACE CONVERTER RS 232C Front Rear 1 Settings of transmission speed and terminating Terminal block resistor selection for RS 232 communication 4 uj O 2 E z O 5 2 E 5 O E z E 2 2
210. D RXD 2 SD SD TXD gt 3 RD ER DTR gt 6 DR SG gt SG DR DSR 20 ER RS RTS 8 CD CS CTS 5 CS 1 FG 2 RS 232 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC side D sub 9 pin D sub 9 pin NC 1 1 CD RD RXD 2 3 SD SD TXD 3 2 RD ER DTR 4 6 DR SG 5 5 56 DR DSR 6 4 ER RS RTS 7 CS CS CTS 8 7 RS 9 9 Ri Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 727 14 1GOT connector specifications 3 FUJI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI PLC side module For details refer to the user s FUJI PLC manual 4 12 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial connection RS 485 cable 1 RS 485 connection diagram 1 GOT side Peer rears PLCside 5 _ PLC side op Ed RDB 7 508 E SDB 1 f gt EA RDA SDB 6 i p i RDB 36 5 L 59 L SG rsa s a ME ee FG RSB 8 CSB 9 q Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal ES m Connecting terminating resistors o 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shie
211. DA SG 2 SG RSA RTS 14 le CSA CTS 18 T RSB RTS CSB CTS 20 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4 2 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series oes mum een TTN e S UTS2AJUPSBA UM33A UT55A product condition ay ESSA product condition BY Ut754 UM oreste rehus Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 SG 27 25 303 409 503 3 Forthe product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Produet Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor UT55A Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the R
212. DBUS Data bit configuration 1 Data bit Parity bit Stop bit BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit BO2 8bit Odd 2bit Device address 1 Slave address 1 1 to 99 4 Interval time yi 2 3 4 0 250 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made Interval time 0 to 250 ms I Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Selectthe device address1 2 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 5 10 Connecting to AG500 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Co
213. Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for E Stop Bit communications Default 1bit Specify whether not to perform P None parity check and how it is performed Parity Eon Even during communication Odd Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default Otime Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the host address station No Host Address of the GOT to which the PLC is 0 to 99 connected in the connected network Default 0 Set this item to adjust the Delay Time transmission timing of the 0 to 300ms communication request from the GOT Default 5ms 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 15 4 2 Serial connection o gt LL O E z 9 E o 2 2 O o For FUJI MICREX SX SPH Data Bit Stop Bit Parity Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Item Description Range Set this item when change the Transmission transmission speed used for Sate Speed communication with the connected 57600bps equipment Default 38400bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with Data Bit the connected equipment Default 8bits E Specify the stop bit length for WE 1 Stop Bit communications Default 1
214. E TX standards A length between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer The connectable EtherNet IP communication module differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 1756 ENET 10Mbps 1756 ENBT 10 100Mbps ControlLogix5570 1756 EN2TR 10 100Mbps The number of the connectable GOTs for 1 PLC differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 When PLC GOT is N 1 the following number of the PLCs can be connected to 1 GOT TCP 128 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N the following number of the GOTs can be connected to 1 PLC TCP 64 or less recommended to 16 or less ControlLogix5570 When PLC GOT is N 1 the following number of the PLCs can be connected to 1 GOT TCP 128 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N the following number of the GOTs can be connected to 1 PLC 128 or less recommended to 16 or less 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 3 2 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix CompactLogix or Fl
215. Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 2 System configuration for connecting to 500 Communication driver TIT YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Series Cable model Max Option device Model module Type Connection diagram number distance equipment OLI 27 Built into GOT GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m LC01 0N RS 232 or 15m LC02 0N 8 65 232 connection diagram 3 25 GT15 RS2 9P FA500 link module GT09 C30R40302 6T 3m 1200m Built into GOT GT09 C100R40302 6T 10m GT09 C200R40302 6T 20m LC02 0N RS 422 GT09 C300R40302 6T 30m 25 65 422 connection diagram 2 GT15 RS4 98 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 7 2 3 System configuration for connecting to STARDOM Communication driver Loom YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Connection cable o lt gt lt o x 5 O E z E o z z O o PLC Connection cable GOT Communica Cable model Max Number of connectable equipment Series 2 1 Option device Model tion Type Connec
216. F 9600bps ON OFF 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps 9 41 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting l 4 E 2 O o Z 2 a E o Y 14 E Z E 2 2 O o 2 Communication mode settings 9 5 2 Connecting to H PCP A H a COM PORT1 COM PORT2 PCP B Sw2 5 6 E 8 Communication protocol a Communication settings ON OFF OFF MODBUS protocol Make the communication settings of the temperature controller b COM PORT3 Item Setting range SwE Tu issi 9600bps 192006 Communication protocol Transmission speed ps ps Data bit 8bits ON MODBUS protocol Parity bit None Unit address 2 0 to F 3 Settings of data length parity bit and stop bit 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Selectthe unit address without overlapping with that of other COM PORT1 COM PORT2 units 202 Setting DIP switches Data bit configuration 2 the settings of transmission speed data length OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Stop 1bit parity bit and stop bit COM PORT3 5 3 7 5 Data bit configuration Top section OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Stop 1bit Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch Rear view of module mainframe with mother block removed 1 Transmission speed settings 3 Communication speed OFF ON 9600bps ON ON 19200bps 2 Settings of data l
217. GT10 C02H 6PT9P 21 GT 21 R2 o4R S LosP RS 232 connection same as Built into GOT diagram 4 above 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 12 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple PLCs n Connection cable 2 Number of connectable equipment 31 PLCs for 1 GOT Connection cable 1 Connection cable E Connection cable PLC 1 Cnet module 2 GOT Max Cable model Commu Cable model Series Connection Model name nication Connection Option device Model diagram number Type diagram number 2 27 25 m 5j Built into GOT 23 RS 422 connection 500m 15 54 95 diagram 1 Kaos 8 65 422 K1208 connection G7L CUEC RS 422 17 T diagram 2 GT10 C02H 9SC IST RS 422 H n ES p 500m Built into GOT diagram 3 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 12 4
218. Gs RS 485 2 RS 232 Total of X TIO X SRX connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m DI and X DO Up diagram 8 diagram 3 to 31 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd When connecting directly to temperature control module X TIO Communication driver TIT RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Communication Number of connectable equipment Series Connection diagram Option device Model Type distance number User i eis RS 485 1200m Built into GOT connection diagram 5 FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m 2 User RS 485 1200 1 FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m X TIO Up to 31 SRX RS 485 conne ciom dagran G FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m Total of X TIO X DI and X DO Up to 31 for 1 GOT U 1200 GT15 RS4 TE connection diagram 7 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 26 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 10 Connecting to SB1 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers
219. M3 Emulator User Library to the new project 1 Right click Library under the project tree in Logic Designer 2 Right click Insert and select User Library 3 Double click SD CFAMS3R PF mwt to select it 4 The library path inserted in the procedures above is as follows Install Folder LogicDesigner Libraries SD PF mwt 7 14 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 4 Copy a sample project POU to the new project 1 Open C Install Folder ogicDesignen Projects EXAMPLE J mwt 2 Right click Emulator in the Logic POU under the project tree in the Example J project and select Copy 3 Right click the Logic POU under the project tree in the created new project and select Paste 4 Double click the FAM3 Emulator file in the FAM3 Emulator folder 5 For the following terminals set as shown below REQ terminal TRUE TERMCHAR terminal FALSE PORT terminal COM1 STATION terminal STATION 1 SD CFAM3R OPEN COM1 VALID TRUE COM1 COM1 PORT ERROR ERROR FALSE 4 TERMCHAR STATUS STATUS1 FALSE CHECKSUM STATION1 STATION D D B B COMERR1 COMERR COMERR COMERR1 Definition example of Logic POU 5 Defining the instance Instantiate Logic POU Define an already defined instance to Tasko 1 Right click the Physical hardware Configuration IPC_33 FCX01 FCX Tasks Task0 CYCLIC and select Insert Program
220. MP900 CP9200SH Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Specify the host address station No Controller Type I F and Driver set of the PLC to which the GOT is Make the settings according to the usage environment Most Address EE in nee Tm 5 6 2 8 Communication detail settings Default 1 Set this item to adjust the Click the OK button when settings are completed transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the GOT 10ms Default Oms 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 15 6 2 Serial Connection For GT21 GS POINT 1 Delay Time When connecting to PLC CP 9200 H and CP 9300MS set the following sie os S Vale Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8bit Stop Bit 10 Retry Times 0 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address 1 Delay Time ms 0 32bit Storage Auto Item Description Range Set this item when change the 4800bps vens transmission speed used for 9600bps Transmission Mir 5 Speed communication with the connected 19200bps equipment 38400bps Default 19200bps 57600bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with T Data Bit l 8bit fixed the connected equipment Default 8bit Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Default 1bit Specify wh
221. Multi channel function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following gt Mitsubishi Products 20 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface o z E z gt o x 2 a 2 gt 5 lt a Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer Controller Type Driver and I F When using the channel No 2 to No 4 put a check mark at Use CH Controller Setting CH1 MELSEC Rnb CH2 None Manufacturer MITSUBISHI CH3 None CH4 None Controller Type MELSEC RAMT gh Network Duplex Settir Routing Informatio Ethernet Setting 5 8 Gateway Standard I F Ethernet Multi Communication Ed Gateway Serve Driver Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Gateway 29 Gateway Client Detail E Mee GOT Standard Ethernet Setting Fiter Setting FTP Server File Transfer F Value a Q Redundant 1 X Station No Switch Buffer Memory Unit 1 GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No Retry Times Startup Time Sec Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Ethernet Setting porga st NetNo Station H 4 pent OK Item Description Us
222. NECTION TO GE PLC 11 1 Connectable Model List 11 2 System Configuration 11 2 1 Connecting to Series90 30 Connectable model Only the models that are compatible with SNP X protocol can be connected Communication driver i GE SNP X gt it gea Connection cable For the RS 232 connection Connection cable GOT Number of Power Communication Met Me el NUR connectable odel name Ication diagram Ista ption device ode eec 1 equipment Supplies Modules Type nts m J Built into GOT IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU311 8 232 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU313 IC693CMM311 RS 232 pesi 52 15m IC693PWR332 IC693CPU323 connection diagram 1 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS2 9P o 2 5 GT Built into GOT e IC693PWR321 IC693CPU350 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 Use RS 232 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU366 IC693CMM311 RS 232 pus So 15m 1 PLC for 1 GOT IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 connection diagram 1 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 GT15 RS2 9P Built into GOT IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU363 1C693CMM314 RS 232 a RS 232 45m IC693PWR332 connection diagram 1 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 11 CONNECTION TO GE
223. NNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 10 2 0 PLC Side Setting Connecting to DH485 network via adapter 1770 KF3 Setting of Adapter Item Setting details Baud Rate 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Parity For details of ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs refer to the Flow Control Disable No Handshaking following manuals gt ALLEN BRADLEY PLC user s Manual Category Error Detection BCC Directly connecting to the CPU Gites Baud Rale 1200808 3 11031 Setting details Address Control DH 485 Node 4 i i 0 to 31 Item SLC500 Compact Address 1000 1200 Series 1500 Series FlexLogix 1 Setthe Baud Rate according to the transmission speed Series setting on the GOT side gt For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to 4800bps 4800bps 4800bps the following mr 9600bps 9600bps eue a Baud Rate 9600bps 1920
224. NNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 17 7 3 Ethernet Connection Ethernet setting 2 GOT Ethernet Setting wi Subnet Mask GOT IP Address Default Gateway Peripheral S W Communication Port No Transparent Port No This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings 192 168 255 255 0 0 5015 5014 Ethernet setting g Setting e Controller Setting id CH1 YOKOGAWA STA cH2 None Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Controler Type YOKOGAWA STARDOM FASO0 FA M3 x Network Duplex Settir Routing Informatio 5 56 Gateway yr Standard 1 F Ethemet Multi z Fp Communication Y E Gateway Driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway x Gat Client Eja Detal Setting Standard Ethernet Setting Fiter Setting Gil FTP Server mmm re Fi File Transfer F Property Value 3 Net No 1 1 Station No Switch XD Buffer Memory Unit Nc 1 Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 Communication Port No 5017 Retry Times Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Ethernet Setting se ale __ Host Net No Station Umi Type Address Port No Communia 1 1 1 YOKOGAWA 1 1 1 1 12289 UDP ma ox cma Item Description Set value Host The host
225. Net IP AB essem emm 10 14 10 3 2 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix CompactLogix or FlexLogix Ethernet connection type EtherNet IP AB 10 15 10 3 3 GOT Side Settings c doen dette E Co e e E eR EE D ORE DRE 10 16 10 3 4 PLC Side seting tercii deret eder ere feste erar ERR Re 10 19 10 3 5 Precautions sid eiii t 10 19 10 4 Device Range that Can Be 2222111 11 10 20 10 41 AB SEC500 ish ca that abt tia uates ent 10 22 10 4 2 MicroLogix Series 0 0 1 2 2 01 006 entente nba 10 22 10 4 3 MicroLogix Series Device 10 23 10 4 4 Control CompactLogix nnm 10 23 10 4 5 Control CompactLogix 10 23 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 1 Connectable Model List iesu dnt enne Dt ase datae nad inna dna dna ua 11 2 14 2 System Configuration ici on on iet en meme eise pd ee De TRA RS 11 3 11 2 1 Connecting to 90 30 2 22 22 42 1 0 00 sanas 11 3 11 2 2 Connecting to 5 90 70 nenne 11 6 11 2 3 Connecting to VersaMax mener nennen nennen 11 7 11 3 Gonnectior D
226. Node Name Any string 6 28 N O Mode Selecti ON QUE SEI SCHOR OFF Basic mode 10 channels up to 512 words 24 Not used OFF Transmission ON 10Mbps 10 100 OFF Speed OFF 100Mbps Transmission ON Full duplex mode iu Mode ORF OFF Half duplex mode ON Start up by the default IP address and the engineering port T No INIT Initial Startup QEF OFF Start up by the IP address and the engineering port No set for CP 717 ON The module starts the self diagnosis when the PLC is tarted TEST Test OFF The module does not start the self diagnosis when the PLC is started 1 Turn off all the unused switches When even one of those switches is on the PLC may not normally operate 2 When the PLC is started with the TEST switch on the module starts the self diagnosis and may not perform the communication Turn off the switch before the communication is started 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection Sequence program To communicate the CP 9200SH series CP 312 series or CP 317 series with GOT1000 series the ladder program to receive messages is required When multiple GOTs are connected to the CP 9200SH series CP 312 series or CP 317 series ladder programs to receive messages for each GOT are required ladder program to receive massages FSCAN L ONCOIL 1 0008 58000003 5 000004 H 1 0002 IFON 2 0003 FOR 00000 to 00031 by 00001 3 0007 00000 0100000 001
227. Nu with GOT GNO 1 1 to 20 Connection Number Local Port Local Station s Port Number 10309 uice Node IP Address IP address Parameter Remote Station s IP L E of GOT setting Address Node Port Remote T Port No Station s Port Number 2 of GOT UDP Connection Type recommended UDP TCP Extended MEMOBUS Protocol Type Extended MEMOBUS m MEMOBUS MELSEC None MODBUS TCP Code BIN RTU BIN ACII Node Name Remote Name of GOT Station s Name Subnet Mask 114 Gateway IP Address System Port No Diagnostic 10000 Engineering Port No Local Port re Transmission PLC side ah Control Protocol Zero 3 sec setting Setting Window Timer Value TCP Retry Time 500ms TCP Close Time 60 sec IP Assemble Time 30 sec MAX Packet Length 1500 bytes 1 When MITSUBISHI PLC and YASKAWA are used together in the same network do not set the same value for the Station of MITSUBISHI PLC and the CNO Connection number of YASKAWA PLC 2 Setthe same the Node IP Address Remote Station s IP Address and the Node Port Remote Station s Port Number as the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side For the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side refer to the following 57 6 3 2 m Ethernet setting 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 23 lt 5 lt 2 2 2 O o 2 Setting for th
228. OM Setting range 0 to EE 2 4 Interval time settings Configure the interval time setting using the RKC communication setting tool WinPCI After the communication is started set as follows Setting item Set value Instrument 0 CFG file ZCOM rkc cfg Communication 1 interval time 0 to 250ms Communication 2 interval time For the using method of RKC communication setting tool refer to the following gt RKC communication setting tool user s manual 9 5 5 Connecting to CB Series 1 Communication settings Item Setting range Device address 1 to 99 m gt 2 9600bps Communication speed 3 19200bps 0 8 1 None Data bit configuration 6 8 1 Even 7 8 1 Odd Interval time 0 to 150 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the CB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following LF CB series Communication Instruction Manual 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 6 Connecting to FB Series 1 Communication settings Setting range Communication protocol 1 MODBUS Device address 1 to 99 Slave address 2 96 9600bps Communication speed 19 2 19200bps 38 4 38400bps
229. PLC 11 3 11 2 System Configuration For the RS 422 connection connecting to the Communication Modules PLC Connection cable GOT Cable model UR Commun Power Communication es Connection Max j DN Model name 5 ication Option device Model Supplies Modules diagram distance Type number Built into GOT IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU311 UseRS 422 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU313 IC693CMM311 RS 422 connection 1200m IC693PWR332 IC693CPU323 diagram 1 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT IC693PWR321 IC693CPU350 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 8 422 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU366 IC693CMM311 RS 422 connection 1200m IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 diagram 1 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 UsH RS 422 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU363 IC693CMM311 RS 422 connection 1200m IC693PWR332 diagram 1 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 11 4 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 2 System Configuration Number of connectable equipment 8 PLCs for 1 GOT For the RS 422 connection connecting to the Power Supplies PIG Connection cable GOT Number of Cable model Max Power Supplies 1 Model name nication Connection diagram distinco Option device Model equipment Type number GT 27 Built into GOT IC693PWR321 IC693CP
230. Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 5 30 5 28 303 503 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 l O 2 O o 2 5 a 5 lt o o x gt O LE 2 9 um o 2 2 O o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 25 8 3 Connection Diagram Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be within the maximum distance 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 57 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side When connecting a YOKOGAWA temperature controller to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 57 8 5
231. Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 T 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter which will be a terminal 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 3 RS 485 connection diagram 3 Interface Terminating resistor 1000 1 2W 2 converter Temperature Temperature KS 485 lt controllerside controller side ba ba ra TRD 2 as m 7 TRD 3 L1 i 2449 SG 1 y ET 3 T S ME AS 3 2 FG 9 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter which will be a terminal 8 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5 8 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 Connection Diagram 4 RS 485 connection dia
232. RS232C RS485 converter refer to the following manual Transmission speed 9600bps fixed ET lt gt User s Manual of RS232C RS485 converter Data bit bis Parity bit Even odd none Model name Refer to Stop bit ibit 2bits GREEN 8 5 1 Address 72 1 to 99 UT100 8 5 2 uu 0 PC link communication without sum check Temperature controller UT2000 853 Protocoliselection 1 PC link communication with sum check 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings UTAdvanced Rd 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units RS232C RS485 converter ML2 8 5 5 2 For the UT750 UP750 Item Set value pui M 9600bps fixed communication i tcp 4 Transmission speed ap P 9600bps 19200bps ME 38400bps communication Data bit 7bits 8bits Parity bit Even odd none o Stop bit 1bit 2bits Address 172 11099 5 0 PC link communication RS 485 without sum check communication 1 PC link communication with sum check Protocol selection T High performance 0 PC link communication 485 without sum check 7 icati 1 PC link communication with sum check 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units 5 lt o x gt 2 9 o 2 2 o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 29 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 5 2 Connecting to UT100 Series
233. S 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in he E3 terminal area option Detailed code model With CH3 UP55A Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in he E4 terminal area option Detailed code model With 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal C37 m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 J 2 E 2 o a 2 2 E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 23 8 3 Connection Diagram 18 RS 485 connection diagram 18 Terminating resistor 2 Temperature 2200 1 AWy Temperature GOT side 22L controller 1 NUM CAD controller FU a Tox Toy 1 SDB SDA1 TXD1 6 E 4 La EN SDB SDB1 TXD1 8 r4 r4 ra Lie SDA SG 2 E RDB RDB SDA2 TXD2 5 it E RDA
234. S B Ia De M SHLD 1 B pm 1 SHLD 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 A terminating resistor should be connected to communication module at a terminal station 2 RS 422 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC terminating resistor 1200 PLC H INL 9 RT SDA 1 REED 11 11 RD B SDB 6 ROA ao 10 RD A RDA 2 1 22 13 SD B RDB 7 2 SOS 12 12 SD A SG 5 i d 7 sc RSA 3 RBAI 5 6 RTS A CSA 4 45 15 CTS A RSB 44 14 RTS B CSB 9 ug CTS B IL det NS i 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC which will be a terminal 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 3 Connection Diagram 3 RS 422 connection diagram 3 GOT side PLC terminating resistor 120072 pps WS D RT alc ce TS 9 a 9 RT spa f E u x RD B SDB1 6 RP 10 r r 10 RD A RDA 2 SPC ag EE 1 SD B 7 ii SPW 12 SD A se 5 L1 38 sc RSA 3 LOO Z 6 RTS A csa 4 H i CTSA as dd L 15 CTS A RSB ERTSE 14 RTS B CSB
235. S232 to safety controller c EFI input El WA Device A 0 1 Word number _ i Word virtualization of LD GOT independent device E 2 zu 3 device Not available 1 LWO LD1 Upper bits Device Byte number 0 to 3 LDO Lower bits Device number 1 to 3 1 When the mapping position is changed by the engineering software for SICK a mismatch occurs between virtual EFI number 1 to 2 devices on GOT and SICK safety controller mapping devices When mapping is changed use D devices or LD devices 14 6 14 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 6 Device Range That Can Be Set 3 When using offset specification When setting devices using the offset function the EFI output EQ Offset 0 1 2 3 to 15 device values are as follows 0 Ear Ean Eai a Input I 16 Fixed to 0 Offset 0 1 2 8 4 5 6 47 8to 15 1240 20 na 16 Ir te 256 EQ20 EQ21 EQ22 Device range error 16 121 122 123 124 125 12 6 127 12 8 I 32 13 1 3 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 136 37 13 8 48 142 14 3 44 5 14 6 7 14 8 64 154 152 153 16 4 155 156 157 158 80 161
236. S7 300 400 Connection cable pa PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Seri a Pus C Pus mo Max Option devi Model S a eries HMI Adapter nication onnection diagram JEENE ption device ode equipment Type number Built into GOT GT09 C30R20801 9S 3m 27 25 or 15m GT15 RS2 9P 089785232 connection SIMATIC MLFB diagram 1 1 GOT for 1 HMI S7 300 400 6ES7 972 0CA11 0XA0 EUR Adapter 21 21 GT10 C02H m 6PT9P ST Eu Brje J 2 85232 connection 4sm _ Built into diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of this product contact Siemens AG 2 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 3 15 2 Serial Connection When connecting to multiple PLCs JI Connection cable Communication driver Li SIEMENS 7 300 400 C IL Connection cable GOT Number of Seri 4 Pa Pun Option devi Model eries HMI Adapter nication onnection diagram MINUS ption device ode equipment Type number Built into GOT GT09 C30R20801 9S 3m o
237. SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 J Connection cable 1 T n Interface bM s aud Connection cable 1 4 Connection cable 2 GOT controller NER converter Number of Cable model Tes Model Commu Cable model Max connectable Model name Connection diagram name nication Connection diagram distan Option device Model equipment number Type number ce GT Loud W BF 28 0500 0 5m Built into W BF 28 1000 1m Up to 31 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 28 3000 m THV A1 W BF 02 1000 1m 1000m COM A RS 232 28 3000 fr 15m ior W BF 02 3000 3m 1GOT RS 232 connection GT15 RS2 9P diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 24 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485V Connection cable 3 Communication driver SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 1 Connection cab T t ti ti Interface emperature Connection cable Connection cable controller 1 2 Max converter Number of Cable model Cable model oen Commu Cable model Max connectable Model distance Model ti Connection Connection
238. Sec 3 Br NE M 3 Delay Time ms 0 Eus Driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway BE Gateway Clent E GOT Standard Ethernet Setting IP Fitter Setting S Item Description Range sonne Steh m Set the network No of the XD Buffer Memory Unit Nc 1 GOT Net No 1 to 239 4 Default 1 Retry Times 3 Set the station No of the GOT Startup Time Sec 3 na Tme Sec GOT Stat 1 to 64 pem ation Default 1 Set the GOT IP address subnet GOT Ethernet mask default gateway peripheral S L F GOT aa Setting W communication port No Ethernet setting gt im transparent port No Host Net No Station Unit Type Address Port No Communic 3 1 1 YOKOGAWA 1 1 1 1 12289 UDP Set the GOT port No for the 1024 to 5010 eof connection with the Ethernet SOS Disque Communication dul Except for 5011 Port No E id ias 5012 5013 and Default 5017 49153 Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication l 1 timeout occurs Select Common E Controller Setting from the Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times lt menu retries the communication times z out o 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Default 3times channel to be used from the list menu Specify the time period from the Startup Ti GOT startup until GOT starts the 310255 gt artu Ime 3 Setthe following
239. Source Type Output External I O unit For the connection to external I O device or operation panel Positive Common GT15 DIO Input Sink Type Output 1 3 3 Conversion cable Product name Specifications FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 RS 485 terminal block conversion modules RS 422 485 Connector gt RS 485 Terminal block FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 o 2 z z o Y 2 a a 3 t 1 3 4 Serial multi drop connection unit Product name Me Specifications GOT multi drop connection module 3 Mitsubishi Products 18 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M 1 3 5 Field network adapter unit Product name Model Specifications The field network adapter unit can be used with the following field networks by using the Anybus CompactCom M40 network communication module manufactured by HMS hereinafter referred to as the communication module Field networks PROFIBUS DP V1 Field network adapter unit GT25 FNADP DeviceNet How to incorporate the communication module to the field network adapter unit and the details of the product name of the communication module refer to the following manual E GOT2000 Series Field Network Adapter Unit User s Manual 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 15
240. T IP Address 192 168 0 18 TimeouPerodPING Tes 5 B Test Result 1 Specify the GOT IP Address of the PING Test and click the PING Test button 2 2 The Test Result is displayed after the PING 4 Test is finished PING Test Connection Close 3 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of Communication Settings P address of GOT specified by Ping command 1 30 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Confirming the communication state on the GOT PING Test can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility IP address of the other terminal 192 168 L 8 1139 Ping transmission 0 z E z gt o x 2 a 2 te 5 lt a 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 31 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 3 Confirming the communication state to each station Station monitoring function The station monitoring function detects the faults communication timeout of the stations monitored by the GOT When an abnormal state
241. T52A UM33A UT55A UP55A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 SG 30 5 28 303 503 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 3 Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 11 5 485 connection diagram 11 Terminating resistor 1000 GOT side Temperature controller Temperature controller RXe 1 SDA1 TXD1 6 4 3 E 3 RX c RX SDB1 TXD1 8 4 5 5 RX TX 11 pa RDA1 RXD1 10 4 T T 4 TX ne i H RDB1 RXD1 12 6 6 SG Li SG 2 2 an 2 56 Ca IHRE ND RSA RTS 14 T 5 RSB RTS 16 Bl O CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 lt RDB2 RXD2 11 z NC 13 NC 15 17 NC 19 gt O 1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 2 NOME 37 m Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 2 O o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram
242. Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 26 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 4 Side Settings 8 4 1 Setting communication i 8 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication unicau ing settings Property Value Set the channel of the connected equipment Transmission Speed BPS 9600 3 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit B conte Sting Parity Even Sum Check None a vokocAwa cREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Retry Times 0 Routing Informatio 5 pm ences Standard VF RS232 Timeout Time Sec 3 Gateway Serve oa Host Address 1 FTP Server ae Delay Time ms 5 Station No Switch Buffer Memory Unit Format 1 Description Range 4800b Set this item when change the T M transmission speed used for ps Transmission communication with the connected 19200b5ps Speed 38400bps 9600bps 37609058 115200bps OK Cancel Apply Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with the 7bits 8bits connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu Specify whether or not to perform a parity Nona q heck and how it i rfi d duri 2 The Controller Setti
243. Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal z 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal C37 m Connecting terminating resistors o 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 13 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 14 3 RS 485 connection diagram 3 GOT side Temperature controller 1 HJ Temperature controller SS T F it iil it 1 1 SDB RDA 2 L4 SDB i4 e SDA RDB 7 RDBG SDA 1 1 1 1 SDA 1 RDB RDAC 11 SDB 6 L BC RDA 1 1 SG 5 SG 1 1 f RSA lt 2 4 4 c RSB Terminating resistor gt CSB 9 FG E 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series GREEN GREEN Signal name Series Series UIS UT55A product condition By UT UP UM US UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A product condition A UP55A product condition B UT75A UP55A product condition A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA
244. Type distance P equipment number paga Built into GOT a gt lt ss RS232 connection 15m GT15 RS2 9P diagram 2 1 SLC500 1770 RS 232 1 GOT for 1 adapter j GT10 C02H 6PT9P 2 User RS232 connection k 15m Built into GOT diagram 5 LL 2 2 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or is used do ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 5 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series When connecting to one PLC Communication driver i AB MicroLogix Connection cable Connection cable GOT C Gu T Hi Number of connectable ommunication able mode ax ies 2 tion devic Model equipment Senes Type Connection diagram number distance S HAS ROS Built into GOT E 1 1761 CBL PM02 Series C or later 15m GT15 RS2 9P or Gs RS232 connection diagram 3 IGTosp STosr e GT10 C02H MicroLogix1000 6PT9P RS 232 1 GOT for 1 PLC 1200 1400 1500 lt Em ia R2 85232 connection diagram 5 15m Built into GOT 1761 CBL PM02 Series C or later Eum cum or R2 15
245. U350 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 m ICG93PWR331 IC693CPU366 RS 422 et RS 422 1200m IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 connection diagram 2 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 GT15 RS4 9S 8 PLCs for 1 GOT nis GT Built into GOT IC693PWR321 23 IC693PWR330 nes IC693PWR331 ICG93CPU363 RS 422 18 RS 422 1200m IC693PWR332 connection diagram 2 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS4 9S ral Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation For the RS 422 connection connecting to the PLC PLC Connection cable GOT MU o umber o Communi Cable model Max connectable Power Supplies Model name cation Connection diagram doen Option device Model equipment z Type number Built into IC693PWR321 2 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU363 9 8 PLC f IC693PWR331 RS 422 Reo 1200m isi IC693PWR332 CPU port 2 connection diagram 2 1 GOT IC693PWR328 Gris 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 5 11 2 System Configuration 11 2 2 Connecting to Series90 70 Only the models that are compatible with SNP X protocol can be connected For the RS 232 connection 1 Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Communi Cable model Max j Model name 1 cation Connection diagram Option
246. WA PLCs with the GOT 1000 series the ladder program to receive messages is required The following shows an example ladder program for MP2000 series ladder program to receive massages One scan at startup IF SB000001 true STORE Source 00000 Dest 0 00008 STORE Source 00000 Dest 0 00009 STORE Source 00000 Dest DW00010 STORE Lee CL Source 00000 Dest DW00011 Source 00000 Dest DW00012 STORE Source 32767 Dest DW00013 STORE Source 00000 Dest 0 00014 STORE Lee Source 00000 Dest 0 00024 STORE Source 00000 Dest DW00025 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection Sets parameters in the first scan after startup Low speed scan DWGL SB000003 High speed scan DWGH SB000001 Sets the coil offset 1 Sets the input relay offset Sets the input register offset 1 1 Sets the holding register offset Write range LO Write range HI Write range 0 S Write range LO S Write range X MW Maximum address value of register Clears the system registers Clears the normal pass counter Clears the error counter Continued to next page 0013 NL 1 0016 gt 0017 NL 1 0017 gt 0018 NL 2 0018 gt 0019 NL 2 0020 NL 2 c END IF Parameter settings completed
247. X GT2715 X GT2715 XTBA GT2715 XTBD GT2712 S GT2712 STBA GT2712 STWA GT2712 STBD GT2712 STWD GT27 S GT2710 S_ GT2710 STBA GT2710 STBD GT27 GT27 V GT2710 V GT2710 VTBA GT2710 VTWA GT2710 VTBD GT2710 VTWD 97 GT27 S GT2708 S GT2708 STBA GT2708 STBD GT2708 V GT2708 VTBA GT2708 VTBD GT27 V GT2705 V GT2705 VTBD GT25 S 2512 GT2512 STBA GT2512 STBD GT25 GT2510 V GT2510 VTBA GT2510 VTWA GT2510 VTBD GT2510 VTWD 5 GT25 V GT2508 V GT2508 VTBA GT2508 VTWA GT2508 VTBD GT2508 VTWD GT2310 V GT2310 VTBA GT2310 VTBD GT GT23 GT23 V 23 GT2308 V GT2308 VTBA GT2308 VTBD GOT2000 GT21 Series Ey GT21 R GT2104 R GT2104 RTBD 21 IGT GT2103 PMBD 20 4 GT21 GTosP GT2103 PMBDS 21 GT21 P GT2103 P GTosP GT2103 PMBDS2 21 GT GT2103 PMBLS 21 R4 5V Soft GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 2000 7 GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series GOT900 Series GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series GOT800 Series GOT 800 Series 2 Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Bus connection unit Description GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF
248. a p M 62 Her jj Ql S OFF ON iS amp ha E M nnnnnann Front side Right side Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 9600bps ON OFF Communication 19200bps OFF ON speed 38400bps ON ON bit 8bits OFF ON Parity None Data bit bits OFF ON ON configuration Parity Even Data bit 8bits Parity Odd MODBUS ON protocol 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 43 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 3 Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch Module address setting switch 00 Setting range 0 to F Tas ANIZ Nu eee ges any NA aS NU OT Zr eA SITAS i 4 Interval time settings Configure the interval time setting using the RKC communication setting tool WinPCI After the communication is started set as follows Setting item Set value Instrument 0 CFG file ZTIO rkc cfg Interval time 0 to 250ms For the using method of RKC communication setting tool refer to the following gt RKC communication setting tool user s manual 9 5 4 Connecting to Z COM 1 Communication settings Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communic
249. a are written to the temperature controller of the 5 station No set for Host Address of the communication detail settings Monitoring and writing with bit specification of word All device are performed only for the station No set for Host Address lt When writing the data in numerical input the data is written to the connected temperature controller other than the ones specified by the word device during Network input and the temperature controller set for Host Address is monitored during other than input displaying gt Select this item when monitoring the temperature o controller of the specified station No z After selecting set the station No in the following Statio 1 to 99 To monitor the temperature controller o n No of the specified station No gt 100 to 115 specify the station No of the z temperature controller to be monitored by the value of data register 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 33 8 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 9 7 Precautions Station number settings of temperature controller In the system configuration the temperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 57 8 4 2 Communication detail settings GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the setting
250. a bit device as a bit device Set the device using the format of byte address DEC bit address 0 to 7 Device M v 01287 Device name Device number Bit address 0 to 7 Byte address DEC Be Set 2 When setting a bit device as a word device Set the device number For the device name setting enter W after the bit memory device name Device MW 0128 Device name Device number W added Setting with even number 3 When setting a data register Set the device using the format of data block DB data word DW Device DB 100 DBW 10000 Data word DW number Data block DB number 4 Precautions when setting devices a Notation method of the bit device The difference in bit memory notation between GOT and PLC is as follows Notation of GOT Notation of PLC 00007 00 7 Device name b Preparing to set a data register Itis necessary to define the data block using a peripheral software and sequence program before using a data register Setting more than one data block cannot be done for the data register c Object that cannot be set Timer current value T Only one device can be set for the write target of this device Therefore multiple devices such as using the recipe function etc cannot be used d Notation method of the data registers with the bit specification The notation of the data registers with the bit specification differs between the GOT and the
251. able Model List 3 2 System Configuration 3 2 1 Connecting to S10V Communication driver em HITACHI S10mini S10V Connection cable a Connection cable GOT Number of Model Communication Cable model Max ESI connectable name module Connection diagram number distance b equipment E Type F Built into GOT z 23 GT09 C30R21301 9S 3m LQE560 RS 232 15 55 RS 232 connection diagram LLI 1 27 25 gt GT15 RS2 9P 5 1 for 1 o LQP510 ias communication module GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m e GT GTO09 C100R44301 9S 10m 3 GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m LQE565 RS 422 GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m 500m 9r 4 CARS 422 connection diagram GT15 RS4 9S 2 GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m ST Built into GOT GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m 23 GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m LQP510 RS 422 GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m 500m 1 GOT for 1 PLC or er um 558 422 2 diagram GT15 RS4 98 2 Product manufactured by Hitachi Ltd For details of the product contact Hitachi Ltd 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 3 3 2 System Configuration 3 2 2 Connecting to S10mini Communication driver S10mini S10V Connection cable i I 11 Connection cable GOT FORET umber o Series
252. ailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication _ With 4 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal gt m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 19 RS 485 connection diagram 19 5 Temperature Temperature GOT side 4 controller 2 4 zt controller SDA1 TXD1 6 EAD RSB 5 3 r3 n SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 RSA RTS 14 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W RSB RTS 16 4 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 T NC 3 4 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Sianal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 UT52A UM33A UT55A UP55A Pin No Pin No
253. air cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 3 A length between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 1 18 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 3 2 Side Settings ll Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Setting communication interface Property _ Communication settings GOT Net No 1 Set the channel of the connected equipment GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 2 GOT Communication Port No 5017 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Controller Type YokocAWA STARDOM FASO0 FA M3 3 Timeout Time
254. an be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item Bit CH1 HITACHI S10mini S10V MESS Device Information x 000 Kind ann rnm 47516 allelic 2 000 FFF 0 Cancel d Item Information Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Displays the device type and setting range which are Information selected in Device 1 The uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is b15 Device settings of HITACHI PLC 1 When setting a bit device Set the device using the format of address word unit bit number 0 to F Device x 000 SS Bit position 0 to F Device name Address word units 2 When setting a word device For external input XW external output YW internal register RW extended internal register MW AW keep relay KW on delay timer TW on
255. ansmission Speed BPS X Buffer Memory Unit Nc Ea icc Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer SICK Controller Type SICK Flexi Soft I F Interface to be used Driver SICK Flexi Soft 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 5 14 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following gt 1 1 2 I F communication setting 14 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 SICK Flexi Soft Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 115200 Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps 2 transmission speed used for 19200bps Transmission Speed communication with the connected 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 115200bps 115200bps Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to Stimes error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for a Timeout Time
256. ansparent function Except for 5011 No Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 Ethernet setting 1 Ethernet connection type EtherNet IP AB This section describes the Ethernet setting for the communication driver AB Control CompactLogix Controller setting CH1 AB Control Comp Hz None Manufacturer z CH3 None 4D CH4 None Controler Type Control CompactLogx z ch Network Duplex Settir Routing Informatio To Ethernet Setting 5 86 Gateway VF Standard 1 F Ethemet Mutti z Fp Communication EH Gateway Serve Driver EtherNet IP AB Gateway x Gateway Client Mai Standard Ethernet Setting Fiter Setting FTP Server Fi File Transfer F Property Value 4 9 Redundant GOT Net No 1 1 Station No Switch XD Buffer Memory Unit Nc uud i GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5026 Retry Times Startup 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Ethernet Setting cogar Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address Port No Comr 88 1 1 AB EtherNet IP 1111 44818 Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is _ indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the connected Net No Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the connecte
257. anufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation is supported The IP filter setting is supported Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 126G 2015 SH NA 081199ENG G YASKAWA PLC connection of GT21 is supported Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 130L FUJI PLC MICREX SX SPH is supported LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC connection of GT21 is supported Apr 2015 SH NA 081199ENG H ALLEN BRADLEY PLC connection Serial only of GT21 is supported ALLEN BRADLEY PLC connection multi CPU EtherNet IP AB Tag is supported GT27 is added GT2705 VTBD GT21 is added GT2104 RTBD GT2103 PMBDS2 GT2103 PMBLS This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION REVISIONS 1 REVISIONS 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs
258. are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty six 36 months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty two 42 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified If requested by the customer Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer s expence The primary failure diagnosis will however be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 3 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be
259. are used by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT When monitoring a nonexistent or turned off station If a time out occurs with the initial communication by monitoring a nonexistent or turned off station the time out can delay the communication with the normally operating station Timing to start communication After the PLC starts up start the GOT communication When the GOT starts communication before the PLC starts up a communication timeout occurs Operations during communication During normal communication any operation which makes the GOT restart including writing a project and changing utility data may display the system alarm 402 Communication timeout Confirm communication pathway or modules when the GOT restarts 15 16 15 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 15 3 Ethernet Connection 15 4 Device Range that Can The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device rang
260. arity MM Even during communication Odd 2 Default None a 1 Set the number of retries to be z Select Common Controller Setting from the Retry performed when a communication o menu error occurs Default 3times TT Set the time period for a 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Timeout Time o time buit z channel to be used from the list menu Default 3sec Specify the host address station No 3 Set the following items of the PLC to which the GOT is m Manufacturer LS Industrial Systems Host Address E d in the network of the 0 to 31 z Controller Type LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Default 0 5 I F Interface to be used Set this item to adjust the Driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms RET GOT 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Default Oms Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT gt 124 2 Communication detail settings 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be Click the OK button when settings are completed changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project POINT data POINT 20 For details on the Utility refer to the following The settings of connecting equipmen
261. at Default 1 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Format 1 Fomat HA MA RMO SRX B400 series 12 I F and Driver are set seres 2 the settings according to the usage Accessible to CB series RB AG THV SA SB1 environment series gt 9 4 2Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 12 communication setting 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 39 9 4 Side Settings 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 9 40 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 4 GOT Side Settings 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting YOKOGAWA temperature controller For details of RKC temperature controller refer to the following manual gt User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller Mod
262. ata B B BDO to BD4095 5 BD Timer set value 2 3 TSO to TS511 Decimal 0 01s TS Timer current value 123 TRO to TR511 0 01s TR Timer current value 1243 W9 0000 to W9 0487 0 15 W9 Counter set value 123 CSO to CS511 CS Counter current 123 CRO to CR511 value CR 1 Only reading is possible 2 Only 32 bit 2 word designation is allowed 4 28 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 4 5 Precautions Station No settings of the PLC side In the system configuration the PLC with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following gt 4 2 6 Communication detail settings System configuration of the PLC side GOT can communicate in a system configuration where NC1L PS4 FFU120B and FFK120A C10 are mixed When using FFK120A C10 the number of PLCs that can communicate is at most 6 units clock control The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC with the station number set with the host address For details of host address setting refer to the following 57 4 2 6 Communication detail settings o J 2 gt O E z 9 LE o 2 2 O o 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 29 4 5 Precautions 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 5 Precautions CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 Connectable Model 1 5 2 5 2 System
263. ation by setting different File Transfer F Property Value slot Nos X Buffer Memory Unit EL x So Staten net San See the Ethernet setting in the following system perm configuration Example of system configuration Slot 01 o o Ethemet Setting se Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address Port No Communication Connection Slot 1 AB Tag 1 1 1 1 44818 UCMM e J Slot No 0 CPU GOT IP address 1 1 1 1 Qog000000 Net No 1 address 1 1 1 2 Slot No 1 CPU HUB Item Description Range IP address 1 1 1 1 The host is displayed The host is Host Me indicated with an asterisk Example of Ethernet setting Set the network No of the connected Ethernet Setting N W No Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address Communication Connection Slot No Set the station No of the connected 11 1 1 AB Tag 1441 UCMM 0 T SRE 441 UCMM 1 Station 1 Ethernet module 1 to 64 2 omo ae Um Default blank In the above mentioned Ethernet setting the GOT Type AB Tag fixed AB Tag fixed monitors the CPU as follows Set the IP address of the connected IP When Net No 1 and Station No 1 are set for an IP Address Ethernet module object the GOT monitors the CPU whose slot is Default blank 0 44818 fixed 44818 fixed
264. ation protocol Host MODBUS Data bit 8bits fixed Parity None fixed Stop bit 1bit fixed Unit address OtoF Interval time 0 to 250ms Dip switch settings valid invalid vaig 1 Adjust the settings with settings 2 Select the unit address without overlapping with that of other units 2 Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol Dip switch E 3 y 1 Mus TA oW o E gt COM HF OFF ON PORT1 h COM1 COM PORT2 B COM h H COM2 COM PORT4 eS CE Front side Right side Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Communication 9600bps OFF speed 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps ON ON Communication protocol ON MODBUS COM1 Communication 9600bps OFF speed COM2 19200bps ON Communication protocol ON OFF OFF COM2 MODBUS Dip switch settings valid OFF valid invalid 9 44 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 3 Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch Unit address setting switch C
265. ault 10500 Communication Select a communication protocol P UDP TCP format Default UDP 1 Connection with the PLC is unavailable if the IP address is the default value Set the value to the IP address of the PLC to be connected 2 Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers W Communication detail settings 6 3 4 PLC side setting MP2000 B ti i i ilter Setting series MP920 series Reflect IP filter setting in the GOT This setting is shared by GOT standard Ethernet setting and GOT wireless LAN I F setting ess from IP address below Penetrate YASKAWA PLC For details of YASKAWA refer to the following manuals To improve security the GOT 2000 series supports the IP Filter Setting For details on the IP Filter Setting refer to the following manual lt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual Parameter settings Make the parameter settings with a peripheral tool 1 Settings for 2181F 01 Item Set value Range PLC side IP Local IP Address address Not required for Response Time 0 communication with GOT Count of Retry Not required for Number of Retries
266. ault blank SIEMENS S7 Type SIEMENS S7 fixed d fixed Set the IP address of the connected PLC side IP IP Address Ethernet module address Default blank Set the FETCH port No of the FETCH Port No 2 connected Ethernet module 1024 to 65534 Default 2000 For the WRITE port No of the connected Ethernet module the value that the FETCH port No is WRITE Port No 1025 to 65535 incremented by one is set automatically Default 2001 Communication TCP fixed TCP fixed q 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers W Communication detail settings 15 3 Ethernet Connection 15 13 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 2 Ethernet connection type OP communication This section describes the Ethernet setting for the communication driver SIEMENS OP Ethernet File Transfer F 15 0 Redundant Station No Switch AQ Buffer Memory Unit Nc 192 168 3 18 5024 gt Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address Port No Connection 7 2000P 1 1 11 102 Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the Net No connected Ethernet m
267. bit Specify whether or not to perform ip None au parity check and how it is performed Even Parity during communication Odd Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default 3time Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT Default Oms 1 Leave the setting as default If the set value is changed communication with the PLC is disabled 1 Host address When connecting to PLC by RS 232 communication set the Host Address to O 2 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Delay Time 0 to 300ms 4 16 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial connection 427 PLC Side Setting Connecting to NV1L RS2 NC1L RS2
268. bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 Data format setting switch Set the data length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side For the settings on the GOT side refer to the following 57 7 2 5 m Communication detail settings Switch No Description Settings ON 8bits 1 Data bit T OFF 7bits 2 ON done OFF none Parity 3 ON even OFF odd ON 2bits 4 Stop bit iid OFF ibit ON done 5 Check ze OFF none End ch t 6 7 OFF none specification 7 Protect function OFF disabled 8 OFF 3 Station No switch F3LC11 2N only Rotary switch 1 Station No 10 s digit Station No 2 1 s digit 1 4 Terminator switch F3LC11 2N only TERMINATOR 2 4 WIRE OFF Settings 4 WIRE Description Resistor connected 4 wire type 7 2 9 Connecting PC link module F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F Side view indicated by A With right side cover removed 1 Transmission speed switch SW1 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side re
269. cation protocol Default UDP UDP TCP 1 Set the same IP address and communication format as those of the PLC side 2 Set the port No of the host link service used on the PLC side 3 Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers m W Communication detail settings 7 39 8 PLC side setting IP Filter Setting Reflect IP fitter setting in the GOT This setting is shared by GOT standard Ethernet setting and GOT wireless LAN I F setting YOKOGAWA PLC For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals gt YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual Use filter Access from IP address below Penetrate 421 Range Start IP Address End IP Address IP Address to Exclude 1 Model name Refer to 01 5 7 3 4 Ethernet interface module 11 0 12 0 7 3 5 F3SP66 Built in Ethernet interface F3SP67 7 3 6 5 71 4 7 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet To improve security the GOT 2000 series supports the Interface Module F3LE01 5T IP Filter Setting For details on the IP Filter Setting refer to the following FSLE11 0 manual C GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Etherne
270. ce Range That Can Be Set 14 8 14 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 6 Device Range That Can Be Set CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 1 Connectable Model List 15 2 15 2 Serial 15 3 15 3 Ethernet Connection 15 10 15 4 Device Range that Can Set 15 17 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Communication beds Series Clock 1 Connection Connectable model Refer to Type RS 232 27 15 22 SIMATIC 57 200 Ethernet PEDE 371532 RS 232 227 15 2 1 FETCH GT 58 a 1 SIMATIC 37 300 WRITE 15 3 1 Ethernet communication 3 15 3 2 RS 232 5 15 2 1 4 E 1 SIMATIC 87 400 WRITE s 15 3 1 Ethernet Jct ct communication 3 15 3 2 GT SIMATIC S7 1200 Ethernet communication s 15 3 2 1 Not available with the Ethernet connection 15 2 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 1 Connectable Model List 15 2 Serial Connection 15 2 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 300 400 series When connecting to one PLC Communication driver Crm SIEMENS
271. checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT If this check ends successfully it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection Display the communication monitoring function screen by Main Menu Comm Setting Comm Monitor For details on the communication monitoring function refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility Operation of communication monitoring function screen Main Menu Comm Setting Main Menu Comm Setting Touch Comm Setting curity setting 1 PLC TIME OUT 2 BCR NO ERROR Hd 3 TRANS NO ERROR LEDI 0 z E z gt o x 2 a 2 2 5 lt a 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 29 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side For Ethernet connection Confirming the communication state on Windows GT Designer3 1 When using the Command Prompt of Windows9 Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C gt Ping 192 168 3 18 Reply from 192 168 3 18 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 64 b When abnormal communication C gt Ping 192 168 3 18 Request timed out 2 When using the PING Test of GT Designer3 Select Communication Communication configuration Ethernet and Connection Test to display PING Test GO
272. cimal External output WY WY0000 to WY05A7 Remote external input WX WX1000 to WX4997 Decimal 8 Remote external output WY WY1000 to WY4997 gt First CPU link WL WLO00 to WL3FF 2nd CPU link WL1 WL1000 to WL13FF Hexadecimal Data area WM WMO000 to WM3FF Timer Counter Elapsed value TC TCO to TC511 Decimal Word internal output WR WRO000 to WR3FF Hexadecimal 1 Overlapped numbers cannot be used 2 Donotset device outside the range If the set device is outside the range the object set by the device within the range may not be displayed 2 14 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC a I 3 4 Connectable 18 3 0 3 2 System 3 3 3 3 Connection Diagram 3 5 5 34 Side 3 6 E 3 5 PLC Side Setting 3 7 2 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 3 8 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Nro Connectable model Refer to LQP510 RS 232 Jct LQP520 9 RS 422 5 321 LQP800 LQPO000 26 5 232 GT GT GT S10mini LQP010 RSi 727322 LQP011 LQP120 3 2 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 1 Connect
273. communicate with the GOT Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT the screen of the GOT might flicker MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto from the GOT GT27 GT25 Only MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 GT27 GT25 GT23 Specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48 GT21 Specified torque range 0 20 to 0 25 Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT When mounting a unit on the GOT tighten the mounting screws in the following specified torque range GT27 GT25 When loading the communication u
274. communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the GOT Default 5ms 0 to 300 ms 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 14 4 14 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 4 GOT Side Settings 14 5 PLC Side Setting SICK PLC For details of SICK PLCs refer to the following manual gt Users Manual of the SICK PLC 14 5 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft Communication settings Communication settings are not required since the following contents are fixed Setting item Controller Side Settings Communication speed 115200bps fixed Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Without fixed Stop bit 1bit fixed l O 2 2 O o gt H lt N x o O 2 um o 2 2 O o 14 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 5 14 5 PLC Side Setting 14 6 Device Range That Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows N
275. compatible with SNP X protocol can be connected For the RS 232 connection Communication driver UT GE SNP X Connection cable Mop PLC Connection cable GOT Communication Cable model Number of connectable Model name ES Connection diagram Max distance Option device Model equipment um number 1 Built into GOT 93 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD412 RS 232 e RS 232 connection 15m 9 IC200UDRO01 diagram 2 IC200UDRO02 ul IC200UDRO003 A o E IC200UALO04 z IC200UAL005 IC200UALO06 Built into GOT 1 PLC for 1 IC200UAA007 2000 28 2 IC200UDD110 z IC200UDD120 O IC200UDD212 RS 232 e RS 232 connection 15m 1200408005 diagram 2 ps IC200UDRO06 RE IC200UDRO10 DE IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDRO64 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 7 11 2 System Configuration For the RS 422 connection E ERRER FERREE 22181818188 1188818181 EJCTSISISISISTS FERREE STSISTSIS S 15181818181 18218151918
276. d Setting item r lt Bit gt 1 RKC SR Mini HG Device Ec RN Information 000 bo E Kind BOONE ORD 45 6 8 Dee oJ Back Network Station 1 2 Item Description Device Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No Network 1 to 99 To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No Station No 100 to 115 specify the station No of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of GOT data register 1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register Station No GOT data register GD Setting range 100 GD10 101 GD11 1 to 99 If setting a value outside the range above a device 114 GD24 range error occurs 115 GD25 Device settings of RKC temperature controller Network 20 Set by a value of unit address 1 For unit address 0 Set 1 For unit address F Set 16 9 52 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 9 6 1 RKC SR Mini HG Device No Device name Setting range
277. d Station Ethernet module 1 to 64 Default blank AB EtherNet Type AB EtherNet IP fixed IP fixed Set the IP address of the connected IP address Ethernet module Bpod Default blank address Port No 44818 fixed 44818 fixed Communication Top fixed TCP fixed format Set the slot No of the PLC to which Slot No the Ethernet module is connected 0 to 16 Default blank 1 Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers W Communication detail settings 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 17 10 3 Ethernet Connection CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 2 Ethernet connection type EtherNet IP AB Tag This section describes the Ethernet setting for the communication driver AB Control CompactLogix Tag Ethernet setting for the multiple CPU system E Controller Setting configuration 2 lanfacturer B ones Rid WM When Ethernet connection type is EtherNet IP AB pmo erste ae j Tag even if the device has the same IP address in sene Eten Grey the Ethernet setting the GOT can monitor in the Eres sanies eee sema multiple CPU system configur
278. d 1 F Ethemet Muki Delay Time ms 0 GOT Standard Ethernet Setting Fiter Setting FTP Server Transfer F Property 0 Value cm FEL Net No Item Description Range AD Buffer Memory Unit Nc 1 GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 Set the network No of the GOT GOT Communication Port No 5016 GOT Net No 1 to 239 IRetry Times 3 Default 1 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Tme Sec 3 station No of the GOT Delay Time ms Station 1 to 64 Default 1 Set the GOT IP address subnet Biondi GOT Ethernet mask default gateway peripheral S Setting W communication port No Net no station Unt Type 1P Address Pore communicat transparent port No 1 3 1 YASKAWA 1 1 1 1 10500 UDP 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for th j Sor eae sit 5914 to 65534 Communication Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication 1 Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers eme W Ethernet setting 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manua
279. d RDA 1 RDA 5 n n i SG ri SG SG GND 6 iiec 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name EE CHEN Mee Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 RDB 25 28 RDA 26 24 SG 27 25 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 8 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 6 RS 485 connection diagram 6 1 y 2 GOT side PEREI Eng Dae 5 Temperature SDA1 TXD1 6 l eo SDB SDB1 TXD1 8 1 1 gt SDA SDA2 TXD2 5 RDB SDB2 TXD2 7 E E RDA SG 2 C RP RDA1 RXD1 10 T EE RDB1 RXD1 12 RSA RTS 14 RSB RTS 16 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 11 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name beoe SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 RDB 25 28 RDA 26 24 5 27 25 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperatu
280. diagram 1 RS232C RS485 Interface converter side GOT side ML2 n CD 4 1 CD RD RXD 2 it 2 RD SD TXD s 3 sp j 1 ER DTR 4 4 1 1 1 5 5 7 5 SG 1 1 DR DSR 16 DR 1 1 1 RS RTS 7 7 RS 1 1 CS CTS cs eee eee 9 Ti 9 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications 4 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature controller 8 12 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 3 2 RS 485 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 485 connection diagram 1 RS232C RS485 Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4W Temperature interface converter Temperature controller controller ra 1 SDA 1 RDAC RDA SDB 2 T RDB RDA 3 r2 SDA RDB 4 E E SDB SG 5 T SG GND 6 o WU EN xc 1 Pin No of temperature controller differ
281. dicates a version FR Configurator Inverter setup software FR SWo SETUP WE n indicates a version NC Configurator2 CNC parameter setting support tool FCSB1221 NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool FX Configurator FP Parameter setting monitoring and testing software packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWaD5CFXSSCE n indicates a version FX3U ENET L Configuration tool FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL E RT ToolBox2 Robot program creation software 3D 11C WINE MX Component Versiono SWaD5C ACT E SWoD5C ACT EA MX Component f n indicates a version MX Sheet Versiono SWoD5C SHEET E SWaD5C SHEET EA MX Sheet n indicates a version CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool B6 License key for GT SoftGOT2000 Abbreviations and generic terms License key CPU module logging configuration tool SW1DNN LLUTL E Description GT27 SGTKEY U B7 Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description 1 1 IAI Corporation AZBIL Azbil Corporation OMRON OMRON Corporation KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO EI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD JTEKT JTEKT Corporation SHARP Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation SHINKO Shinko Technos Co Ltd CHINO CHINO CORPORATION TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA MACHINE TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation
282. ding to the connection non connection with Ethernet With Ethernet connection 1 to 128 With other than Ethernet connection 0 to 127 Example With Ethernet connection when PC No 100 CPU connecting to Ch3 is faulty GS327 b3 is set The following table shows the case with Ethernet connection Device Station No Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 GS288 65308 65328 65348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 For details on the GS Device refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Appendix 2 3 GOT special register GS 3 Network No station No notification The network No and station No of the GOT in Ethernet connectio
283. dition setting switch IP address switch Right side view with the cover 1 IP address switch Set the IP address with eight Hex rotary switches on the side of the base unit 07 07 lt gt gt S 07 sf S t gt JO gt JO gt 9 07 07 07 07 gt me gt gt De su beg beg 55612 6661 Hexadecimal CO A8 FA D2 i 1 1 Decimal 192 168 250 210 2 Condition setting switch Set the data format write protection or operation mode with the DIP switch on the side of the base unit Switch us Description Set value No 1 Data code OFF ASCII 2 Write protect OFF not protect 12345678 3 2 5 ON not available OFF always 6 7 8 Operation OFF normal operation mode 7 3 6 Connecting to F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP71 4N built in Ethernet interface Project setting configuration setting Set the setting with software for programming 7 3 7 Precautions Device range When performing monitoring with the GOT connected to a YOKOGAWA PLC and setting devices for objects use devices within the device range of the YOKOGAWA PLC apparatus When a device outside the range is set on an object an Tem Sera Description 2 Beni 22 on the o error is displa in the system alarm 4 0 0 0 0 to Set the IP address of the 9 paye S wy 1 addres
284. duct without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in he E3 terminal area option Detailed code model With CH3 UP55A Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in he E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 5 With 4 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 J 2 E 2 o a 2 3 E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 15 8 3 Connection Diagram 5 RS 485 connection diagram 5 RS23C RS485 Terminating resistor 2200 interface converter Temperature controller Temperature controller f pu S AE A TETTEM 1 1 B 4 i r SDB AC 3 SDA 54 i RDB d RDB La i
285. e Device Wx 4 997 Device number L Module bit No 0 9 DEC Device name Slot No 0 9 DEC Remote slave station 0 9 DEC Remote master station 1 4 DEC 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 13 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 2 6 1 HITACHI HIDIC Series Device name Setting range Device No representation External input X X00000 to X05A95 Hexadecimal Decimal External output Y Y00000 to YO5A95 Remote external input X X10000 to X49995 Decimal Remote external output Y Y10000 to Y49995 1st CPU link L L0000 to L3FFF 2nd CPU link L1 L10000 to L13FFF Hexadecimal Data area M 0000 to M3FFF On delay timer TD TDO to TD255 Single shot timer SS 550 to 55255 Watchdog timer WDT WDTO to WDT255 Monostable timer 5 MSO to MS255 9 Decimal Retentive timer TMR TMRO to TMR255 Up counter CU CUO to CU511 Ring counter RCU RCUO to RCU511 Up Down counter CT CTO to CT511 Bit internal output R RO to R7BF Hexadecimal Rising edge detection DIF 1 DIFO to DIF511 Decimal Falling edge detection DFN DFNO to DFN511 The bit specification of the word device except External input External output Remote external input Remote external Setting range of each word device output 1st CPU link 2nd CPU link Data area External input WX WxX0000 to WX05A7 Hexadecimal De
286. e 1 a 64 15 File type File No Element No Bit No Element delimiter Element No 4 7 T File type J L Bit No File No Bit delimiter Setting by GT Designer3 Device T vile 21 17 NONE 14 File type File No Element No Bit No b When setting an element address as a word device N 7 15 File type Element No File No Element delimiter Setting by GT Designer3 Device 7 15 3 0 File type L File No Lo Element No 4 7 ACC File type File No Word delimiter Element delimiter Setting by GT Designer3 Device 744 zi 7 0 Word File type File No Element No 2 AB Control CompactLogix a When setting a bit address as a bit device INT 3 64 b15 File type Bit No File No Element No Setting by GT Designer3 Device 8 eile Filetype File No Element No Bit No b When setting an element address as a word device INT 3 64 File type Element No File No Setting by GT Designer3 Device T Y 64 1 File type File No Element No 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 2 AB Control CompactLogix Tag Bit CH1 AB Control CompactLogix Tag Device Information GB 0 2 Kind 7 D E F BIT ooo nat lalais A B lt Device 0 65535 um Swit
287. e C3 0 14 CD to C255 255 14 CD Down C5 0 14 CD to C5 255 14 CD counter cy d T C10 0 14 CD to C255 255 14 CD counter C Counter Counter Completion bit C3 0 13 DN to C255 255 13 DN Completion C5 0 13 DN to C5 255 13 DN C 3 bit C Integer N N3 0 0 to N255 255 15 N7 0 to N7 255 Bit B B3 0 to B255 255 Integer N N10 0 to N255 255 Timer Set mE T3 0 1 PRE to T255 255 1 PRE Bit BY B3 0 to B3 255 value T it B B10 0 to B255 255 Timer Current T3 0 2 ACC to T255 255 2 ACC value T 13 Timer Set T4 0 1 PRE to T4 255 1 PRE 5 value T10 0 1 PRE to T255 255 1 PRE Counter Set C3 0 PRE to C255 255 1 PRE value C 73 UO TOM Timer Current T4 0 2 ACC to T4 255 2 ACC S value T 7 T10 0 2 ACC to T255 255 2 ACC Counter 8 TY Current value C3 0 2 ACC to C255 255 2 ACC Decimal P Counter Set C5 0 1 PRE to C5 255 1 PRE cy 9 12 C10 0 1 PRE to C255 255 1 PRE value C PRE Integer Ny N3 0 to N255 255 Counter C5 0 2 ACC to C5 255 2 ACC g Current gt C10 0 2 ACC to C255 255 2 ACC 8 value P 32bit integer L3 0 to L3 255 o N7 0 to N7 255 Ly L255 0 to L255 255 nteger N N10 0 to N255 255 2 8 a 1 Writing to device is not allowed for 32 bit data 1 Writing to device is not allowed for 32 bit data 2 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device 2 Writing to device is not allowed for 16
288. e CH Select this item when setting the channel No 2 to No 4 Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT For the settings refer to the following m L F 2 Setting Controller Type Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected For the settings refer to the following 72 3 Setting I F Select the communication driver to be written to the For the settings refer to the following d 1 Setting Driver Detail Setting Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver C 3 Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT 1 Setting Driver The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings Manufacturer Controller Type and I F When the driver to be set is not displayed confirm if Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct For the settings refer to the following 57 Setting the communication interface section in each chapter 1 4 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 2 Setting Controller Type The types for the selection differ depending on the PLC to be used For the settings refer to the following Type HITACHI HIDIC H Series Model name H 302 H 702 H 1002 H 2002 Type FUJI PXR PXG PXH Model name PXG4 PXG5
289. e GOT SIUE Commun Number of connectable Model Pe ication cable model Max Option device Model equipment name interface Connection diagram number distance module GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 500m Built into GOT 23 general purpose interface GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m modules F70 NC1L RS4 RS 485 GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m or GT 954 RS 485 connection diagram 1 Uu 500 GT15 RS4 9S general purpose interface 1 2 1 modules Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd Including the cable length of the option devices 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 7 4 2 Serial connection gt E z E 2 2 o 4 2 3 Connecting to MICREX F120S 140S 15 S For details on the system configuration on the PLC side refer to the following 5 4 5 Precautions When using general purpose interface modules Communication driver FUJI MICREX F 5 8 Connection cable 0 l PLC Connection cable GOT i Number of eneral purpose Model nen pae Max Option device Model e name 4 Connection diagram number distance L equipment module Type Built into GOT GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m F120S or 1 GOT for 1 general F140S FFU120B RS 232 15 purpose interface 15 0 Gs RS 232 connection diagram module 1 GT15 RS2 9P
290. e GOT Number of Model Communic Cable model Max ODUOR device Model connectable name ation Type Connection diagram number distance equipment FA LTBGT2RACBLO5 0 5m 2 5 485 connection diagram 4 500m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 2 FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m pied Up to 31 PXR4 temperature ates RS 485 Gs RS 485 connection diagram 5 500m GT15 RS4 TE controllers PXR9 for 1 GOT 6 52 RS 485 connection diagram 7 500m Built into GOT 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 5 2 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 9 or PXH9 When connecting to one temperature controller Communication driver ir TIT FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Communic Cable model Max Number of connectable equipment Model name 5 a 2 Option device Model ation Type Connection diagram number distance Built into PXG4 PXG5 RS 232 ZZPPXH1 TK4H4563 1 3m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT PXG9 rmm PXH9 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by FUJI CO LTD For details of the product contact FUJI CO LTD 5 4 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 2 System Configu
291. e built in MP2300S Ethernet and 218IF 02 Item Set value Range PLC side IP IP Address 1124 address Transmission Mask MIMI parameter Gat IP Add PLC side setting setting ateway ress Up to 16 one byt Device name Arbitrary PO characters For a connection Y Engineering Port 256 to 65535 with software Transmission MPE720 parameter R T 0 N Tee detailed setting esponse Time ot require Count of Retry E communication Number of Retries with GOT Range of built in MP2300S Ethernet 1 to 4 Connection Number 1 Range of 218IF 02 1 to 20 Local Port 10500 256 to 65534 IP address 1 Node IP Address 1 1414 of GOT Message 1 Port communication Dade of GOT of connection UDP Connection Type TCP UDP parameter recommended setting Extended MEMOBUS Protocol Tvpe Extended MEMOBUS MEMOBUS MELSEC None MODBUS TCP Code BIN RTU BIN ACII Up to 32 one byte Node Name Arbitrary characters 16 two byte characters 1 Set the same the Node IP Address Remote Station s IP Address and the Node Port Remote Station s Port Number as the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side For the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side refer to the following um 6 3 2 m Ethernet setting 6 24 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection ll Sequence program
292. e items using the engineering software for MASTER K Item Communication protocol Setting details Dedicated protocol Communication format Data bit Tors Stop bit 1or2 Start bit 1 Parity bit Even Odd None Channel selection Stand alone mode Interlocking mode Synchronization Asynchronous 300 600 1200 2400 4800 Transmission 9600 19200 38400 speed 300 600 1200 2400 4800 bps RS 422 485 9600 19200 38400 76800 1 For the setting method of the engineering software refer to the following 737 User s Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC PLC 12 6 Device Range that Can The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item n Y Bit CH1 LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Device Information P Kind BIT Range Device 0000 063F Network Station No 0 4 Item Description Device
293. e model Max Y i Series Connection diagram ication Option device Model equipment distance name Connection diagram number distance number Type Built into GT GOT GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Up to 16 UT2000 a 1200m ML2 RS 232 temperature h diagram G88 RS 232 connection uS controllers diagram 1 PEE for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 4 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 8 6 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable Te ti d Connection cable GOT ee Number of connectable ommun f e ment Series ication Gabe model MEN Option device Model T Connection diagram number distance ype GT09 C30R40304 6T 3m Built into GOT Up to 16 temperature GTO09 C100R40304 6T 10m Built into GOT 23 controllers for 1 GOT GT09 C200R40304 6T 20m GT09 C300R40304 6T 30m 1200m 8 52 5 485 connection diagram 13 GT15 RS4 98 Up to 16 temperature 4 wire type controllers for 1 GOT UT2000 RS 485 33 5 FA LTBGT2RACBLO5 0 5m 55 5 485 connection diagram 11 1200m FA LTBGT2RACBL 10 1m 4 wire t
294. e must be within the maximum distance 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 14 1GOT connector specifications 3 FUJI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI PLC side module For details refer to the user s FUJI PLC manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM For the procedure to set the terminating resistor referFor the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 2 gt 1 4 3Terminating resistors of GOT 2 FUJI PLC side When connecting a FUJI PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected gt 4 2 7 PLC Side Setting 4 14 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial connection 4 26 Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment 2 a Controller Setting Loe CH1 FUJI MICREX F cH2 None Manufacturer Controller Type Fusi wicsece E Routing Informatio 9 5 Gateway fp Communication Eh Gateway Serve BB Gateway Client Ed FTP Server Fie Transfer F Property 5 0 Redundant Transmission Speed BPS AD Station No Switch AD Buffer Memory Unit Nc Stop Parity Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Host Address Delay Time ms
295. e settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device For example the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 5 20 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 7 Precautions CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 1 Connectable Model 15 6 2 6 2 6 3 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 20 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 6 32 2 lt 5 lt gt E z E o 2 2 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Model name Clock Communication Connectable model Refer to GL120 RS 232 GT o HBA GL130 RS 422 27 25 23 Cs GL60S RS 232 m RS 422 622 GL70H MP920 MP930 RS 232 cem x ME HARAS CP 9200 H PROGIC 8 RS 232 GT LONE OU 92005 2200 5 232 Gul Cou w
296. e shot timer UW up down counter CW global link register GW event register EW system register SW transfer register JW and receive register QW set as follows Device xw 000 L to 0 Address word units Device name 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set AW AW000 to AWFFO Keep relay KW KWO000 to KWFFO On delay timer TW TWO00 to TW1FO 3 6 1 HITACHI S10mini S10V Device No Device name Setting range represen tation External input X X000 to XFFF External output Y 000 to YFFF Internal register R R000 to Keep relay K K000 to KFFF Extended internal register M000 to MFFF M Extended internal register A000 to AFFF A 7 Hexadec On delay timer T T000 to T1FF imal One shot timer U 0000 to UOFF Up down counter C to CFF Global link register GL 6 GL000 to GLFFF Event register E E000 to EFFF System register S 1 5000 to SBFF Transfer register J J000 to JFFF Receive register Q Q000 to QFFF The bit specification of the word device except External input External output Internal register Extended int regist MEE bo ie Setting range of each word Keep relay On delay timer device One shot timer Up Down counter Global link register Event register System register Transfer register Receive registe
297. e station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller Specification Compatible station NO device 100 GD10 101 GD11 102 GD12 103 GD13 104 GD14 105 GD15 106 GD16 107 GD17 108 GD18 109 GD19 110 GD20 111 GD21 112 GD22 113 GD23 114 GD24 115 GD25 Setting range 1 to 99 For the setting other than the above error dedicated device is out of range will occur 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 51 uj O 2 E z O o 5 lt E x x O E z E o 2 2 O 9 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitore
298. e terminals 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 Connection Diagram 7 RS 485 connection diagram 7 Temperature Temperature GOTside controller side controller side it rl 1 iy 1 spa 1 feu Lil r 7 E pd pg SDB 6 1 RDA 2 J T NE A RDB 7 7 Nu RSA 3 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W CSA 4 RSB 8 CSB 9 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 500m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 2 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI temperature controller s
299. e the human sensor not to function properly Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight high temperature dust humidity and vibrations When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals use the protective cover for oil Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT with a ground resistance of 100 O or less GT21 does not have the LG terminal When tightening the terminal screws use a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range GT27 GT25 GT23 Specified torque range 0 5 N m to 0 8 For a terminal processing of a wire to the GOT power supply section use the following terminal GT27 GT25 GT23 Use applicable solderless terminals for terminal processing of a wire and tighten them with the specified torque Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction GT21 Connect a stranded wire or a single wire directly or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve Correctly wire the GOT power supply sectio
300. ection type 15 10 15 3 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 300 400 1200 series Ethernet connection type OP 15 11 15 39 52 GOT SIde S6ettngs iui aei e Moe b Pete 15 12 15 3 45 PLO Side Setting xv itt Et qu to Latet 15 15 1 35 15 16 15 4 Device Range that Can 2 010 15 17 15 4 1 SIEMENS 57 300 400 4 4 11 2100001000 15 19 15 4 2 SIEMENS 57 200 1 11 1 trn denen treten 15 19 15 43 SIEMENS 57 2 2 2 021 2 1 011 1 601 dani 15 19 15 44 SIEMENS OP nennen 15 19 REVISIONS WARRANTY List of Manuals for GT Works3 For the manuals related to this product install the manuals with the drawing software If you need a printed manual consult your local Mitsubishi representative or branch office List of Manuals for GT Designer3 GOT2000 1 Screen drawing software manuals Manual name GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Manual numb
301. ector pin arrangement GT27 GT25 GT23 GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M GT2104 RTBD GT2103 PMBDS2 GOT main part connector See from the back of a see from the front GOT main part 1 5 22222222 6 9 zZzzououmzazo OOO000A2UNUU 9 pin D sub male 9 pin terminal block RS 422 485 interface Use the following as the RS 422 485 interface and the RS 422 485 communication unit connector on the GOT For the GOT side of the connection cable use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector 1 Connector model GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT27 9 pin D Sub f GT25 s 17LE 13090 27 D2AC DDK Ltd M2 6 millimeter screw fixed type GT23 GT2103 PMBD 5 pin terminal block MC1 5 5 G 3 5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc GT2104 RTBD GT2103 PMBDS 9 pin terminal block 2 MC1 5 9 G 3 5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc GT2103 PMBLS GT15 RS4 9S pin D Spin D Sub emale 17LE 13090 27 D3AC DDK Ltd GT01 RS4 M M2 6 millimeter screw fixed type GT15 RS4 TE SL SMT3 5 10 90F BOX 1 The terminal block MC1 5 5 ST 3 5 or corresponding product of the cable side is packed together with the GT2103 PMBD 2 terminal block MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 or corresponding product of the cable side is packed together with the GT2104 RTBD GT2103 PMBDS GT2103 PMBLS 1 20 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 2 Connector pin arrangeme
302. ector when using the GT10 C02H 6PT9P revision or B Only 1 PLC can be connected to the GS 13 2 System Configuration 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 13 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side 1 GOT side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 TxD RxD 5 o Oo ON A CO M 2 RS 232 connection diagram 2 MITSUBISHI INDIA GOT side PLC side SD ELM RxD RD k TxD ER SG SG RS cs Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 3 MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 5 13 3 Connection Diagram CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 3 2 RS 422 cable The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1
303. eda 5 14 5 5 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 9 nre 5 14 5 5 3 Connecting to PXHQ se ese nein dd eade dd seda dde edd o dd e nda dde d 5 15 5 5 4 Connecting to interface converter 77 5 15 5 5 5 Connecting to interface converter 5 0 5 16 5 5 6 Connecting to interface converter 5 485 eem 5 17 5 5 7 Connecting to interface converter 35 10 5 17 5 5 8 Station number 2 2 20 0 000 oda sede aedes and 5 18 5 6 Device Range that Can Be 1 2 eren na Enna 5 19 5 6 FE JIPXR EXG PXEIL iicet lateat lido bec dese tein abbia betae co ade 5 20 5 7 iste Toll os 5 20 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 1 Connectable Model 2 20 0001 0 10 than tend naeh dede ed dd ted d nnde 6 2 6 2 Senal Conrnectlor uda i dU DER Beta nr Dach EO EE TOR PR DRE REIR 6 3 6 2 1 System configuration for connecting to GL120 or 1 0 6 3 6 2 2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S GL60H or 22 2 6 4 6 2 3 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 930 9300 5 9200 or PROGIC 8 6 5 6 2 4 System configuration for connecting to 940 6 7 6
304. efault 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity N check and how it is performed during E Parity m Even communication Odd Default No Set whether or not to perform a sum check Sum Check during communication Yes or No Default Yes Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs Retry When receiving no response after retries 0 to 5times the communication times out Default Otime Set the time period for a communication to Timeout Time time out Default 3sec 1 to 30sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT Default Oms 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Delay Time 0 to 300 ms 7 2 6 side setting YOKOGAWA PLC For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals 57 YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual Model name Refer to CPU d dads 9 pin KM10 0C conversion cable 7 2 7 SIO port adapter cable KM10 0S F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N 7 2 8 F3LC11 2N PC link
305. efault Item Setting details Addresses PORT Local PLC side port No IP Address PLC side IP address dec B Properties dec Remote Default p 1 PLC side subnet mask c Write port setting When using the built in Ethernet port Item Setting details It Setting detail Options Mode Select Write passive lt Sa acne Devi Set PN IO Local PLC side IP address UT et PN 10 IP dec IP Address side IP address Remote Default Addresses Properties Subnet PORT Local PLC side port No mask PLC side subnet mask dec Remote Default c S7 1200 d Precautions for setting The Keep Alive function of the Siemens CP Module is not supported Specify 0 for Keep Alive Set the following parameters Setting details IP Address Subnet mask PLC side IP address Ethernet addresses PLC side subnet mask CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 15 15 3 Ethernet Connection 15 3 5 Precautions When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting Station When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each Station to the GOT gt 15 3 3 lEthernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255
306. eference No using a peripheral tool of the PLC Item Set value Range IP Address PLC side IP address Subnet Mask 1414 0 Default Gateway IP 21 PLC side setting Self port reference 01065280 1 Adjust the settings with settings c 4 3 2 m Ethernet setting 2 Make sure that Self port reference No 251 is equivalent to the port No in the GOT gt 4 3 2 m Ethernet setting 4 4 Device Range that Can The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item 1 For FUJI MICREX F lt gt FUJI MICREX F Device Information B 0000 Kind BIT Range Device 0000 511F Network Station No 0 2 k A Item Information Set the device name device number and bit number The bi 2 Device e bit can be set only when specifying the bit of word device The uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is 615 Informat
307. el name Refer to H PCP J 9 5 1 H PCP A H PCP B 9 5 2 Z TIO module Z DIO module 9 5 3 Z CT module Z COM module 9 5 4 CB Series 9 5 5 FB Series 9 5 6 RB Series 9 5 7 Temperature controller PF900 901 958 HA400 401 HA900 901 9 5 9 AG500 9 5 10 RMC500 9 5 11 MA900 MA901 9 5 12 THV A1 9 5 13 SA100 SA200 9 5 14 X TIO module 9 5 15 9 5 1 Connecting to H PCP J Communication settings Make the communication settings of the temperature controller Item Setting range Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication mode MODBUS Data bit 8bits Parity bit None Stop bit 1bit Unit address Oto F 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Selectthe unit address without overlapping with that of other units 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed communication mode data length parity bit and stop bit COM PORT1 COM PORT2 COM PORT1 COM PORT2 setting switch SW2 TEE Co 919S8vt c COM PORT3 setting switch SW3 a o ET Right side 1 Transmission speed settings COM PORT1 COM PORT2 Sw2 Communication speed 3 4 OFF OFF 9600bps ON OFF 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps b COM PORT3 SW3 Communication speed 3 4 OFF OF
308. elect Rotary switch 1 Settings of the transmission speed and the parity Make those settings by operating the communication setting Rotary switch 8 5 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data bit 7bits 8bits Parity bit Even odd none Stop bit ibit 2bits Address 1 to 99 Minimum response time 0 to 10 x 10ms Protocol 0 PC link communication without sum check rotocol selection Transmission e 1 PC link communication with sum check Switch position Parity bit Speed FN Adjust the settings with GOT settings 0 None 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units 1 9600bps Odd 2 Even 8 30 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 5 5 Connecting to RS232C RS485 converter ML2 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting switches Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Setting 2 wire 4 wire 2 2 wire type or 4 wire type Terminating resistor With Without Echo back OFF RS 485 driver active control AUTO 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Refer to the following connection diagram for setting
309. ength and parity bit 1 Data bit configuration OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Setting range 0 to F 9 42 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 5 3 Connecting to Z TIO Z DIO Z CT Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch 1 Communication settings Make the communication settings of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Unit address setting switch Communication protocol MODBUS Data bit 8bits Parity None Data bit 8bits Parity Even Data bit 8bits Parity Odd Stop bit 1bit fixed Data bit configuration Unit address OtoF Setting range 0 to F Interval time 0 to 250ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the module address without overlapping with that of other units 2 Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol l 4 E 2 O o Z 2 a gt E o Y 2 E Z E Z Z O LLU LULL Dip switch m amp 1 O
310. er Model code GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 SH 080862ENG 1D7MB2 GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 2 Connection manuals SH 081228ENG Manual name GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products For GT Works3 Version1 Manual number Model code SH 081197ENG 1D7MJ8 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 For GT Works3 Version1 SH 081198ENG GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 For GT Works3 Version1 SH 081199ENG GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputers MODBUS Fieldbus Products Peripherals For GT Works3 Version1 3 GT SoftGOT2000 manuals Manual name GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual 4 GOT2000 manuals Manual name SH 081200ENG Manual number Model code SH 081201ENG Manual number Model code GOT2000 Series User s Manual Hardware SH 081194ENG 1D7MJ5 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility SH 081195ENG 1D7MJ6 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Monitor SH 081196ENG 1D7MJ7 Abbreviations Generic Terms the meaning of the icon The following shows the abbreviations and generic terms used in Help Meaning of icon Abbreviations and generic terms Description 5 Not MS support GT27
311. erver SQL Server Visual C Visual C Visual Basic Excel and Access are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Unicode is a trademark or registered trademark of Unicode Inc in the United States and other countries PictBridge is a registered trademark of Canon Inc Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates in the United States and other countries QR Code is a trademark or registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan the United States and or other countries Other company and product names herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners SH NA 081199ENG H GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 MODEL GOT2000 CON3 SW1 E MODEL CODE When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission SH NA 081199ENG H 1504 MEE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI
312. es in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item 57 300 400 series and S7 Ethernet gt Bit CH1 SIEMENS 57 300 400 Device Information Kind D EJF BIT Range 4 5 6 Device 0000 5117 Network Host Other Station No 1 Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Displays the device type and setting range which are Information selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Select this item to monitor the controller specified Host Lid as the host station in the GOT utility setup Select this item to monitor a controller other than the one specified as the host station Network SIEMENS S7 300 400 Set the MPI address of the controller monitored SIEMENS S7 Ethernet Set the network number and the station Other number of the controller monitored Device settings of SIEMENS PLC S7 300 400 series S7 Ethernet 1 When setting
313. et the communication speed and the data bit configuration using the DIP switch SW3 Dip switch SW3 z 9829S8vt cl OFF ON Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4800bps Communication 9600bps OFF speed 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps ON ON Data bit 8 bits Parity None Stop 2 bits Data bit 8 bits Parity ON None Stop 1 bit Data bit 8 bits Parity Even Stop 1 bit Data bit 8 bits Parity ON ON Odd Stop 1 bit oFF orF OFF Data bit configuration OFF ON 3 DIP switch settings SW4 Set the communication specifications and the termination resistor using the DIP switch SWA Dip switch SW4 ON oN 109 1 OFF Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 Communication RS 422A OFF OFF specification setting RS485 ON ON Enable ON Termination resistor setting Disable 2 OFF 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 5 18 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Statio No 3 No 10 Station No 6 Station No 15 n Station No 1
314. ether or not to perform a Parity parity check and itis performed Even fixed during communication Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default Otime Specify the time period from the GOT startup until starts the Startup Time 2 with the PLC CPU rd Default 3sec Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the host address station No of the PLC to which the GOT is Host Address connected in the network of the 1 to 31 GOT Default 1 Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication 5 from the Otos 10ms GOT Default 32 bit Storage Select the steps to store two words 32 bit data Default Auto LH Order HL Order Auto Model name Delay Time CP 9200 H 30ms or more port 0 10ms or more CP 9300MS port 1 30ms or more 2 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connectio
315. eway p Communication Gateway Serve BE Gateway Client Ed GOT Standard Ethemet Setting FTP Server File Transfer F Sa Q Redundant AD Station No Switch AD Buffer Memory Unit Nc Property Value GOT Net No 1 GOT Station 1 GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192168318 Communication Port No 5026 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms Ethernet Setting Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address Port No AB EtherNet IP 1111 44818 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer AB Controller Type Depends on Ethernet connection type EtherNet IP AB AB Control CompactLogix EtherNet IP AB Tag AB Control CompactLogix Tag I F Interface to be used Driver Depends on Ethernet connection type EtherNet IP AB EtherNet IP AB Gateway EtherNet IP AB Tag EtherNet IP AB Tag Gateway 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment m Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the
316. exLogix Ethernet connection type EtherNet IP AB Tag Communication driver Com EtherNet IP AB Tag Gateway Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT EtherNet IP Communi Maximum Number g connectable Series ee 4 cation Cable model segment Option device Model equipment communication module 3 length J When PLC GOT is N 1 16 PLCs or less for T e Ssl 1756 ENET 10Mbps 4 27 25 077 a ControlLogix 10Mbps 100m 1756 ENBT 10 100Mbps 4 When PLC GOT is 1 N 4 TCP 32 GOTs or less recommended to 16 gt 10BASE T Shielded less for 1 PLC twisted pair cable STP or When PLC GOT is N 1 unshielded twisted pair 16 PLCs or less for cable UTP of category 5 1GOT or higher TE GT LE C tL Eth t 100 Built into GOT Sp emer 400BASE TX Shielded Built into GOT 23 When PLC GOT is 4 N z twisted pair cable STP or TCP 20 GOTs or less unshielded twisted pair recommended to 16 or E cable UTP of category 3 less for 1 PLC ul or higher When PLC GOT is N 1 z 16 PLCs or less for 5 1GOT o FlexLogix 1788 ENBT A Ethernet 100m Built into GOT 20 or less recommended to 16 or less for 1 PLC 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc
317. fer to the following gt 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Setting Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 545 pe 7 19200bps ES o 9 38400bps A 57600bps 115200bps 1 Only transmission speeds available on side shown 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 11 7 2 Serial Connection o 1 lt lt x gt E 2 E o 2 2 o 2 Data format switch SW2 Set the character length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side For the settings on the GOT side refer to the following 7 2 5 Communication detail settings 7 2 10 Connecting PC link module 01 0 02 0 3 Module function switch SW3 Switch No Description Settings ON 8bits 1 Ch ter length aracter enga OFF 7bits 2 ON done OFF none Parity 3 ON even OFF odd ON 2bits 4 Stop bit SPI OFF 154 ON done 5 Check Possum OFF none End ch t 6 d 2 id OFF none specification 7 Protect function OFF disabled 8 Security function OFF disabled Switch No Description Settings User setting 106 OFF inhibited 7 Modem OFF not compatibility compatible 8 External modem OFF none 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection Switch setting on the PC link module Set the
318. fy whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default Odd None Even Odd Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs Default Otime 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out Default 3sec 1 to 30sec Host Address Specify the host address station No of the GOT to which the temperature controller is connected in the connected network Default 1 1 to 255 Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT Default 5ms 0 to 300ms Format 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Select the communication format Default 1 Format 1 Accessible to PXR PXG PXH Format 2 Accessible to PXR PXG Not accessible to PXH 1 2 1 2 3 4 Host address Do not specify a number between 200 and 215 Format When connecting to PXH specify the format 1 When connecting to only PXR PXG specifying the format 2 is recommended Delay Time Set the delay time to 5ms or more Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utilit
319. gineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works n indicates a version 3 Other software Abbreviations and generic terms GX Works3 Description SWaDND GXW3 E EA type programmable controller engineering software n indicates a version GX Works2 SW aDNC GXWO2 a type programmable controller engineering software n indicates a version GX Simulator3 Simulation function of GX Works3 GX Simulator2 Simulation function of GX Works2 Controller simulator GX Simulator SWaD5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software package SW5D5C LLT V or later versions n indicates a version GX Developer SWaD5C GPPW E EV SWoD5F GPPW V type software package n indicates a version GX LogViewer SWoDNN VIEWER E type software package indicates a version PX Developer SWaD5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control indicates a version MT Works2 Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SWaDND MTW2 E n indicates a version MT Developer SWU RNC GSV type integrated start up support software for motion controller Q series n indicates a version C Controller module configuration and monitor tool SW1DND RCCPU E CW Confi t aud n indicates a version MR Configurator2 type servo configuration software n indicates a version MR Configurator MO HDi d type servo configuration software n in
320. gram 4 GOT side Temperature Temperature controller side F 7 controller side QU 1 1 1 RR SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 NC SG SDA2 TXD2 NC SDB2 TXD2 NC RDA2 RXD2 RDA1 RXD1 10 RDB2 RXD2 RDB1 RXD1 12 oF N A NC 13 RSA RTS 14 NC 15 RSB RTS 16 NC 17 CSA CTS 18 NC 19 CSB CTS 20 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 i 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal param Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 uj zi J O E z O 5 2 E gt 5 O E z E 2 2 O o 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 9 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 10 5 side RS 485 connection diagram 5 processes PF SDA1 Temperature controller side 4 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG FG 1 o o ON ES
321. has dimmed because of the screen save function and touches the display section to cancel the screen save a touch switch may be activated The GOT backlight failure can be checked with a system signal of the GOT DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING The display section of the GOT is an analog resistive type touch panel When multiple points of the display section are touched simultaneously an accident may occur due to incorrect output or malfunction GT27 Do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction GT25 GT23 GT21 Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the display section Doing so may operate the switch located around the center of the touched point or may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction When programs or parameters of the controller such as a PLC that is monitored by the GOT are changed be sure to reset the GOT or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction If a communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection GT27 GT25 Only The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative
322. he CH No according to the intended purpose The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel CH No setting 5 to 8 Used for barcode function RFID function remote personal computer operation serial A Used for the video RGB display function multimedia function external 1 function operation panel function RGB output function report function hard copy function with a printer sound output function gateway function MES interface function and wireless LAN connection 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Channel No drivers RS232 Setting 1 Channel No 2 to No 4 Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the Multi channel function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following Mitsubishi Products 20 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 2 Drivers The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings Manufacturer Controller Type and I F When the driver to be set is not displayed confirm if Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct gt Setting the communication interface section in each chapter 1 1 3 Precautions Precautions for changing model 1 When devices that cannot be converted are included When setting of Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed GT Designer
323. he RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller side 9 30 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 3 2 RS 422 cable Differences in polarity between GOT and RKC temperature controllers The polarity of poles A and B in signal names is reversed between GOT and RKC temperature controllers Connect a cable according to the following connection diagrams Connection diagram 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular connector RDA 2 m 4 T B RDB 7 k s T A SDA 1 gt 2 R B SDB 6 1 R A iem ERE le CSA 4 CSB o 1 SG 5 r FG 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the main unit to Disable Connecting terminating resistors 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual C 3 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 2 RS 422 connection diagram 2 RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side Modular connector Modular connector R A 1 QNT R A RB 2 f H 2 R B SG 3 r 3 SG B 4 1 4 T TA 5 5 TA SG N C 6 TN 3 6 SG NC 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following man
324. he terminating resistor refer to the following 27 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT b YASKAWA PLC side When connecting a YASKAWA PLC to a GOT connect a terminating resistor to the YASKAWA PLC if required gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual 6 14 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 8 Side Settings Setting communication interface The settings of connecting equipment can be Communication settings confirmed in I F Communication Setting Set the channel of the connected equipment For details refer to the following 2 7 1 1 2 communication setting 2 Controller Setting controler setting CHI YASKAWA GL PR 2 cH3 None CH4 None Communication detail settings lanufacturer YASKAWA powers 19877 GLPROGIES 3 Make the settings according to the usage environment sim a 4 For GT27 GT25 GT23 Bc YASKAWA GL Bc NEN Property Value Ra Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS 4 Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Ra Tres Data Bit 8 bit Startup Time Sec 3 Stop Bit 1 bit Delay Time ms Pa rity Even Retry Times 0 Startup Time Sec 3 _ Timeout Time Sec 3 ok Host Address 1 Delay Time ms 0 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Item
325. hen using Disables the write command to 0 Not protected 1 Protected this module with the host link service via Ethernet Write protection 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 7 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 For the port No of the GOT set the port No of the host link service to be used C 7 3 2 m Ethernet setting multiple GOTs 3 Set this as necessary A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT o 1 lt lt x gt E 2 E 2 2 o 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 21 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 4 Device Range that Can The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range
326. hernet Connection ll Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value GOT Net No 1 GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5023 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Item Description Range GOT Net No DET GOT Station 110254 Set the IP address subnet GOT Ethernet mask default gateway peripheral S gt Setting W communication port No transparent port No Ethernet setting GOT Communication Port No Set the GOT port No for the connection with the Ethernet module Default Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Gateway 5023 Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway 5024 1024 to 5010 5023 to 65534 Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the Startup Ti 3 to 255 E communication with the PLC CPU T ds Default 3sec Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 90 sec Default 3sec Set the delay time for reducing the 0 to 10000 Delay Time load of the network destination PLC 10ms Default Oms 1 Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers W Ethernet setting 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The
327. hernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of the product contact Siemens AG 4 Ifthe number of increases the communication becomes highloaded and it may affect the communication performance CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 11 15 3 Ethernet Connection 15 3 3 Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment k Routing Informatio Ek Gateway p Communication 153 Gateway Serve Driver 88 Gateway Client Ed Mail FTP Server Fig Fie Transfer F 18 Q Redundant D Station No Switch XD Buffer Memory Unit Nc Manufacturer SIEMENS Controller Type SIEMENS S7 Ethernet To Ethernet Set
328. i E RIPE Ini A 1 INTRODUCTION icc tetuer een A 10 CONTENTS tiet terere teen evan ete oig eee t ot dat ee Nes dimiserat A 10 List of Manuals for GT Works A 18 Abbreviations Generic Terms the meaning of the A 19 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication errem 1 3 1 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel 1 3 1 1 2 UF communication 1 9 1 1 3 Ioue p 1 11 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the 1 12 1 2 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the 1 12 1 2 2 Checking the project data and OS writing ON 1 13 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 14 1 31 Communication 1 14 1 3 2 Option unit e ella tede iiti piso 1 15 1 3 39 Conversion cable ee ate e ue De UR E ape Hed df 1 15 1 3 4 Serial multi drop connection nmn 1 15 1 3 5 Field network adapter unit 0000 1 15 1 3 6 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position 1 16 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 20 1
329. iagram etie IHRER 11 9 17 37 RS 232 cable ient eed e ae tin led tania a 11 9 11 39 27 RS 422 Cablesssc tht cs iet enit enero delen ibaa eMe d 11 10 11 4 Side Settlrigs adit endete m t nlt be ed 11 12 11 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 11 12 11 4 2 Communication detail settings eene nene 11 12 11 5 Bes Suo 11 13 11 5 1 Connecting to Series 90 30 40000 11 13 11 5 2 Connecting to VersaMaxMincro TE LOEN AE 11 13 11 5 3 Connecting to 693 311 11 14 11 54 Connecting to 6 7 11 11 14 11 5 5 Station number de ee dede ete 11 14 11 6 Device Range that Can Be 11 0220011 1 6 6 0060 nean nnne nnn 11 15 17 62 GE Serl8s 90 icc i o Ug de i eet etie dda dee bedi e uta pares 11 15 11 7 PRECAUTIONS 11 15 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 121 Connectable Model 22 040 2 00 a aaa dedi 12 2 12 2 System Configuration bct ec ge 12 3 12 2 1 Connecting to 805 or 1205 7 12
330. ible to GREEN UT2000 37 1 1 2 communication setting UTAdvanced Series Not accessible to o UT100 Series 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 27 8 4 GOT Side Settings 1 Format When connecting to UT100 Series specify the format 1 When connecting to only GREEN UT2000 UTAdvanced Series specifying the format 2 is recommended 2 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 8 28 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 4 GOT Side Settings 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting POINT 8 5 1 Connecting to GREEN Series 1 YOKOGAWA temperature controller Communication settings For details of YOKOGAWA temperature controller Make the communication settings by operating the key refer to the following manual of the temperature controller gt Users Manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature 1 For the UTEUPLUMEJUS1000 except UT750 2 RS232C RS485 converter UP750 For details on communication settings of the m SEVERE
331. ication Default 5015 Port No 5012 5013 and Communication 49153 format TCP fixed TCP fixed 1024 to 5010 1 Connection with the PLC is unavailable if the IP address is Transparent Port Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 the default value Set the value to the IP address of the PLC transparent function Except for 5011 to be connected No Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 2 Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 7 W Communication detail settings 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 25 4 3 Ethernet Connection IP Filter Setting V Reflect IP fiter setting in the GOT This setting is shared by GOT standard Ethernet setting and GOT wireless LAN I F setting Use IP filter Access from IP address below P Range Start IP Address End IP Address improve security the 2000 series supports the IP Filter Setting For details on the IP Filter Setting refer to the following manual lt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 4 26 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 Ethernet Connection 4 3 3 PLC side setting MICREX SX SPH m FUJI PLC For details of FUJI PLCs refer to the following manuals FUJI PLC user s Manual Setting the IP address and self port reference No Set the IP address and self port r
332. ide For details refer to the user s manual of the FUJI temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of 4 uj zi J O E z O 5 2 E gt 5 O E z E 2 2 O o 2 FUJI temperature controller side When connecting a FUJI temperature controller to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 97 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 11 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 4 Side Settings 5 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Manufacturer rua FUJI PXR PXG PXH 3 Standard V F RS422 485 FUJI PXR PXG PXH Controller Type Routing Informatio 5 88 Gateway Communication Eh Gateway Serve BE Gateway Client Mail FTP Server Transfer F Q Redundant ND Station No Switch AD Buffer Memory Unit Nc Lo 3 Transmission Speed BPS Data Bit Stop Bit 4 Party Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Host Address Delay Time ms Format ox 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu
333. ime adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled 4 gt lt x gt E z E 2 2 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 15 7 2 Serial Connection 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 3 14 System configuration for connecting to FA M3 M3V d Communication driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway Connection cable Connection cable GOT Ethernet Maximum Number of connectable Model interface Cable model segment Option device Model equipment name 1 Connection diagram number 3 module length F3SP05 F3SP08 F3FP36 rore When PLC GOT is N 1 F3SP25 F3LE01 5T The following shows the F3LE11 0T 10BASE T number of PLCs for 1 GOT p3sp3g FStE12 0T ghielded twisted pair cable STP or 1 id 55 F3SP53 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP 2577 F3SP58 Category 3 4 and 5 100m Built into GOT 23 When PLC GOT is 1 F3SP59 100BASE TX The following shows the F3SP76 7S Shielded twisted pair cable STP number of GOTs for 1 PLC F3SP71 4S F3LE11 0T category 5 and 36 TCP 8 or less F3SP66 UDP 128 or less F3SP67 recommended to 16 or less F3SP71 4N F3SP76 7S F3SP71 4S 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 destination connected with the twisted p
334. inating resistor ON OFF switch EI ON d Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method Make the settings using the character configuration switches 8 L7 6 5 L4 3 2 LT 1 ON Switch No Setting item Set value 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission 9600bps ON OFF speed 19200bps OFF ON ON 1bit ON Stop bit 2bits OFF 7bits ON Data bit 8bits OFF Even ON Odd OFF Parity bit Done ON None OFF Initializing method By switch ON 4 20 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial connection Connecting to FFK120A C10 1 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting Switches Item Set value Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 232C 1 1 Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 485 1 N Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits or 7bits Even or Odd Parity bit Done None Stop bit 1bit 2bits Initializing method By switch Station 72 01099 Terminating resistor ON or OFF T link channel switch FUJI PLC user s Manual T link terminating resistor 4 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2
335. ion Displays device type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Network Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of No the specified station No Be Set 2 FUJI MICREX SX SPH cee Chi iaa Information Kind Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device The uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is b15 Device Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Information Set the monitor target of the set device CPU No Set the CPU No of the controller Host Select this item for monitoring the host PLC Network Select this for monitoring other PLCs After selecting set the station number of the Other PLC to be monitored NW No Set the network No Station No Set the station No Device settings of FUJI FA PLC 1 When setting a bit device Set the device using the format of word number DEC bit No 0 to F HEX Device B 0000 Bit No HEX Device name Word No DEC 2 When setting a word device For direct access W24 and user file W30 to W109 W9 set as follows Device v 30 0000 Word number Device name File number 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 27 4 4 Device Range that Can Be Set
336. ion of CP 6 4 2 YASKAWA CP9200SH MP900 9200 copy them to MWO to 7694 During operation of CP 9200H specify the reference No and quantities so that they do not cover both OB and z IB 5 Device No Device name Setting range lt 6 4 4 YASKAWA CP9300MS MC c ecimal 1 Coil M8009090 Hexadecimal compatible 8 2 Input relay IB MB000000 to MB32767F Hexadecimal g 5 Specified bit of the following 5 T Device No Word device bit word devices Device name Setting range LLI input register holding register representation 2 2 Input register Coil OB OBO to OB1023 0000 to IW7FFF Hexad exadecima Decimal 3 E Input relay IB IBO to 1023 2 Holding register MWO to MW32767 Decimal 5 MW The bit e m Setting range of each word o _ _ specification of Coil MB MBO to MB32767 Decimal device the word device Input relay IB 1B000 to IBFFF Hexadecimal Input register 1 10 to 163 1 MB40960 to MB32767F i ilable for MP 940 only oy Data register M MO to M2047 9 Decimal Output register 604063 0 Th d i ps Setting range of each bit specification of devices the bit device 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 33 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 6 4 5 YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Series Device name Setting range Device No representation
337. ion settings 1 SIEMENS 57 300 400 Set the channel of the connected equipment Property Value 2 Transmission Speed BPS 38400 Data Bit 8 bit ac sra Stop Bit 1 bit Controler Setting Manufacturer SIEMENS Paty Controller Type SIEMENS 57 300 400 Adapter Address 1 Network Duplex Seti amp Routing Informatio t 8 58 e mmi Standard 1 F RS422 485 x Host Address 2 EL Gateway Serve SIEMENS 57 300 400 bd BE Gateway Client EJ Joc M AC CMM Speed oS 1 Item Description Range E Set this item when change the Parity 4 Transmission transmission speed used for 9600bps Speed communication with the connected 19200bps pee equipment 38400bps Default 38400bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with Data Bit 8bit fixed the connected equipment Default 8bit ok Cancel Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed Parity MG Odd fixed 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the during communication Default Odd menu Specify the adapter address station 2 The Controller Setting wind
338. ion uni a O z O o X a O a be lt X 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 19 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary For cables needed for each connection refer to each chapter for connection 1 4 1 connector specifications The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user RS 232 interface Use the following as the RS 232 interface and the RS 232 communication unit connector on the GOT For the GOT side of the connection cable use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector 1 Connector specifications Hardware GOT MS Connector type Connector model Manufacturer version 1 GT27 9 pin D sub male GT25 p 17LE 23090 27 D4C 1 DDK Ltd inch screw fixed type GT23 GT15 RS2 9P 9 pin D sub 17LE 23090 27 D3CC DDK Ltd GT01 RS4 M inch screw fixed type GT2104 RTBD _ 9 pin terminal block MC1 5 9 G 3 5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc GT2103 PMBDS2 1 The terminal block MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 or corresponding product of the cable side is packed together with the GT2104 RTBD GT2103 PMBDS2 2 Conn
339. ions of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or ignite resulting in injury and fire Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit direc
340. is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored 1 When using YOKOGAWA PLC FA M3 When YOKOGAWA PLC is used the device range that can be used differs depending on the PLC model selected by the GT Designers Since YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 has larger device points that can be set than YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 select YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 if a large device points should be set 2 Devices to be set for an object When a device outside the range is set for an object an indefinite value is displayed on the object No error is displayed in the system alarm A device to be set for an object must be in the device range of YOKOGAWA PLC For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manual gt YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual 7 22 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Be Set Setting item Network CPU No 0 Host Other Network No 1 Station No 1 Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of Device word device File No Set the file No Information Displays thg device type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the station number of the controller to be monitored CPU Set the CPU No of the controller No 27 1 Setting of the CPU No Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller
341. items P communication with the PLC CPU Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Default 3sec LE Controller Type STARDOM FA500 FA M3 Set the time period for a 2 I F Interface to be used Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 90sec 2 Driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway Default deep Set the delay time for reducing the W MM 0 to 10000 z 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer me de z Controller Type I F and Driver are set 9 i i 1 Each of GOT Station set the communication detail setting Make the settings according to the usage and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to environment different station numbers gt 7 3 2 Communication detail settings 227 m Ethernet setting Click the OK button when settings are completed 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility POINT The communication interface setting can be AS 1 changed on the Utility s Communication setting The settings of connecting equipment can be after writing Communication Settings of project confirmed Communication Setting data in For details refer to the following For on the Utility refer to the following manual gt 1 12 communication settin i gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 7 CO
342. l 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 21 6 3 3 Ethernet setting gt Ethernet Setting Subnet Mask GOT IP Address Default Gateway Peripheral S W Communication Port Transparent Port No This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings 192 168 255 255 0 0 5015 5014 Ethernet setting Item Description Range GOT Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to IP Address Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via Subnet router 0 0 0 0 to Mask If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the emere Gateway y 255 255 255 255 router Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Peripheral S W 5014 to 65534 Set the GOT port No for the S W Communication communication Default 5015 Except for 5011 Port No 5012 5013 49153 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 Transparent Port transparent function Except for 5011 No Default 5014 501
343. l The PLC clock data cannot be written to or read from the GOT The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC 11 6 1 GE Series 90 Device No Device name Setting range represen tation input 1 100001 to 112288 output Q Q00001 to Q12288 internal M M00001 to M12288 temporary T T001 to T256 8 System status S S001 to 5128 gt 5 system status SA SA001 to SA128 Decimal 2 System status SB SB001 to SB128 System status SC 5 001 to SC128 global data G G0001 to 67680 The bit specification of the Setting range of each word word device device o System register R R00001 to R32640 gt analog input register Al 10001 to AI32640 Decimal analog output register AQ AQ0001 to AQ32640 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 15 11 6 Device Range that Can Be Set J 2 o O E z 9 E 2 2 O 11 16 11 11 7 Precautions 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 Connectable Model 12 2 12 2 System 12 3 12 3 Connection Diagram 12 9 12 4 GOT Side 12 11 12 5 PLC Side 5 12 12 12 6 Device Range that Be Set
344. l When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No pis Z TIO CB100 CB400 568700 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 5500 2 500 900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication2 RB500 RB900 SG 5 13 13 16 25 25 13 25 T R A 3 14 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 B400 name PF901 HA900 901 MAJJA RMC500 X TIO SA100 SA200 SB1 RS 485 AG500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 10 1 3 6 T R A 26 14 26 45 14 16 11 1 5 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 12 2 4 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 35 9 3 Connection Diagram l 4 E 2 O o Z 2 3 a E o Y D E 2 E Z Z O 7 RS 485 connection diagram 7 SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG FG 1 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature GOT side terminal block 4 Controller controller 4 controller 4 controller QNSE ME
345. ld line z 9 2 RS 485 connection diagram 2 5 m PLC side gt side TA 4521 _ D sub 9 pin gt 2 2 SDA O RDA E E o 7 T r 1 SDB SDA 1 mo 9 RDA SDB 6 E 8 RDB SG 5 L 5 6 im RSA 3 J poe 7 2 97 brc 6 FG Eo od RSB CSB 9 1 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 543 sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end for obtaining shield effect 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 13 4 2 Serial connection 3 RS 485 connection diagram 3 PLC side GOT side Terminal block RDA 2 T SDA 7 SDB SDA 1 RDA 6 RDB SG 5 sc RSA 3 FG CSA 4 RSB 8 9 1 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 3 sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end for obtaining shield effect Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cabl
346. le Built into GOT GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m or same as above GT15 RS2 9P CP 247IF Gss RS 232 connection diagram 5 CN2 RS 232 connection 24217 GT10 CO2H m 6 2 Ey EE 214421 R2 RS 232 connection diagram 9 same as above Built into GOT 1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 2 When a 6 10 2 unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 6 System configuration for connecting to MP2200 MP2300 or 23005 Communication driver YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT umber o Model Communication communi Cable model connectable cation 1 5 Max distance Option device Model name module Type Connection diagram number equipment Built into GOT GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m Differs 27 25 or according to ET GT15 RS2 9P Use RS 232 connection PLC side 217IF 01 diagram 1 specifications 218IF 01 RS 232 9 218IF 02 10 2 6 2 5 IST EE 8 232 connection same Built into GOT diagram 7 above E MP2200 1 GOT for 1 z MP2300 communication 23005 module Built i
347. le Model List 14 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 14 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram RS 232 connection diagram 1 GOT side SICK cable male side terminal block D Sub9 pin SD gt 3 RD 4 2 ER DR 5 RS CS NC MO Beekeeper cee Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 30cm or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 3 SICK PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the SICK PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the SICK PLC 14 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 3 Connection Diagram 14 3 ac a E Z O o LE lt o x o O E z o E o z z O o 14 4 GOT Side Settings 14 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment H controller Setting Controller sick Flexi Soft Ech Network Duplex Settir amp Routing Informatio 8 8 Gateway Communication Gateway Serve BE Gateway Clent 45 E FTP Server Manufacturer sick Standard F RS422 485 Fig File Transfer F Property 5 9 Tr
348. lers RS 485 communication Communication driver Loo FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT adel T Cabl SE n Number of connectable Pu bre ena dan M Option device Model equipment name ation Type Connection diagram number distance FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 2 P 25 7 85 485 connection diagram 4 500m FA LTBGT2RACBL 10 1m 93 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 2 PXG4 2 PXG5 Up to 31 temperature S485 65 485 connection diagram 5 500 controllers for 1 GOT PXH9 2 27 25 Ges RS 485 connection diagram 7 500m Built into GOT 93 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 5 6 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 2 System Configuration 5 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the temperature controller 3 RS 232 connection diagram 3 Interface converter side 5 3 1 RS 232 cable K3SC 10 1 ee ee SG Connection diagram RD RXD 2 k 6 RD 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1
349. less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 57 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 Connectors on the MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side Use proper connectors on the MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side For the details refer to the User s Manual of the used PLC manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of 2 MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC side It is necessary to set terminating resistors in the PLC manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA when connecting the GOT to the PLC manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA For the details refer to the User s Manual of the used PLC manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 7 13 3 Connection Diagram 13 3 3 RS 485 cable The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 1 RS 485 connection diagram 1 MITSUBISHI INDIA MITSUBISHI INDIA CON side 20 pin PLC side PLC side SDA1 TXD1 D SDB1 TXD1 RDA1 RXD1 30 R RDB1 RXD1 n Rx 4 sc 2 GND NC 1 3 NC 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 RSA RTS 14 NC
350. ller MEI N S T Ti 1 to 30 Interface to be used Default 3sec Driver MEI Nexgenie Set this item to adjust the 2 transmission timing of the 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Delay Time communication requestiromithe 00300015 Controller Type I F and Driver are set GOT Default 0 za Make the settings according to the usage z 1 Set 8 bits environment c 13 4 2 Communication detail settings POINT Click the OK button when settings are completed 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be POINT changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data The settings of connecting equipment can be 2 confirmed in I F Communication Setting the following For details refer to the following 5 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 57 1 1 2 communication setting 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 11 13 4 GOT Side Settings 13 5 PLC Side Settings PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA For the details of PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA refer to the following manual gt PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA Communication settings Make the communication settings u
351. m NE HARAS cm 23005 920 2200 2300 23005 Ethernet 97 5 93 gt 6 3 1 CP 9200SH CP 312 CP 317 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 1 Connectable Model List 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 1 System configuration for connecting to GL120 or GL130 i Connection cable m YASKAWA GL Communication driver PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable Model MEMOBUS Commun Cable model Max gt ication MER Option device Model equipment name module TEE Connection diagram number distance Built into GOT GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m Dinor or according to RS 232 PLC side 1 GOT for 1 PLC Gs RS 232 connection diagram 1 Specifications GT15 RS2 9P GL120 GL130 GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m Built into GOT GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m JAMSC Reda GT09 C200R40201 9P 20m same as 1 GOT for 1 MEMOBUS 120NOM27100 GT09 C300R40201 9P 30m above module 1 or 5 422 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS4 9S Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection o lt 5 lt gt E Z E o z z O o 6 2 2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S GL60H or GL70H Connection cable
352. menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Controller Type YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA500 FA M3 I F Interface to be used Driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 5 7 2 5mCommunication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following gt 1 1 2 I F communication setting 7 8 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 9600 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Sum Check Done Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Item Description Range 4800bps Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps Transmission Bip 19200bps communication with the connected Speed 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 9600bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length Data Bit used for communication with the 7bits 8bits connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits D
353. mmunication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 9 5 12 Connecting to MA900 MA901 Communication protocol MODBUS Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit BN1 8bit None bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 1 to 994 Slave address Device address 4 Slave address 1O99 Interval time 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 5 11 Connecting to RMC500 Interval time 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping wi
354. module F3LC11 1F 7 2 9 F3LC12 1F LCO01 0N 7 2 10 LC02 0N STARDOM 7 2 11 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection o lt gt lt o x 5 O E z E o z Z O o 7 2 7 Connecting to CPU port D sub 9 pin conversion cable SIO port adapter cable 7 2 8 Connecting PC link module F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 2N Setting of PLC CPU Make the PLC CPU settings displaying Configuration Communication Settings with the program development tool or the ladder programming tool Item Set value Set the communication mode of the CPU transmission speed and data format Set the transmission speed and data format according to settings of the transmission speed data length parity and stop bit on the GOT side For details on these GOT side settings refer to the following 7 2 5Setting communication interface Communication settings Transmission speed and data format Transmis Stop sion Data bit Parity bit speed Communication 9600 8bit E 1bit mode 0 bps Communication 9600 Communication mode 1 bps 8bits None 154 4 mode Communication 19200 8bit E 1bit mode 2 bps gt yen Communication 19200 8bit N 1bit mode 3 bps ve S Communication 38400 8bit E 1bit mode 4 bps m o Communication 38400 8bit N 1bit mode 5 bps x S Communication 57600 8bit E 1bit mode 6 bps ve d
355. n 6 2 9 PLC Side Settings YASKAWA PLC For details of YASKAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual Communication and port settings Make the communication and port settings with peripheral tool Device name Set value Address 11031 Protocol MEMOBUS Mode RTU Transmission 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps speed 3 57600bps Data bit 8bits Stop bit 1bit Parity bit Even Error check CRC16 1 Set the address according to the Host Address setting on the GOT side For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the following 37 6 2 8 Communication detail settings 2 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown Also the setting range differs depending on the YASKAWA PLC model 3 transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 9 6 2 8 Communication detail settings o a lt 5 lt gt o E 2 E 2 2 o o 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 17 6 2 Serial Connection 0000 gt 0000 NL 1 0001 gt 0001 NL 2 0002 0002 NL 2 0003 gt 0003 NL 2 0004 0004 NL 2 0005 gt 0005 NL 2 0006 gt 0006 NL 2 0007 gt 0007 NL 2 0008 gt 0008 NL 2 0009 0009 NL 2 6 18 Sequence program To communicate the YASKA
356. n set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers W Ethernet setting 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective ll GOT Ethernet setting Ethernet setting Ethernet Setting a E Controler gt H CH1 FUJI MICREX SX 5 2 H Manufacturer z This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings ciere BUR pe Ethernet Setting GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 2 Standard I F Ethemet Muki Ek Gateway Serve Driver Ethernet FUJI Gateway wa Wer Detal settng Standard Ethernet Setting Fiter Setting uber F Property Value 5s A GOT Net No 1 XD Buffer Memory Unit Nc GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5030 Subnet Mask 255 255 25 0
357. n after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range GT27 GT25 GT23 Specified torque range 0 5 Nem to 0 8 GT21 Specified torque range 0 22 N m to 0 25 N m Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause fire failure or malfunction The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation GT27 GT25 Only Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Plug the QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault GT27 GT25 Only TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Before performing the test operat
358. n are stored at GOT startup If connected by other than Ethernet 0 is stored Device Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No 1 to 239 GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No 1 to 64 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 33 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 34 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring CONNECTIONS TO NON MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS dee me qe 10 11 12 13 14 15 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES 2 1 CONNECTION HITACHI PLC 3 1 CONNECTION 4 1 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER orc 5 1 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA 6 1 CONNECTION TO 7 1 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Ex Re eh GRE 8 1 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER eee eee a WR AR ERN R Re Edu 9 1 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY 10 1 CONNECTION TO GE 11 1 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA 13 1 CONNECTION SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 1 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 1 9 2 1 2 2 2 3 24 2 5 2 6 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC Connectable Model 6 2
359. n cable 2 Connection cable PLC Cnet I F module GOT 1 2 VES Number of Cable model Commu Cable model s connectable Series Connection Model name nication Connection Option device Model equipment diagram number Type diagram number lt Built into GOT GT GT RS 422 connection 500m GT15 RS4 9S 8 RS 422 31 PLCs for K200S connection G6L CUEC RS 422 diagram 2 27121 GT10 C02H 9SC CES RS 422 preparing e connection 500m Built into GOT diagram 3 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 3 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 4 to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 12 6 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 2 System Configuration 12 2 3 Connecting to K300S When connecting to one PLC Communication driver TIT LS Industrial Systems MASTER K 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector
360. n for connecting to MICREX SX SPH Communication driver m FUJI MICREX SX SPH Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Generalpurpose Commun Model name interface ication Cable mogel max Option device Model 1 Pss Connection diagram number distance equipment module Type m Built into GOT zi NP4H CB2 RS 232 2m 1 GOT for 1 PLC 2 GT NWOH CNV GT15 RS2 9P Z 9 Built into z 2 NP1L RS1 NP1L RS2 RS 232 s RS 232 connection diagram 2 15m o NP1L RS3 pm GT15 RS2 9P MICREX SX SPH OIN lt Built into GOT 1 GOT for Communication NP1L RS1 ort of general NP1L RS4 RS 485 5 485 connection diagram 2 1000m MB 25 communication GT15 RS4 9S module Built into NP1L RS5 RS 485s 52 RS 485 connection diagram 3 1000m 25 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 11 4 2 Serial connection 4 2 5 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC RS 232 cable 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 side D sub 9 PLC side CD 4 RS R
361. nating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively 3 5 422 connection diagram 3 GOT side LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS terminal block PLC side terminal block Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 500m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 227 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 14 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side When connecting an LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 57 12 3 2 RS 422 cable m Connection diagram SDA RDA SDB gt RDB RDA SDA RDB SDB SG SG RSA i FG RSB CSA CSB 1 For the system terminal connect a 1200 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively 12 10 12 CONNECTION LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 Connection Diagram 12 4 GOT Side Settings 12 4 1 Setting communication
362. nection Connection ture cable 4 cable 2 Converter 2 Connection cable 3 GOT controller Max Dlumoeuon Cable model Cable model distance Comm Cable model eee o Model eode Model mu Max equipment x Connection Connection nication Connection Option device Model c name 1 distance diagram number diagram number Type diagram number W BF 28 0500 GT gum 0 5m Built into W BF 01 0500 W BF 28 1000 GOT 2 2 User RS 499 0 5m 1m Up to 31 400 3 W BF 01 1000 W BF 28 3000 temperature connection 2 1000m RS 232 2 15 z FB900 1m 3m Gum controllers z diagram 3 W BF 01 300 or for 1 GOT o 3m Use RS 232 GT15 RS2 9P connection diagram 2 1 Use communication 1 for the communication format 2 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 15 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485 V Connection cable 2 Communication driver Cem RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 1 Temperature Connection cable 1 Co
363. net connection type EtherNet IP AB Tag 2 1794 133 1794 L34 do not Ethernet connection type EtherNet IP AB 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 3 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to SLC500 Series When connecting to one PLC Connection cable Communication driver SLC500 AB 1 N Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 PLC PLC Connection cable GOT Communic Cable model Max Seri tion devi Model p ation Type Connection diagram number distance option device Built into GOT GT09 C30R20701 9S 3m 25 or 15m GT15 RS2 9P Gs RS232 connection diagram 1 SLC500 RS 232 EE ST spf GT10 C02H ePT9P Ey Em 21442 4 550 RS232 connection diagram 5 15m Built into GOT 1 When a GT10 C02H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 10 4 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver SLC500 AB 1 N DH485 network Connection cable Adapter PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Series 1 ne us ram Max Option device Model 29 n
364. ng window is displayed Select the Parity TERME T T channel to be used from the list menu Default Even Odd 3 2 Set whether or not to perform a sum Set the following items Sum Check check during communication Done None o Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Default No Controller type YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 Set the number of retries to be performed 5 Reti when a communication error occurs 0 to 5times LE UT2000 UTAdvanced ry I F Interface to be used Default 5 Driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT 100 UT2000 Timeout dd d to time out 1 to 30sec UTAdvanced Time z Default 3sec 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer PUB host duas aia eo lt the GOT to which the temperature Controller Type I F and Driver are set Host Address controller is connected in the connected 1 to 99 Make the settings according to the usage network environment Default 1 gt 8 4 2 Communication detail settings Set this item to adjust the transmission x Delay Time timing of the communication request from 0 to 300ms Click the OK button when settings are completed the GOT Default 5ms Select the communication format z POINT Default 1 Format 1 The settings of connecting equipment can be Accessible to GREEN UT100 UT2000 confirmed in I F Communication Setting Format UTAdvanced Series 1 2 z For details refer to the following Format 2 Z T Access
365. nit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48 with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the mounting screws the specified torque range 0 10 Nem to 0 14 Nem with a Phillips head screwdriver No 1 When the GOT is installed vertically its side interface is positioned on the bottom To prevent the falling of the wireless LAN communication unit from the side interface install or remove the unit while holding it with hands GT21 When mounting the SD card unit on the GOT fit it to the side of the GOT and tighten the tapping screws in the specified torque range 0 3 N m to 0 6 N m with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit When closing the USB environmental protection cover fix the cover to the GOT by pushing the PUSH mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure GT27 GT25 Only Remove the protective film of the GOT When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed In addition for the models equipped with the human sensor function using the GOT with the protective film may caus
366. nizes controllers on Communication gt Verifying the is monitoring normally Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility Developer gt 1 6Checking for Normal Monitoring etc gt 1 5Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Settings of the Utility 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment When using the GOT at the first time make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT Set the communication interface of the GOT at Controller Setting and I F Communication Setting in GT Designers 1 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel setting Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT Setting Controller Setting QD CH1 MELSEC Rnb QD CH2 None QD CH3 None QD gh Network Duplex Settir Routing Informatio Transfer F Value h 0 Redundant i 115200 KD Station No Switch 5 Buffer Memory Unit Nc High Normal 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting dialog box appears Select the channel No to be used from the list menu 3 Refer to the following explanations for the setting I Channel No 2 to 4 Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the
367. nnecting to 697 711 Communication settings Make the communication settings using the engineering tool When making the settings set Configuration Mode on the Setting tab of the engineering tool to SNP only Setting item PLC side setting SNP Enable YES SNP Mode Slave Interface 3 RS232 RS485 Data Rate 9600bps 19200bps Parity ODD NONE EVEN Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Flow Control NONE Turn Around Delay NONE Timeout Long 1 Setto YES 2 Set to SLAVE 3 Set the communication format to be used only when connecting to Port2 4 Setto NONE 5 Set to NONE 6 to LONG 11 14 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 5 PLC Side Setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station No 3 No 00 No 15 No 6 TeTererereren TeTe eTereren IEEE TeTe erereren 15 15 1 15 TI t Examples of station number setting m 9 598
368. ns AG For details of the product contact Siemens AG 4 number of increases the communication becomes highloaded and it may affect the communication performance 15 10 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 3 Ethernet Connection 15 3 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 300 400 1200 series Ethernet connection type OP communication Communication driver Lom Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway 2 Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Ethernet Maximum Number of connectable eri A Series 3 Cable model segment Option device Model equipment Module 2 length SIMATIC CP 243 1 S7 200 CP 243 1 IT IDOBRSER When PLC GOT is N 1 SIMATIC E A 128 PLCs or less for 1 CP 343 1 Shielded twisted pair cable STP or GOT 57 300 Advanced IT unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Built into GOT of category 3 or higher 100m Built into GOT When PLC GOT is 1 N CP 443 1 The following shows the Shielded twisted pair cable STP or number of GOTs for 1 PLC SIMATIC CP 443 1 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP S7 400 Advanced IT of category 3 or higher 32orless recommended Built into GOT to 16 or less SIMATIC 87 1200 Built into GOT 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Et
369. nt GT27 GT25 GT23 GT01 RS4 M GOT main part connector see from the front 5 1 o 9 6 9 D sub female GT2103 PMBD See from the back of a GOT main part 5 pin terminal block GT2104 RTBD GT2103 PMBDS GT2103 PMBLS See from the back of a GOT main part 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 21 a O z O a O a be lt 2 1 4 2 Coaxial cableconnector connection method The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector connector plug for coaxial cable and the cable NCAUTION Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable e External conductor Outer sheath Insulating material Nut Washer Gasket Plug shell 2 Clamp Contact Internal conductor T Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with dimensions as shown below Cable in use A 3C 2V 15 mm 5C 2V 5C 2V CCY 10 mm 2 Pass the nut washer gasket and clamp through the coaxial cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor Cut this portion of the outer sheath Washer Gasket Insulating material 3 Cut the external conductor insulting material
370. nter C 3 Writing is possible only while the PLC is running 4 Only 16 bit 1 word code designation is allowed 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 15 19 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 20 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 4 Device Range that Can Be Set REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Sep 2013 SH NA 081199ENG A Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 100E tible with GT Works3 Version1 104J Nov 2013 SH NA 081199ENG B 9 mPat e WIIN 757 101055 version Changing the icons of the supported models tible with GT Works3 Version1 108N Jan 2014 SH NA 081199ENG c OMPalvle LASS MESI Writing errors have been corrected Compatible with GT Works3 1 1125 Apr 2014 SH NA 081199ENG D GT25 and GS are added The ALLEN BRADLEY PLC MicroLogix1400 is supported Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 118Y SICK safety controller connection of GS is supported Jul 2014 SH NA 081199ENG E SICK safety controller FX3 CPU320002 is supported ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Ethernet connection type EtherNet IP AB Tag is supported SIEMENS PLC SIMATIC S7 300 400 series connection of GS is supported Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 122C GT21 is added Oct 2014 SH NA 081199ENG F PLCs manufactured by MITSUBISHI INDIA are supported The multi CPU of PLCs m
371. nto a 2 5 RS 422 connection same as GT15 RS4 9S diagram 4 above 2171 01 RS 422 mm R2 GT10 C02H 9SC ST ES 5 422 connection same as Built into GOT diagram 7 above m 1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 2 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 9 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 7 Connection Diagram d RS 232 connection diagram 4 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC CD 1 Clamped by hood RD RXD 2 1 TXD RS 232 cable SD TXD 3 3 RXD ER DTR 4 12 RTS 1 Connection diagram i SG 5 14 GND a RS 232 connection diagram 1 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side DR DSR 6 RS RTS 7 6 CTS CD 1 4 1 FG i CS CTS 8 RD RXD 2 W 2 TXD 1 1 9 SD TXD s 3 ER DTR 4 i DSR e RS 232 connection diagram SG s Se ets e ection diagram 5 side YASKAWA PLC side DR DSR 6 9
372. nts can be flown from right to left even a long comment can be displayed all For details of the advanced popup display refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 27 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Perform an check Whether the PLC can communicate with the or not can be checked by the check function If this check ends successfully it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection Display the check screen by Main Menu For GT16 Display the I O check screen by Main menu Self check I O check For GT15 GT14 GT11 Display the check screen by Main menu Debug amp self check Self check check For details on the check refer to the following manual 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility Please select check channel Debug self check Self check l 0 check Please select check channel T RS232 CPU Self CPU communication check No error EY 1 Touch CPU on the I O check screen Touching CPU executes the communication check with the connected PLC 2 When the communication screen ends successfully the screen on the left is displayed 1 28 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Communication monitoring function The communication monitoring is a function that
373. nverter 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model Max Model Communication Cable model Max Model name Connection HC Connection CHEM Option device Model equipment distance name Type distance diagram number diagram number Built into GOT FB100 User ser Up to 31 fem RS 485 RS 232 temperature FB400 connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m controllers for 1 FB900 diagram 8 diagram 3 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 74 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd When connecting directly to a temperature controller by RS 422 Communication driver Liem RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS 8 8 ERA Model Number of connectable equipment 25 Up to 31 temperature Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Cable model Cable model Max Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device name Type number number Built into GOT FB400 9 5 422 connection RS 422 Iom FB900 diagram 3 connection diagram 4 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Use communication 1 for the communication format 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 9 16 9 2 System Configuration 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER controllers for 1 GOT When connecting directly to a temperature cont
374. odel Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Sionalfname GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series g UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 UT52A UM33A UTS55A UP55A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 5 30 5 28 303 503 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 10 RS 485 connection diagram 10 GOT side 4 Temperature controller Temperature controller 1 1 i 1 1 RSB E SDA1 1 L L RSB SDB1 2 ri ri Ec RSA RDA1 3 E 5 ET J 4 E 1 SDA2 5 1 i 4 5 2 EN N Terminating resistor 100Q 1 4W 2 RDA2 7 pd 1 1 1 RDB2 8 ri E SG 9 E Wy i eE pe FG 10 2 T 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Sianal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series EM Ms UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 U
375. oduct manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 8 4 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration 8 2 2 Connecting to UT100 Series When using the RS232C RS485 converter Communication driver m YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature RS232C RS485 Mad Connection cable 1 4 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter Number of Cable model Commun Cable model connectable d Max Model dedi E Max equipment Series Connection diagram ication Connection diagram Option device Model distance name distance number Type number Built into GOT RS 485 31 temperature User E UT100 connection diagram 1200m ML2 RS 232 5 232 15 controllers for 1 connection diagram 1 GT GOT 9 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation When connecting directly Communication driver UT YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced
376. odule 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the connected Station 2 Ethernet module 1 to 254 Default blank 57 200 Set the PLC type to be connected 57 300 400 7 1200 Set the IP address of the connected PLC side IP IP Address Ethernet module address Default blank Port No 102 fixed 102 fixed Set the Connection No Rack No set Connection on the PLC side 0to7 o Rack No Default 0 iti No set Set the Position Slot No se 87 200 Module on the PLC side OP 0to6 Position Slot Default 57 300 400 No S7 200 OP 0 Cie dodi 57 300 400 OP 2 Communication TCP fixed TCP fixed Connection No Rack and Module Position Slot No unnecessary for S7 1200 OP 2 Each of GOT Station set in the communication detail setting and Station set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers W Communication detail settings 15 14 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 3 Ethernet Connection Filter Setting V Reflect IP filter setting in the GOT This setting is shared by GOT standard Ethernet setting and GOT wireless LAN I F setting Use filter Access from IP address below Penetrate improve security the 2000 series supports the IP Filter Setting For details on the IP Filter Setting refer to the following manual
377. of connectable Ethernet x Series 3 Cable model segment Option device Model equipment Module 2 length CP343 1 IT 100BASE TX When PLC GOT is N 1 SIMATIC CP343 1 Shielded twisted pair cable STP or 16 PLCs or less for 1 GOT 57 300 CP343 1 Lean unshielded twisted pair cable UTP of CP343 1 Advanced category higher M When PLC GOT is 1 N 10BASE T DEM CL The following shows the SIMATIC CP443 1 IT Shielded twisted pair cable STP or number of GOTs for 1 PLC S7 400 CP443 1 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP of 32 or less recommended category 3 or higher to 16 or less 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by Sieme
378. of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt gt CH1 FUJI PXR PXG PXH Device Information 3 Kind WORD Range Device 0001 1398 Network Station 1 a Item Description Device Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type which is selected in Device Bit Word Set the monitor target of the set device To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No Network 1 to 119 216 to 255 To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No 200 to 215 To specify the station No of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of GOT data register GD 1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register Station No GOT data register GD Setting range 200 GD10 201 GD11 1 to 255 If setting a value outside the range above a device range 214 GD24 error occurs 215 GD25 4 uj zi J O E z O 5 2
379. of the modular connector Modular connector pin No 9 31 9 3 Connection Diagram l 4 E 2 O o 2 3 n gt E o Y 2 E 2 E Z Z O o Precautions when preparing a cable 5 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be within the maximum distance 6 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 727 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 7 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor by operating the terminating resistor setting switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 9 32 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 3 3 RS 485 cable 3 RS 485 connection diagram 3 side RKC temperature controller side Connection diagram terminal block Modular 2 Tu SDA1 TXD
380. oller controller controller 4 724 5 24 T R B T R B ta TR B T R B TIR A TIR A E TRA TIR A SG SG P2 aii SG m t ELE ues UM iE Es Combination module 48 Combination module Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2W 8 More than 1000 in case of CB series 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM Connecting terminating resistors 2 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 3 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 4 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No Signal name 2 110 CB100 CB400 8700 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 Z CT CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 TIR A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA4
381. ommunication detail settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Controller Setting CATS CH2 None CH3 None H4 None ME D HITACHI HITACHI S10mn S10V 4 3 Standard VF RS422 485 jetwork Duplex Seter TE Routing Informatio 8 8 Gateway p Communication BB Gateway 6 Mail FTP Server Fi File Transfer F Sy Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS XD Station No Switch AD Buffer Memory Unit Nc ae Stop Bit Parity Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms OK Cancel 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer HITACHI Controller Type HITACHI S10mini S10V I F Interface to be used Driver HITACHI S10mini S10V 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 97 3 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 communication setting 3 6 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 4 GOT Side Settings Make the settings according to the usage environment
382. on unit GT15 J61BT13 Install a MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit or CC Link communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage Example When installing a MELSECNET H communication unit and a serial communication unit MELSECNET H communication unit Serial communication unit MELSECNET H ommunication unit Serial communication unit When using a serial communication unit A serial communication unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Serial Serial communication communication 72 z gt o 7 2 a 2 gt lt 72 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 41 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using a field network adapter unit A field network adapter unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface However at the top of the field network adapter unit you will not be able to mount the each communication unit Example Installing a field network adapter unit Field Network gt lt adapter unit Field Network adapter unit 2 Communication Communication unit Communication unit Field Network adapter unit When using the sound output unit or external I O unit
383. onnectable Model Model equipment fa Connection diagram ication Connection diagram Option device Model distance name distance number Type number l Built into 2 Usen User i Us RS 485 500m 771 RS 232 99 232 connection 45 connection diagram 1 diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P 2 5 Built into GOT PXR3 Up to 31 PXR4 RS 485 500m 1 30 2 RS 232 RS 232 connection 45m temperature 5 connection diagram 2 diagram 2 controllers PXR9 for 1 GOT RS2 GT15 RS2 9P E 2 3a E O Nm GT Ww Built into GOT 2 User RS 485 500m Ks485 RS 232 98 232 connection 45m connection diagram 3 diagram 2 o GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by SYSMEXRA CO LTD For details of the product contact SYSMEXRA CO LTD 52 Product manufactured by LINEEYE CO LTD For details of the product contact LINEEYE CO LTD 3 Product manufactured by System Sacom corp For details of the product contact System Sacom corp 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 5 2 System Configuration When connecting via RS 485 communication Communication driver FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cabl
384. ontact RKC 9 8 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 3 Connecting to SRZ When connecting to temperature control module Z TIO Z CT with a converter Communication driver Ce RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Sma Connection cable 2 Connection cab Temperature Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Gable model Max Model Communication Cable mogel Max Connection Connection Option device Model equipment distance name Type A distance diagram number diagram number GT Built into GOT Zr Up 16 Use os Z CT Up to 16 895 485 4 RS 232 Z DIO Up to 16 SRZ connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m T otal of Z TIO Z diagram 8 diagram 3 CT and Z DIO Up GT15 RS2 9P to 31 for 1 GOT 1 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER When connecting directly to temperature control module Z TIO Z CT Communication driver Cim RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Communication Cabe mogel Max Number of connectable equipment Series Connection diagram T Option device Model Type distance number 9
385. ontroller side set the CPU No on the GOT side to 1 default Setting item Signed BIN16 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced 00 as 8 6 1 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 p UT2000 UTAdvanced 455 Device ESERIES PUNO o i Device name Setting range Device Ne representation UNo 1 Network g Internal relay I 10001 to 17072 Decimal Al Selection Station No 1 The bit specification of Setting range of each the word device 1 word device B x d Item Description Data register D D0001 to D9000 c Set the device name device number and bit number 9 Decimal LLI The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of E Device word device gt File register 2 0001 to B1600 o CPU Set the CPU No 1 2 of the device to be monitored No When device B is selected the CPU No is fixed to 1 The word specification Setting range of each bit Information Displays the device setti hich are selected in Devi ee plays the device setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device 1 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 2 This is available only for UP750 and UP550 Select this item when writing data to all the temperature controllers connected 2 When bit specification of word device is performed dat
386. or 1to31 Stop bit 1bit fixed in the connected network Default 2 Adapter address 1 to 31 Host address 1 to 31 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 15 8 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 2 Serial Connection 15 2 7 Connecting to SIMATIC S7 200 Communication settings Set the communication settings of PLC and PC PPI cable 1 PLC settings Set the communication settings of PLC by operating the SIEMENS programming tool STEP7 WIN32 Setting item PLC Side Setting Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Even fixed Stop bit 1bit fixed Host address 2 1 to 31 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Setthe address without overlapping the address of other units 2 PC PPI cable settings Set the transmission speed by operating the DIP switch on the PC PPI cable DIP switch down side 0 upper side 1 RS 232 PC PPI cable SWITCH 123 RS 485 57 200 CPU I 000000000000 SWITCH 4
387. or 1 GOT UT35A GT15 RS2 9P UT55A UT75A UP35A UP55A 3 Built into UM33A GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m GOT Up to 31 RS 485 or temperature i 1200m ML2 RS 232 15m diagram 16 RS 232 connection controllers 2 wire type diagram 1 PEL for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P Built into UT52A GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m GOT Up to 31 0 55 5 RS 485 Toomi 15 temperature E m 55 connection diagram 9 RS 232 connection controllers 2 wire t UM33A7 diagram 1 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation For 2 to 7 only the products that meet the following conditions can be connected 8 8 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration Annotation Suffix code Function 10 2 Open network Optional suffix code Without LP Produc 2 wire t Remark with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor Produc commu with the open network port of RS 485 nication 4 wire type 2 wire type Produc with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model Other than 3 Produc 4 wire without the additional contact output points DO and with the open network port of RS 485 communication type 2 wire type Standard code model
388. or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each Station to the GOT 5 10 3 3 mEthernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 3 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT 10 19 10 3 Ethernet Connection CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item 1 AB Control CompactLogix al lt Bit gt CH1 AB Control CompactLogix oe Device Information BOOL v 0 0 1 Kind vi DEF BIT poo nat 5 No
389. ote that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item d EFI output EQ Device 1 2 Device L Byte number 0 to 2 name EFI number 1 to 3 2 Engineering software for SICK and device representation of GT Designer3 The engineering software for SICK and the device representation of GT Designer3 are different Set the device by referring to the following table Device GT Designer3 Engineering software for SICK lt pit gt SICK Flexi Soft A A A AI LILT LA Device In0 A I O model name 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 12 Module number such as XTIO Dam ee 1 8 Input position LILI 1 12 Dec Madig number iaa Ere me 1 8 Input position 1 12 position AA A AILILIL QA 0 Bax QLILI A A A A A I O model name O Q OO 1 12 Dec Module number such as XTIO B 4 AA 1 8 Output position LILI 1 12 Dec Module number A 1 8 Outp
390. ow is displayed Select the Adapter channel to be used from the list menu Address is connected in the connected 11031 network 3 Set the following items Default 1 Manufacturer SIEMENS Specify the host address station No Controller Type Set either of the following e FEE cde monitor 4 40341 connected network 2 Default 2 I F Interface to be used 1 Set the address without overlapping the address of other units Driver Set either of the following 2 GOT automatically sets the values of Transmission When connecting to SIEMENS S7 300 400 Speed Adapter Address and Host Address to the HMI n SIEMENS 7 300 400 ics 2 When connecting to SIEMENS 57 200 Lu SIEMENS 57 200 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage 2 environment K7 15 2 4 detail settings 5 Click the OK button when settings are completed S 9 The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following gt 1 1 2 I F communication setting 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 7 15 2 Serial Connection 2 SIEMENS S7 200 Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even Adapter Address 0 Host Address 2 15 2 5
391. ox to be used be used is displayed in the communication 4 When the communication driver name is not procedure again ChNo ChNo USB 1 l amp Gn GCPU QJ71C24 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 Extend 1 2 1st ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 2nd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None 3rd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None Definition of ChNo 0 8 Barcode connection ther connection OK 1 device connection 9 connection 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment displayed normally carry out the following gt 1 1Setting the Communication Interface 1 25 o 2 gt z O o X 2 a a 3 a t a Utility 1 How to display Utility at default Utility call key 1 point press on GOT screen upper left corner Utility display Y wy 2 Utility call When setting Pressing time to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sounds For the setting of the utility call key refer to the following gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 3 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Set
392. pactLogix A 4800bps A transmission speed used for Transmission Ale 9600bps 4 communication with the connected The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Speed equipment 19200bps Controller Type I F and Driver are set Default 19200bps 38400bps Make the settings according to the usage Specify the format in which the sum environment check is performed during Sum Check Type communication when performing sum CRC16 check Default BCC Specify the adapter address station No of the PLC that the GOT will 57 10 2 5 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed 1 0 to 63 POI NT Adapter Address monitor in the connected network 4 Default 0 The settings of connecting equipment can be Specify the host address station No a EM T of the adapter to which the is confirmed Communication Setting Host Address 0 to 63 For detail fer to the followi connected in the connected network or details refter to the following Default 1 Eg 1 1 2 I F communication setting 71 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and host address 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 11 10 2 Serial Connection 3 AB Control CompactLogix Property _ Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Sum Check Type BCC IRetry Times 3 Timeout
393. ption Standard Setting Set channel No and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces Set the CH No according to the intended purpose 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel setting CH No 5 to 8 Used for barcode function RFID function remote personal computer operation function serial 9 Used for connecting Host PC Ethernet download A Used for the report function with a serial printer hard copy function with a serial printer remote personal computer operation function Ethernet VNC server function gateway function and MES interface function Multi Used for multi channel Ethernet connection VF The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed Dii Set the driver for the device to be connected river None gt Host Personal computer gt Each communication driver for connected devices Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver Detail Setting Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232 mark the Enable the 5V power supply checkbox RS232 The RS232 setting is invalid when the CH No of I F 1 RS232 is 9 8 GT21 is not supported Extend Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the 9 GT21 is not supported Set t
394. r External input XW XW000 to XWFFO External output YW YW000 to YWFFO Internal register RW RWO000 to RWFFO 9 Extended internal register 000 to MWFFO Hexadac MW T imal Extended internal register Device name One shot timer UW Up down counter CW Setting range UW000 to UWOFO CWO0 to CWFO Global link register GW Event register EW 000 to GWFFO EWO000 to EWFFO System register sw 000 to SWBFO Transfer register JW JW000 to JWFFO Receive register QW QWO000 to QWFFO On delay timer current 2 TCO000 to TC1FF value TC On delay timer set value TS000 to TS1FF TS One shot timer current value UC UCO000 to UCOFF 9 One shot timer set value 9 2 05000 to USOFF g US Up down counter current 2 to CCFF value CC Up down counter set 12 CS00 to CSFF value CS Function data register san DW000 to DWFFF DW 4 5 Function work register 4 5 FW000 to FWBFF FW Extended function work 4 5 LWW0000 to LWWFFFF register LWW Backup work register 5 LXW0000 to LXW3FFF LXW Long word work register 3 LLLOOOO to LLL1FFF LLL Backup Long word work 134 LMLO0000 to LML1FFF register LML gt 2 Floating point work register 2 3 LF0000 to LF1FFF 2 LF 2 Backup single precision 8 floating point work register 60000 to LG1FFF LG 1 Only
395. r 15m GT15 RS2 9P RS232 connection SIMATIC MLFB RS 232 diagram 1 1 GOT for 1 HMI 7 300 400 6 57 972 0 11 0 0 Emm cm Adapter 21 21 GT10 CO2H dm 6PT9P ST oar E is 28 95232 connection 4sm Built into GOT diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by Siemens For details of this product contact Siemens AG 2 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector 15 4 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 2 Serial Connection 15 2 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 Communication driver SIEMENS 57 200 Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Com uel Number of connectable icati 4 Series is pud Max distance Option device Model equipment on Type Connection diagram number GT Built into GOT GT GT 6ES7 901 3BF20 0XA0 15m GT15 RS2 9P 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 SIMATIC 57 200 RS 232 1 GOT for 1 PLC 249 ok baal R4 R2 10 02 6 2 6ES7 901 3BF20 0XA0 IST op 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 219421 15m Built into GOT RS232 connection diagram 3 1 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of this product contact Siemens AG 2 When a GT10 CO2H 6PT9P unit of the sub version A or is used do not ground the case of the D sub 9 pin connector
396. r setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station Station No 3 No 0 No 1 No 15 No 6 Examples of station number setting 1 Direct specification Specify the station No of the PLC to be changed when setting device Specification range 0 to 99 4 22 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial connection 4 3 Ethernet Connection 4 3 1 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX SX SPH Communication driver 00 Ethernet FUJI Gateway Connection cable The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC 10 or less Connection cable GOT Model Ethernet 3 Max Number of connectable equipment 255 7 Gebe mors 227721 Option device Model interface module Connection diagram number distance J When PLC GOT is 1 N n SPH200 The following shows the number of 3 SPH300 GOTs for 1 PLC 128 or less NP1L ET1 100m Built into GOT SPH2000 10BASE T 23 When PLC GOT is 1 N SPH3000 Shielded twisted pair cable STP or The following shows the number of E unshielded twisted pair cable UTP GOTs for 1 PLC 8 or less z 2 When PLC GOT is
397. r the data interval extension time refer to the 9 5 17 Connecting to 400 following gt 4 Data interval extension time settings 222 Communication settings Make the communication settings of B400 using the 4 Data interval extension time settings rotary switch key and the DIP switch Set the data interval extension time as the following procedure For the operation procedure refer to the 400 manual 1 Tum the power of the module OFF LN SERE seme Unit address setting 4 1 Rotary switch setting 2 Set the DIP switch 4 and 6 to ON and 5 to OFF CH1 to CH8 7 SW1 SW2 4800bps 9600bps 3 Setthe data interval extension time using the rotary Communication speed ops 38400bps 2 DIP switch setting SW3 switch address setting switch Data bit configuration 0t05 For the setting method refer to the following Gommunication gt 3 Module address settings specification setting 3 DIP switch settings Termination resistor SW4 4 the power of the module ON setting Enable Disable The FAIL RUN lamp lights in green and the set time 4 When the setting value is 98 or 99 the communication becomes valid address is the same as for 97 1 Rotary switch setting SW1 SW2 5 Tum the power of the module OFF again and set the Set the unit address using the rotary switch DIP switches and rotary switch to the original position Rotary switch Address setting switch
398. range 9600bps 19200bps Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 8 1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit 801 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Device address A ON 1234567 8 4 Slave address 14093 m Switch position Setting item Set value Interval 9 0 to 250 ms 1121312 151517 8 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Communicati 9600bps ON OFF 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of 19200bps OFF ON other units on speed 53 Setthe maximum time from the sending of the last character 38400bps ON stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT Data bit 8bit side to the receiving status until the temperature controller Parity OFF OFF becomes ready to send Set as necessary NONE 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not Data bit Data bit 8bit made 7 d ON ON configuration Parity Even Data bit 8bit 9 5 15 Connecting to X TIO Module Parity Odd EN OUR peines MODBUS ON 1 Communication settings E Make the communication settings of the temperature Internal data OFE controller DR termination Item Setting range resistor ON ON
399. range varies with the connected PLC Connecting to the intelligent serial port module 1 For transmission control procedure1 Item Set value Transmission speed 19200bps Station No 0 Data bit Tbit Stop bit 1bit Parity bit Even Control Method None For RS 232 communication RS 232 MODE switch 2 For RS 422 communication RS 422 MODE switch 2 Communication format Sum check Done 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 11 2 5 PLC Side Setting 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item r Bit CH1 HITACHI HIDIC H 5 Device Information Of 0000 Kind elle fleks 4156 lt Remote No 23 Device 0000 5A95 Dc s Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type and
400. ration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers RS 232 communication Connection cable 2 Communication driver TIT FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connection cable 1 Temperatur Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller bl del bl del Model Model Model o moge Max f Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model name distance name name distance number number Built into GOT 500m 77 RS232 pe 15m connection diagram 1 connection diagram 1 GT 27 GT15 RS2 9P PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 M Built into GOT User T A M ii RS 485 500m K3SC 10 RS 232 aa RS 232 15m connection diagram 6 connection diagram 3 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by SYSMEXRA CO LTD For details of the product contact SYSMEXRA CO LTD 2 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation For details of the product contact OMRON Corporation 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 2 System Configuration Number of connectable equipment Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT 5 5 ui O 2 E z O 2 2 E 2 LL O E z E 2 2 O When connecting to multiple temperature control
401. re controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 7 RS 485 connection diagram 7 GOT side Temperature controller Y SDA1 TXD1 6 S SDB1 TXD1 8 ad SG 2 SDA2 TXD2 5 gt SDB2 TXD2 7 ca RDA1 RXD1 10 RDB1 RXD1 12 RSA RTS 14 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4 2 RSB RTS 16 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series ULIS UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 RSA 29 4 27 SG 30 5 28 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal E m Connecting terminating resistors 4 FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8
402. reading is possible 2 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 3 Only 32 bit 2 word designation is allowed 4 When it is used with bit specification bit specification of word device the offset function cannot be used 5 When bit specification bit specification of word device is performed the uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is b15 Higher Lower Device No represen tation Hexadec imal 50 b1 spese b14 b15 6 Device GL corresponds to device of the PLC 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set ha I lt E O E z E 2 2 O o 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 1 4 2 4 3 44 4 5 Connectable Model List 4 2 Serial 4 3 Ethernet Connection 4 23 Device Range that Set 4 27 4 29 4 J 2 gt O E z 9 LE o 2 2 O o 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models m Series Model name Clock pip iut Connectable model Refer to RS 232 El F99 i RS 485 421 RS 232
403. ription Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of word device intomation Displays device type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Network Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of No the Station No 1 to 247 specified Device Range Setting range Device No Device name available representation 9 Input IX 0 0 to 1 255 7 5 Output QX0 0 to QX255 7 Decimal Octal amp Marker BOOL MX MXO 0 to MX8191 7 Input IW WO to IW254 o o Output QW QWO to QW254 72 Hexadecimal Marker MW MWO to MW32254 System Word SW SWO to SW468 1 Some System Word devices are read only For details refer to the following C 3 MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC user s Manual 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 6 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 13 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 14 13 CONNECTION MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 6 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 14 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 14 1 Connectable Model 14 2 14 2 System 14 2 14 3 Connection Diagram 14 3 14 4 GOT Side 14 4 14 5 PLC Side 5
404. rk Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type UT55A Product with two 5 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24 sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication NS port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in with CHS the E3 terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication _ _ With 4 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 17 RS 485 connection diagram 17 Temperature Temperature GOT side pn controller 1 controller RDA1 RXD1 10 1 SDB RDB1 RXD1 12 SDAC m SDA SDA1 TXD1 6 gt RDB SDB1 TXD1 8 BO a T m R
405. rnet Connection 10 3 1 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix or CompactLogix Ethernet connection type EtherNet IP AB Communication driver Lr EtherNet IP AB Gateway PLC Connection cable GOT EtherNet IP Communi Maximum Number of connectable Series 4 cation Cable model segment Option device Model 4 equipment communication module T 3 ype length 1756 ENET 10Mbps 4 Contollogix 1756 ENBT 10 100Mbps Ethemet DUE 100 Buitinto GOT 1756 EN2TR 10 100Mbps unshielded CompactLogix 10 14 1 2 3 4 5 twisted pair cable of When PLC GOT is N1 category 5 or higher TCP 128 PLC 100BASE TX 1 1 Shielded twisted pair cable id STP hielded Built i Ethernet uns ielde 100m Built into GOT When PLC GOT is 1 twisted pair cable UTP of TCP 32 GOTs or less category 3 or higher recommended to 16 or less for 1 PLC Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BAS
406. rocedure 2 as a protocol select HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 as a communication driver PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Intelligent g Commun Cable model Max connectable serial port icati i i R 9 ication Connection diagram number distance option device Mogel equipment module Type Model name H 302 2 H 702 2 1002 2 GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 2002 2 R9 202 15m H 300 232 connection diagram 1 H 700 GT15 RS2 9P H 2000 Built into GOT N T lt O E z E 2 2 O Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or ss RS 232 connection diagram 1 Specified transmission speed 19200bps 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m RS 232 connection diagram 2 Specified transmission speed H 4010 RS 232 38400bps 15m GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 2 Transmission speed other than the above GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 1 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m orse RS 232 connection diagram 2 Built into GOT GT15 RS2 9P 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 3 2 2 System Configuration Model name H 302 H 702 H 1002 H 2002 H 4010 H 300 H 700 H 2000 PLC Intelligent serial port module COMM H COMM 2H 1 2 3 Connection cable GOT Number of ae Nap model Ma Option device Model 4
407. roject data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 4 GOT Side Settings 2 5 PLC Side Setting POINT 2 For transmission control procedure2 Item Set value HITACHI IES PLC Transmission speed 19200bps For details of the HITACHI IES PLC refer to the BRUN following manual i Data bit Tbit zl gt HITACHI IES PLC user s Manual Stop bit 1bit o Parity bit Even Directly connecting to the CPU Control Method None 5 For RS 232 communication lt ER ue Communication format 292 MODE switch 9 1 2 3 4800bps 9600bps For RS 422 communication lt Transmissionspeed 19200bps 38400bps RS 422 MODE switch 9 o Station No 0 Sum check Done z Data bit 7bit Stop bit 1bit k 4 Parity bit Even gt Control Method DTR control z Communication format RS 232 e Sum check Done Protocol transmission control procedure 1 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side 2 transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 79 2 4 2 Communication detail settings 3 setting
408. roller by RS 485 Communication driver 0 RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS O 2 2 O Connection cable o Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of c Model Communication Cable model Max SUD evite is connectable name Type Connection diagram number distance P equipment E GT EUER G8 RS 485 connection diagram 5 1200m Built into GOT 2 100 FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 1 o 400 5 485 7 85 485 connection diagram 6 1200m FA LTBGT2RACBL 10 1m pa 1607 FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m _ o G GT 2 9 485 connection diagram 7 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 2 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 17 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 6 Connecting to RB Series RB100 400 RB500 RB700 900 When using the converter Communication driver ir RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS 2224 Connection cable 2 1 888 0 Connection cable 1 Te t Connection cable 1 Converter Connection
409. rs to make sure that the data storage is not accessed Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files When using the GOT with an SD card inserted check the following items GT27 GT25 GT23 When inserting a SD card into the GOT make sure to close the SD card cover Failure to do so causes the data not to be read or written GT21 When using an SD card connected to the SD card unit or the GOT enable the SD card access in the GOT utility in advance Failure to do so causes the data not to be read or written When removing the SD card from the GOT make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT resulting in a failure or break When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT resulting in a failure or break Before removing the USB device from the GOT follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT After the successful completion dialog is displayed remove the USB device by hand carefully Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT resulting in a failure or break DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local reg
410. s 255 255 255 255 connected Ethernet module For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manual Host link service A 0 TCP IP Select the protocol to be used S 9 2 4 in the port A of the host link 2 gt 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 1 UDP IP Port No 12289 service via Ethernet Host link service A protocol command data type 2 O ASCII format Select the command data type to be used in the port A of the host link service via Ethernet When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the Port No 12289 System Host link service B o Tcpyp Selectthe protocol to be used The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with protocol the port B of the host link the above numbers Port No 12291 service via Ethernet Consult with the administrator of the network before Host link service B setting an IP address to the and controller protocol comman Select the command data type O ASCII format to be used in the port B of the 52 data type host link service via Ethernet Port No 12291 When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting Station When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each Station to the GOT 7 3 2 m Ethernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 w
411. s Co Ltd is necessary 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 5 2 2 System Configuration 3 To connect to the EH 150 series connect to the serial port of the CPU module The module jack 8 pins D sub connector 15 pins conversion cable EHRS05 made by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd is necessary 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 2 System Configuration 2 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 2 3 2 RS 422 cable 2 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1 Connection diagram GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 RDA 2 2M TXDP n GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side RDB 7 i TXDN CD NC 1 Eu SDA 4 RXDP 5 RD RXD 2 2 SD SDB 6 RXDN SD TXD 3 gt 3 RD rsa 3 Hs a TXDG 5 ER DTR 4 7 RV2 DR RSB se s e SG 5 DR DSR 6 s cs a RS RTS 7 6 z cs cTs 8 k 4 RS RXDG 5 9 a ME 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 NC GT12 NC GT11 NC 2 5 232 connection diagram 2 GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side CD NC 1 d 1 NC RD RXD 2 2 SD SD TXD 3 gt 3 RD ER DTR 4 gt 7 RV2 DR SG
412. s depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name Ecos UT Pin No Pin No RDA 26 24 RDB 25 23 SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 5 27 25 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Turnon the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 RS 485 connection diagram 2 Temperature GOTside 7 27 Temperature controller E controller 1 RDA1 RXD1 10 EHA Li Li lt SDB X RDB1 RXD1 12 R n SDA SDA1 TXD1 6 N gt A RDB SDB1 TXD1 8 TENE E RDA d SG 2 ae e E SG RSA RTS 14 t T GND CSA CTS 18 VE 4 LA RSB RTS 16 xn 2 CSB CTS 20 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 E SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 Lu RDB2 RXD2 11 a NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 lt 19 gt 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table o Model of temperature controller Sianal GREEN Series GREEN Series x UT UP UM Us Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 o SDA 24 22 z RDB 25 23 RDA 26 24 5 27 25 2
413. s not available after production is discontinued CON ou gt 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc
414. s of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device For example the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 8 34 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 7 Precautions CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 Connectable Model 1 9 2 9 2 System 9 4 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 30 94 GOT Side 5 9 39 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 41 9 6 Device Range that Set 9 52 9 7 5 222 REOR 9 53 l 4 E 2 O o 2 a E o Y 2 E 2 E 2 2 O e 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 7 C icati Series Model name oen n Connectable model Refer to deos ou H PCP J x RS 422
415. selection 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other 1 Adjust with GOT and temperature controller settings units 2 RS 232 communication settings PC loader Settings by switch communication RS 485 communication RS 422 485 switch setting switch c Item Set value Terminating resistor Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps selection switch DCE DTE switch o Data bit 8bits fixed m Parity bit Even Odd None HE 5 Stop bit 1bit fixed SCR 0 Station No 1 fixed U 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings E POWER S DATA OUT TXD a 77 RXD 3380 GB STPARSOONVEXTOC E RXD O DATA CH T e HH f z 1 Settings of transmission speed and MANUAL AUTO 5 MANUAL AUTO MONITOR o BIT RATE Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 7 9600bps ON ON OFF Transmission OFF OFF ON speed 38400bps ON OFF ON MANUAL jode AUTO ON 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 15 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 2 Settings of DCE DTE RS 422 485 and terminating 5 5 5
416. signer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller solde 100 6010 101 6011 102 6012 103 6013 104 6014 105 6015 106 6016 107 6017 For the setting other than the above 108 GD18 error dedicated device is out of 109 GD19 range will occur 110 GD20 111 GD21 112 GD22 113 GD23 114 GD24 115 GD25 8 32 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT A The following shows the relation between station numbers of are as follows the temperature controller and the GOT data register Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 e data register The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the 100 GD10 11099 same series 101 6011 If setting a value Please make the setting according to the specifications of outside the range the controller actually used abovera device 114 GD24 range error When a non existent device or a device number outside occurs the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored 2 When there is no setting for the CPU No in the communication settings on the temperature c
417. sing peripheral S W of MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 1 Nexgenie 1000 PLC Item Setting details 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 1 Communication speed 57600bps 115200bps Data bit bits Stop bit ibit 2bits Parity bit None Even Odd Full duplex Half duplex Half duplex 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Nexgenie 2000 PLUS PLC Item Setting details Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data bit bits Stop bit ibit 2bits Parity bit None Even Odd Full duplex Half duplex Half duplex 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 13 12 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 5 PLC Side Settings 13 6 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item Bb Device Information X 0 allele D EJ F x 41516 Pre Ms naon Bt Address Network Station No 1 Item Desc
418. sion Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit Stop Bit Parity Retry Times 7 bit 1 bit Even Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Station No Selection Item Description Range Set this it h h th e 4800bps nd transmission speed used for Transmission communication with the connected pina Speed equipment 19200bps J 384006 Default 19200bps m Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with Tbit fixed the connected equipment Default 7bit Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a Parity parity check and now it is performed Even fixed during communication Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to Stimes error occurs Default Otime Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms GOT Default Oms Specify whether to use the station No during communication Station If Yes is selected the station No is Yes or No Selection fixed to 0 Default Yes 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of p
419. sistor 1 2 H 100 OHM SN Disable OFF OFF 12 pion sid ii 1 The default setting is Disable 1 The default setting is Disable For 5422 485 communication unit Terminating resistor setting switch Rear view of RS 422 485 communication unit 27 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Terminating resistor setting switch inside the cover resistor setting switch GT23 Terminating ON Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor 1 2 resistor setting switch 100 OHM ON ON Terminating Switch No 1 2 me Disable OFF OFF pg 1 2 100 OHM ON ON 1 default setting is Disable 1 2 Disable OFF OFF For GT2710 V UL LU D O d 1t 0 Or 1 The default setting is Disable For GT2310 V DULL
420. ssible 3 GOT cannot read or write data from to consecutive devices 7 4 2 YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 Series Device No Device name Setting range representa tion Input relay X X00201 to X71664 Output relay Y Y00201 to Y71664 Internal relay 1 11 to 165535 L00001 to L08192 L10001 to L18192 L20001 to L28192 L30001 to L38192 140001 to L48192 g L50001 to L58192 160001 to 168192 Decimal 170001 to 178192 a Common relay E E1 to E4096 Special relay 3 M1 to M9984 Timer TU TU1 to TU3072 Counter CU CU1 to CU3072 The bit specification of the word device Setting range of each word except Timer device Counter Timer TP TP1 to TP3072 Timer TS TS1 to TS3072 Counter CP CP1 to CP3072 Counter CS CS1 to CS3072 Filer register B 9 B1 to B262144 Data register D D1 to D65535 Common register R R1 to R4096 Index register V1 to V256 i 00001 to W08192 W10001 to W18192 Decimal 2 W20001 to W28192 Link register W W30001 to W38192 W40001 to W48192 W50001 to W58192 W60001 to W68192 W70001 to W78192 Special register zy3 Z1 to Z1024 The word specification of the bit device except Timer Counter Setting range of each bit devices 1 Writing is not possible 2 Writing to continuous devices is not possible 3 The GOT cannot read or write data from to consecutive devices
421. ster compatible to 6 4 3 YAS KAWA CP9200 H the data format where internal data of PLC is displayed using Ror W The following shows the difference between the display values of SR SW and those of R W corresponding to the values of PLC internal data Device No Device name Setting range representation PLC internal data 16 bit SR SW R W i 3 000 to OB7FF 9999 9999 9999 Coll QB o 1001 1001 1001 2 Coil OB 3 000 to IB7FF 9 The bit 1909 1000 a E Setting range of each word specification of 999 999 999 device the word device 0 Input register IWOO to IW7F 4 4 32769 IW 9 Hexadecimal E Output ist 999 999 33767 on register OWO0 to OW7F 1000 1000 33768 9 DWO to DW2047 1001 1001 33769 i DW ZD 200 to 202047 9999 9999 42767 Decimal 5 internal N1 to N1536 can be set as 0513 to 02048 gt MWO to MW7694 However setting must not exceed O1 to O512 and O513 to MW O2048 6 Change the input relay 10001 to 14096 to I1 to 14096 for The word Setting range of each bit setting When set in default specification of 7 Only reading is possible the bit device devices 1 Setting is available only when CP 9200H is used 2 To use data registers of CPU 1 during operat
422. switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit LC02 0N LC01 0N Front 5 1 Transmission speed setting switch Set the same transmission speed of the GOT For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following s 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Setting Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 Data format setting switch Set the data length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side For the settings on the GOT side refer to the following 2 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Switch No Description Settings ON 8bits 1 Data bit OFF 7518 2 ON done OFF none arity ONS OFF ON even 11 3 EX OFF odd ET ON 2bits 4 Stop bit Ae EXT OFF 1bit ON done 5 Check Seu OFF none End ch t 6 T Mn al OFF none specification 7 Protect function OFF disabled 8 OFF 3 Station No switch LCO2 ON only Settings Rotary For RS For RS Sith Description 232 422
423. t Interface Module on the base unit F3LE01 5T F3LE11 0T lt lt o x o z O zZ z O Right side view without cover 1 IP address switch Set the IP address with eight Hex rotary switches on the side of the base unit 07 07 07 07 SCR SUR SUD beg 6561 beg vege 07 07 07 07 beg beg beg 6661 Hexadecimal CO A8 FA D2 1 1 Decimal 192 168 250 210 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 19 7 3 Ethernet Connection 2 Condition setting switch Set the data format write protection line processing at TCP timeout error or operation mode with the DIP Switch on the side of the base unit Switch Description Set value No Data 1 OFF ASCII code Writ 2 rite OFF not protect protect 3 4 ON not available Reserved w 5 OFF always 6 Line processing i 7 an TOP OFF close the line timeout ti peration OFF normal operation mode 1 Applicable to only F3LE01 5T 7 20 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 3 5 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module F3LE12 OT Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit FSLETZ UT _ Con
424. t can be manual confirmed in I F Communication Setting gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility For details refer to the following 2 Precedence in communication settings 1 12 communication setting When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 11 12 4 Side Settings 12 5 PLC Side Setting LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC For details of LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLCs refer to the following manual User s Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Model name Refer to K80S K120S K200S K300S PLC CPU 12 5 1 12 5 1 Connecting to PLC CPU Settings of the communication specifications There is no item to be set using the hardware Set the items using the engineering software for MASTER K Item Station No Setting details 0 to 31 Communication 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600bps G7L CUEB G7L CUEC G6L CUEB G6L CUEC G4L CUEA Cnet I F module 12 5 2 12 12 12 5 PLC Side Setting speed Data bit 7or8 Parity bit None Even Odd Stop bit 10r2 1 For the setting method of the engineering software refer to the following gt User s Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 5 2 Connecting to Cnet I F module Settings of the communication specifications There is no item to be set using the hardware Set th
425. t to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Some failures of the communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction When the GOT backlight has a failure the GOT status will be as follows Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction GT27 GT25 GT23 When the GOT backlight has a failure the POWER LED blinks orange blue and the display section dims In such a case the input by the touch switch s is disabled GT21 When the GOT backlight has a failure the display section dims In such a case the input by the touch switches is disabled Even if the display section dims on the liquid crystal of the GOT the input by the touch switch s may remain enabled This may cause a malfunction of the touch switch For example if an operator assumes that the display section
426. t with two RS485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor 55 Other than 3 1 Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open network port of RS485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model With CH3 Product with the 5485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with two 5485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model With C4 Product with the RS485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model Terminating res Set the termina KE m Connecting terminating resistors Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line istor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal ing resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal RS 485 connection diagram 9 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W 9 RS232C RS485 interface converter Temperature controller in TATA ta RSB EI E TIT MUT 1 EE RSB AC ii 11 RSA ti ti 3 T4 RSA SG 11 56 i i 5 r1 1 1 SG GND US T des t 4 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the m
427. tem Configuration Temperature Connection cable GOT controller Number of connectable ommun 3 ie Cable model Max equipment Series ication s Option device Model Tee Connection diagram number distance FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5 7 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 7 se RS 485 connection diagram 17 4 wire type UM33A RS 485 FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m 7 FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 23 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 7 Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT GER RS 485 connection diagram 19 1200m UT52A 2 wire type UT55A 55 UM33A 5 5 485 Gs 85 485 connection diagram 10 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 2 wire type For 1 to 6 only the products that meet the following conditions can be connected Suffix code Annotation Optional suffix code Remark Function Open network Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type Tora Without LP 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor 71 Product with the open network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model Product without the additional contact output points DO Other than 3 1 and with the open network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model 2 Product with RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire Wi
428. tem Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Device settings of SIEMENS PLC 57 200 300 400 1200 series SIEMENS OP Ethernet 1 When setting a bit device as a bit device Set the device using the format of byte address DEC bit address 0 to 7 Device M 01287 Device number Bit address 0 to 7 Byte address DEC 2 When setting a data register Set the device using the format of data block DB data word DW Device name Device DB 100 5 DBW 10000 Data word DW numb Data block DB numbe 3 Precautions when setting devices a Preparing to set a data register It is necessary to define the data block using peripheral software and sequence program before using a data register Setting more than one data block cannot be done for the data register b Object that cannot be set Timer current value T Only one device can be set for the write target of this device Therefore multiple devices such as using the recipe function etc cannot be used c Notation method of the data registers with the bit specification The notation of the data registers with the bit specification differs between the GOT and the PLC The following shows the correspondence table Device name Displays the device type and setting range which are Inf ti
429. th CH3 type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 With C4 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 3 mE BEN 2 wire type and with the power supply for 24 sensor Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model iu Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 With C4 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with two RS 485 communication ports and without 2 1 7 nn the power supply for 24VDC sensor Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 6 1 Without LP and without the power supply of 24VDC sensor 7 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED c a x 2 o a 2 2 gt E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 11 8 2 System Configuration 8 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the temperature controller 8 31 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection
430. th of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 53 1 4 1 connector specifications c YOKOGAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user s manual RS 422 cable 1 Connection diagram a RS 422 connection diagram 1 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side RDA 2 fe SDB RDB 7 6 SDA SDA 1 RDB SDB 6 gt 3 RSB 8 CSA 4 4 9 amp SG 5 k SG FG SHIELD b RS 422 connection diagram 2 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side RDA 2 SDB RDB 7 i SDA SDA 1 RDB SDB 6 RDA RSA 3 RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 6 5 gt SG FG FG 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 1200m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 737 1 4 1 connector specifications YOKOGAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user s manual 3 Connecting terminating resistors a GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable
431. th that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 5 13 Connecting to THV A1 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps fixed Communication protocol MODBUS MODBUS data 0 to 255 ms Extension time Data bit 8bit fixed Data bit configuration Parity bit None fixed Stop bit 1bit fixed BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit BO2 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 1 to 994 Slave address z Interval time 9 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Setthe extension time for the data interval time in the MODBUS communication which is lower than 24 bit time Set when the data time interval exceeds 24 bit time 3 Select the
432. ting 2 Standard I F Ethernet Multi Detail Setting Property _ GOT Net No GOT Station GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 4 GOT Communication Port 5023 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Ethernet Setting Edea B3 _ Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address FETCH Port No WF 1 1 1 SIEMENSS7 1 1 11 2000 Cancel v 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer SIEMENS Controller Type Depends on Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE SIEMENS 7 Ethernet OP communication SIEMENS OP Ethernet I F Interface to be used Driver Depends on Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Gateway OP communication Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 15 3 3 detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 5 1 1 2 I F communication setting 15 12 15 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15 3 Et
433. tings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 4 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 1 Check on the Check for errors occurring on the Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT PLC CPU servo amplifier and communications For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility r Error code Communication Channel No tem alarm display x GOT error ChNo 1 Reset 402 Communicat ion timeout Confirm communication pathway or modules 17 17 36 CPU error No Error Network error No Error 9 72 z gt 4 o 72 2 a ir amp lt 7 Time of occurrence Displayed only for errors Advanced alarm popup display With the advanced alarm popup display function alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not regardless of the display screen Since comme
434. tion cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model T TCR EA Cable model us connectable Series Connection diagram 5 Connection diagram Option device Model equipment distance name ation Type distance number number Built into GOT Up to 31 Ss RS 485 Gs RS 232 temperature CB connection diagram 1200m CD485 V 1 RS 232 connection diagram 15m controllers 3 HAE for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd 9 12 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT 2 CD Em 7 Number of connectable ommunication able model ax Series pes Option device Model equipment Type Connection diagram number distance GT cud i ser i 1 paie RS 485 connection 1200m Built into GOT diagram 5 FA LTBGT2RACBLOS5 0 5m 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT RS 485 connection diagram 6 CB RS 485 B 27 25 RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200m GT15 RS4 TE l 4 E 2 O o 2 a gt
435. tion diagram number distance GT _ GT Built into GOT GT09 C30R20305 9S 3m or STARDOM RS 232 Gers 353 i 15m 1 GOT for 1 PLC preparing i connection diagram 2 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Connect the connection cable to the COM port of the PLC 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 5 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 A Connection diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC RS 232 cable 1 Connection diagram a RS 232 connection diagram 1 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side 1 RD RXD 2 SD TXD 3 ER DTR 4 SG 5 DR DSR k RS RTS 7 CS CTS amp E 9 b RS 232 connection diagram 2 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side CD 1 DURER VIL RD RXD 2 is so SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 4 56 5 5 sG DR DSR 6 amp 4 4 ER RS RTS 7 3 7 RS CS CTS 8 E gt CS 9 9 Shell _ bl sher 1 Connect the shield to the housing of the connectors on both the GOT and YOKOGAWA product sides c RS 232 connection diagram 3 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 7 6 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The leng
436. tly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull from the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock A module damage may result Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch grounded metals etc to discharge static electricity from human etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip switch of the terminating resistor Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static elec
437. to F063F Timer contact T TO to T255 Decimal Counter contact C to C255 relay P000 to P063 Auxiliary relay M 000 to M191 Keep relay K K000 to K031 8 Link relay L L000 to 1063 gt 5 Special relay F F000 to F063 Decimal g Timer current value T TO to T255 Counter current value C to C255 Step controller S S0 to S99 Data register D DO to D9999 1 Only reading is possible 12 13 12 6 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 14 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 19 CONNECTION MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 1 Connectable Model 13 2 13 2 System 13 3 13 3 Connection Diagram 13 5 13 4 GOT Side 5 13 11 13 5 PLC Side 5 13 12 13 6 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 13 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 CONNECTION TO MITSUBISHI INDIA PLC 13 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to NG16DL NG16ADL NG14RL RS 232 cr Nexgenie 1000 PLC o RS 422 27 13 2 1 NG16ADN NG14RN Nexgenie2210 Nexgenie2211 RS 2
438. to the following 2 14 2 I F communication setting can be 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 Ethernet Connection Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5030 Retry Times Startup Time Sec Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Item Description Range GOT Net No Set the network No of the GOT 110239 Default 1 Set the station No of the GOT GOT Station 110254 Default 1 GOT Ethernet Setting Set the GOT IP address subnet mask default gateway peripheral S W communication port No transparent port No GOT Communication Port No Set the GOT port No for the connection with the Ethernet module Default 5030 1024 to 5010 5014 to 65534 Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default 3times 0 to 5times Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU Default 3sec 3 to 255sec Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out Default 3sec 1 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network destination PLC Default Oms 0 to 10000 ms 1 Each of GOT Statio
439. tricity TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION For the analog resistive film type touch panels normally the adjustment is not required However the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs execute the touch panel calibration When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs other object may be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE DATA STORAGE IS IN USE NWARNING Ifthe SD card is removed from drive A of the GOT while being accessed by the GOT the may stop processing data for about 20 seconds The GOT cannot be operated during this period The functions that run in the background including a screen updating alarm logging scripts and others are also interrupted Remove the SD card after checking the following items GT27 GT25 GT23 After checking the light off of SD card access LED remove the SD card GT21 After disabling SD card access on the utility screen of the GOT and checking that the SD card access LED is off remove the SD card NCAUTION If the data storage is removed from the GOT while being accessed by the GOT the data storage and files may be damaged Before removing the data storage from the GOT check the SD card access LED system signal or othe
440. troller Setting window is displayed Select the Default 154 channel to be used from the list menu Specity whether or not to perform a Parity pelo check and itis performed Even fixed 3 Set the following items pees m etault Even Manufacturer HITACHI SEHE number retries to be Controller HITACHI HIDIC H ierfarmad whad a communication I F Interface to be used Retry erroroscurs 0 to btimes Driver Set either of the following Default Otime HITACHI HIDIC Set the time period for a HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set transmission yp Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms Make the settings according to the usage GOT environment Default 57 2 4 2 Communication detail settings Specify whether to use the station No during communication Click the OK button when settings are completed Station No if Yes is selected the station No is Yas or No Selection fixed to 0 Default Yes The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following gt 1 1 2 communication setting 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 9 2 4 Side Settings 2 HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 Property Value Transmis
441. tting item PLC side setting When specifying the station No from 0 to 9 add 0 before W the number and set it as 00 to 09 Port 1 SNP 6 Set the same set value for the data length for the GOT and PLC LE Port Type Slave gt Data Rate 9600bps 19200bps Flow Control NONE 5 Parity EVEN ODD NONE Stop Bits bit 2bits 2 Timeout 3 Long o Turn Around Delay 4 0 SNP ID 00 to 31 Converter Power Consumption 6 0 1 Setto SNP 2 Setto Slave 3 Set to Long 4 SettoO 5 Setwithin the range of 00 to 31 When specifying the station No from 0 to 9 add 0 before the number and set it as 00 to 09 6 Setto 0 only when connecting to Port2 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 13 11 5 PLC Side Setting 11 5 3 Connecting to 693 311 11 5 5 Station number setting Communication settings Make the communication settings using the engineering tool When making the settings set Configuration Mode on the Setting tab of the engineering tool to SNP only Setting item PLC side setting SNP Enable YES SNP Mode Slave Interface 3 RS232 RS485 Data Rate 9600bps 19200bps Parity ODD NONE EVEN Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Flow Control NONE Turn Around Delay NONE Timeout Long Set to YES 2 Set to SLAVE 3 Setthe communication format to be used only when connecting to Port2 4 Setto NONE 5 Set to NONE 6 Set to LONG 11 5 4 Co
442. ual gt Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 3 RS 422 connection diagram 3 RKC temperature controller side temperature controller side 26 T A TB 27 H f T B 28 R A RB 2 H R B SG 25 f SG 1 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No PF900 901 puis FB400 AG500 MA900 ane 2 FB900 400 401 MA901 qu 900 901 specifications SG 25 25 44 3 6 T A 26 26 45 5 T B 27 27 46 4 R A 28 28 47 1 R B 29 29 48 2 4 RS 422 connection diagram 4 GOT side RKC temperature controller side 2 RDA 2 T B RDB 7 J T A SDA 1 R B SDB 6 M R A RSA SG RSB 8 Hh i CSA 4 CSB 9 k sc 5 lt i FG 1 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM m Connecting terminating resistors 12 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No PF900 901 FB400 0500 0 aya uu 3 FB900 HA400 401 MA901 specifications HA900 901 SG 25 25 44 3 3 6 T A 26 26 45 5 5 T B 27 27 46 4 4 R A 28 28 47 1 1 R B 29 29 48 2 2 3 following shows the pin assignment
443. ual 2 8 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 3 Connection Diagram 2 4 Side Settings 2 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 2 4 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 HITACHI HIDIC H Set the channel of the connected equipment o 2 Property Value E Transmission Speed BPS 19200 secs Data Bit 7 bit 5 inufacturer REA 3 Stop Bit 1 bit lt A Standard F RS422 485 z Parity Even Gateway Serve lbs Gient Retry Times 0 EIL emu Timeout Time Sec 3 z AD Buffer Memory Unit Nc 4 s Delay Time ms 0 Retry Times o Station No Selection Yes Station No Selection 2 ul 2 Item Description Range vem when change the 4800bps transmission speed used for E Transmission Sra 9600bps communication with the connected OK Cancel Apply Speed s 1 9200bps equipment 38400bps Default 19200bps 2 Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with Tbit fixed the connected equipment 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Default 7bit menu Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed 2 The Con
444. ulations Refer to the GOT2000 Series User s Manual Hardware for details of the battery directive in the EU member states TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to the GOT2000 Series User s Manual Hardware for details of the regulated models Make sure to transport the main unit and or relevant unit s the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine chlorine bromine and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects they cause malfunction when entering our products Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation heat method Additionally disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Mitsubishi GOT Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS d mie
445. units K3SC 10 5 5 7 3 Set as necessary 5 5 1 Connecting to PXR3 4 5 9 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 2 RS 232 communication settings PC loader communication Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps fixed Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Even Odd None Stop bit 1bit fixed Station 2 1 to 255 Communication protocol MODBUS 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps fixed Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit None fixed Stop bit bit fixed 5 14 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 5 3 Connecting to PXH9 5 5 4 Connecting to interface converter RC 77 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key Communication settings of the temperature controller Make the communication settings using setting 1 RS 485 communication settings switches Item Set value Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data bit 8bits fixed MANUAL AUTO AUTO Parity bit Even Odd None DCE DTE switching DCE Stop bit Abit fixed RS 422 485 switching RS 485 Station No 2 1 to 255 Terminating resistor OFF
446. us nication Connection dista oP On Model equipment name device diagram number diagram number Type diagram number nce Built into W BF 02 0500 GOT 0 5 RS 485 i 1200m 0485 RS 232 Y i 15m W BF 02 1000 1m 1 connection RS 232 connection 4 diagram 8 diagram 3 W BF 02 3000 3m GT15 RS2 9P Up to 31 THV A1 temperature controllers LE for 1 GOT Built into GOT 23 preparing RS 485 connection diagram 8 1200m CD485V RS 232 232 connection 15m diagram 3 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 25 9 2 System Configuration l e E 2 O o 2 3 a gt E o Y D E 2 E 2 2 O o 9 29 Connection to SRX When connecting to temperature control module X TIO with a converter Communication driver SR Mini HG MODBUS aes Connection cable 2 ili ili ca Connection cab Temperature b Connection cable 1 Interface Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model n EUM Commun Cable model um connectable Series Connection MEE ication Connection tear Option device Model equipment distance name distance diagram number Type diagram number Built into GOT X TIO Up to 31
447. ut position Description LOOLA AA Set the device name device number and bit number 1 Result ES LQ L1 0 3 Byte number Device The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of Neque it 000 3 Byte number word device 0 7 Bit position information Displays the device type and its setting range selected in Lida A A A A 0 0 A Device 4 A A CPU type CPUO CPU1 LI L1 0 3 Byte number A 0 7 Bit position UP A 0 7 Bit position POINT A A 0 EFIO O Byte 4 2 EFI b A CPU type CPUO CPU1 1 Device settings of SICK Safety controller git O 1 2 EFI number 1 2 EFI number L1 1 3 Device number a Input I Output Q 0 3 Byte number 1 3 Device number S A 0 3 Byte number Device A 0 EFIO 1 ByteA 2 EQOA AA A AIO 1 Byte I 12 i 8 4 A A A A CPU type CPUO CPU1 EQ O 1 2 EFI number 4 2 EFI number A 0 2 Byte number Device Input position 1 to 8 0 2 Byte number Module number 1 to 12 B DA RS232 data AX 0 99 Dec Byte number Safety controller to RS232 b Logic result LQ Logic input LI WA Device A 0 49 Dec Word number 4 w Word virtualization of D GOT independent device L 7 Not available 0 D1 Upper bits Device Bit position 0 to 7 DO Lower bits name Byte number 0 to 3 LD LDA 0 3 Byte number R
448. wing manual 2 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 3 RS 232 connection diagram 3 Interface converter GOT side CD485 V side CD NC 1 oe T 1 CD 1 RD RXD 2 2 RXD 1 1 SD TXD 3 i 1 3 TXD 1 1 ER DTR 4 4 DTR 1 1 5 5 5 GND 1 DR DSR 6 6 DSR 1 1 RS RTS 7 i 7 RTS 1 1 CS CTS CTS 1 NC 9 9 Ri 1 GT16 CD GT15 GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC 4 5 232 connection diagram 4 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular connector 1 CD 1 RD RXD 2 k SD TXD SD TXD gt RD RXD ER DTR 4 i SG 5 DR DSR RS RTS 7 1 1 1 i i SG 1 1 i CS CTS 8 i 1 1 9 I 1 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No 8 400 401 Signal names 400 PF900 HA900 901 MA900 FB900 PF901 Communication Communication 901 1 2 SG 25 25 13 25 44 SD TXD 26 26 14 26 45 RD RXD 27 27 15 27 46 Precautions when preparing a cable 5 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 6 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 737 1 4 1 connector specifications 7 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with t
449. ximum length of the RS 232 cable differs me Ma TG according to the specifications of the YASKAWA PLC side RDB 7 a 2 TX For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s SDA 1 L5 RX4 manual i SDB 6 r3 gt 4 RX b GOT side connector For the side connector refer to the following RSA FH 5 lt 1 4 1 connector specifications RSB 6 RX c YASKAWA PLC side connector CSA 4 z Receiving side Use the connector compatible with the YASKAWA termineren PLC side module CSB 9 ee j 14 GND For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s SG 5 9 TX manual T e 10 RX RS 422 cable Sending side termination 1 Connection diagram m 7 43 vcc a RS 422 connection diagram 1 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side 1 8 TX RDA 2 2 SDA RDB 7 9 SDB d RS 422 connection diagram 4 side YASKAWA PLC side SDA 1 3 SDB 6 gt 6 RDB RDA 2 1 TX RSA 3 1 PGND RDB 7 r pa 2 TX TAE B L Receiving side SDA 4 RX termination Sending side SDB 6 1 4 RX 5 4 termination i CSB 9 7 SG RSA 3 T 5 1 1 1 1 sco 5 RSB 6 RX ES s i csa 4 eu MM RXR CSB 9 r 8 TX b RS 422 connection diagram 2 ee GND GOT side YASKAWA PLC side SUE ae FG H 10 RX 2 T 7 TX i 11 7 4 5 TX
450. y 5 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 4 GOT Side Settings 5 13 ui O 2 E z O 2 2 E gt 5 LL O E z E 2 2 O 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 1 FUJI temperature controller For details of FUJI temperature controller refer to the following manual lt gt User s Manual of the FUJI temperature controller 2 Interface converter For details on communication settings of the interface converter refer to the following manual LF User s Manual of interface converter 5 5 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 or PXG9 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 1 RS 485 communication settings Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits fixed Model name Refer to 4 1 PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 eae Parity bit Even Odd None PXR9 as Stop bit 1bit fixed Temperature controller PXGA PXG5 PXG9 5 5 2 Station No 2 1to 255 PXH9 5 5 3 Communication Read only permission or read and overwrite RC 77 5 5 4 permissions 3 permission SI 30A 5 5 5 5 Adjust the settings with settings Interface converter Ein 2 r KS 485 5 5 6 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other
451. y LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 12 8 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 2 System Configuration 12 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 12 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 5 232 connection diagram 1 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM GOT side PLC side CD 1 1 5 RD RXD 2 i 7 TXD2 SD TXD 3 4 RXD2 ER DTR 4 2 RXD1 SG 5 5 SG DR DSR 6 3 TXD1 RS RTS 7 5V CS CTS i 8 Sc NC 9 9 SG 2 5 232 connection diagram 2 GOT side LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM PLC side CD 1 1 CD RD RXD 2 i 3 TXD SD TXD 3 2 RXD ER DTR 4 4 DTR SG 5 5 sG DR DSR 6 6 DSR RS RTS 7 7 RTS CS CTS k iJ CTS M 3 RS 232 connection diagram 3 GOT side terminal block LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side SD I 4 RXD2 RD PEE i 7 TXD2 ER 1 5v DR 2 RXD1 SG s se RS TXD1 cs 5 a SG 9 SG 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 4 RS 232 connection diagram 4 GOT side terminal block LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS
452. y Odd Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address 00 Delay Time ms 5 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with the connected 38400bps P equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with x1 Data Bit the connected equipment bits abits Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a None parity check and how it is performed Parity duri S Even uring communication Odd Default Odd Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the host address station No Host Address ofthe GOT to which the PLC is 00 to 31 connected in the connected network Default 00 Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms GOT Default 5ms 1 If no setting is provided for the data length for the controller set 8 bits If the setting is provided for the data length for the controller set the same set value for the data length for the GOT as that for the PLC COO 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface
453. ype n FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m Up to 16 temperature GT IcT controllers for 1 GOT GR RS 485 connection diagram 14 4200m GT15 RS4 TE 4 wire type 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 7 8 2 System Configuration 4 l a E z O o a 2 5 n E lt gt lt o x 5 O z E o z Z O o 8 2 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series When using the RS232C RS485 converter Connection cable 2 Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable 1 m t RS232C RS485 A bras Connection cable 1 4 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter Number of Cable model Commun connectable Series Connection diagram Max Model ication fable model Max Option device Model equipment distance name Connection diagram number distance number Type Built into GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m GOT Up to 31 RS 485 or temperature i 1200m ML2 RS 232 15m sca liio 15 Us RS 232 connection controllers UT32A amre type diagram 1 PES f

RKC INSTRUMENT SR Mini HG SYSTEM H-PCP-G Specifications

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents